Home

Chapter 10

1. Oo o Option A Control Circuit P Board Connector 4CN p pH v for option A area p eh Make sure that the i l i apexes of the black Connector t 1 Option C triangular marks match 2CN for option C area E o lt AO FR SEE j gt Securing t J ad I latch 3G3RV I only Squeeze and pull to remove de er o Hey Clee pl AAAA RAITAA ESS SEEPGBE Ce I Oo O Front View Side View Note When the DeviceNet Communications Card is mounted other Optional Cards cannot be mounted in the C area s Communications Cable Wiring This section explains how to prepare and connect the communications cables to connectors for the DeviceNet Network Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the communications cables to the connectors Note For connecting of the DeviceNet Communications Card of the Inverter use DCA1 5C10 Thin Cables Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring because of the terminal block dimensions 1 Remove about 30 mm of the cable covering being careful not to damage the shield weaving un derneath Do not remove more than about 30 mm removing too much of th
2. Confirms the completion of reading 003001 003005 DIFU 013 MOV 021 000001 m 1 000001 003005 003001 D00201 f 2 003000 003000 MOV 021 m 2 000001 D00202 BSET 071 0000 ANDW 034 D00200 D00201 D00209 FF00 D00203 ANDW 034 D00000 ANDW 034 FF00 D00202 D00200 00FF D00204 ORW 035 D00200 ORW 035 0003 Transfers read data to D00001 D00203 D00205 D00204 D00001 ANDW 034 i 500000 Word m bit 7 000002 00FF C 903091 D00206 003001 XFER 070 30002 END 001 D00205 n MOVD 083 0000 Sets the read data ton 003000 CMP 020 D00205 m Equals Flag P_EQ C 003002 ANDW 034 m 1 00FF D00208 CMP 020 D00206 Equals Flag P_EQ D00208 C 003003 003002 003003 C 003005 9 21 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 9 3 3 Writing Parameter Data This programming example is designed to write the parameter data in the 3G3MV Inverter After writ ing has been completed be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data as the Inverter operation data To use special remote I O it will be necessary to switch the remote I O operation Refer to 5 2 Switching the Remote I O Function and change to the special remote I O operation m Allocations Bit 00
3. Sets CMND data 9 12 000000 003001 MOV 021 JA O 003000 D0002 003000 D01000 MOV 021 151100 000A 000000 Online Flag D01001 CMND 490 A20200 Network D02000 MOV 021 Communications D03000 0000 Enabled Flag D01000 ao Executes CMND instruction ASL 025 MOV 021 Nauk 0000 00FE ommunications D01003 ai ji Error Flag ASR 026 Move Po NEWO tn 2000 0000 Enabled Flag Error Flag D01004 ASL 025 0000 MOV 021 Confirms execution of CMND instruction 40064 D01005 151100 000002 Online Flag MOV 021 k CMP 020 2801 A20200 Network 0000 D02000 Communications D03001 Enabled Flag MOV 021 I MOV 021 D00220 Equals Flag D03001 D02001 P_EQ D00100 MOV 021 ASR 026 D00003 0000 D02002 ASR 026 MOV 021 0000 D00004 D02003 MOV 021 Equals Flag 40000 MOV 021 P EQ 0000 D00203 D02004 003001 MOV 021 END 001 D00204 D02005 MOV 021 D00205 D02006 MOV 021 D00206 D02007 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 9 3 Special Remote I O Programs 9 3 1 Simple Operation Programs This section describes examples of simple operation programming using special remote I O To use special remote I O it is necessary to switch the remote I O operation Refer to 5 2 Switching the Remote I O Function and change to the special remote I O operation Once the Program Start Input Bit
4. 20000000000 2 O p20000000000 5 On the opposite side of the DeviceNet Communications Unit there is a ground terminal that con nects to the shield wire for the Communications Cable Connect this ground terminal to the FG terminal of the Inverter 3 8 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 TE ET L IFE A DeviceNet CNI Communications Unit MS ga NODE ADRNS x10 x1 10 Of o ORO 220000000000 i 2 O po000000009 aie 5 Wire shield grounding wire to the Inverter s FG terminal Note Cut the shield grounding wire to the proper length before wiring 6 After aligning the positions of the DeviceNet Communications Unit connector and the Inverter con nector push the frames of the Inverter and the Unit together until they click 7 Tighten the fixing screws on the upper part of the DeviceNet Communications Unit to the mount ing base attached in step 4 8 Wire the communications cables and set the Unit s node address 9 Attach the Operator and the terminal cover to the front side of the DeviceNet Communications
5. 10 51 Appendices Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Timer function OFF delay time Setting range 0 0 to 3000 0 See note 5 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting PID control mode selection 0to 4 Proportional gain P 0 00 to 25 00 Integral I time 0 0 to 360 0 Integral I limit 0 0 to 100 0 Derivative D time 0 00 to 10 00 PID limit 0 0 to 100 0 PID offset adjustment 100 0 to 100 0 PID primary delay time constant 0 00 to 10 00 PID output characteristics selection 0 1 PID output gain 0 0 to 25 0 PID reverse output selection 0 1 Selection of PID feedback command loss detection 0to2 PID feedback command loss detection level 0 to 100 PID feedback command loss detection time PID sleep function operation level 0 0 PID sleep operation delay time 0 0 Accel decel time for PID reference 0 0 Dwell frequency at start 0 0 Dwell time at start 0 0 Dwell frequency at stop 0 0 Dwell time at stop 0 0 Energy saving mode selection 0 Energy saving gain 0 7 See note 2 Energy saving filter time constant 0 50 See note 3 Energy saving coefficient Depends on capacity Power detection filter time constant 0 to 2000 20 10 52 Search operation voltage
6. Class 64 Hex Setting Setting Default Changes In At range unit setting during stance tribute opera tion Reference selection 0 to 3 Operation method selection 0 to 3 Stopping method selection 0 to 3 Operation selection after Oor1 switching to remote mode Run command selection in 0 or 1 programming modes Zero speed level DC injec 0 0 to tion braking starting fre 10 0 quency DC injection braking current 0 to100 DC injection braking time at 0 00 to start 10 00 DC Injection braking time at 0 00 to stop 10 00 Speed search selection 20r3 current detection or speed calculation Speed search operating 0 to 200 current current detection Speed search deceleration 0 1 to time current detection 10 0 Speed search wait time 0 0 to current detection or speed 20 0 calculation PID control mode selection O or 1 Proportional gain P 0 00 to 25 00 Integral I time 0 0 to 360 0 Integral I limit 0 0 to 100 0 10 73 Appendices Chapter 10 Register Class 64 Hex Setting Setting Default Changes In At range unit setting during stance tribute opera tion PID limit 0 0 to 100 0 PID offset adjustment 100 0 to 100 0 PID primary delay time con 0 00 to stant 10 00 Selection of PID feedback O to 2 command loss detection PID feedback command 0 to 1
7. DeviceNet Master ba dd i Unit Operating time measurement results DeviceNet Inverter e Forward Reverse Run Command to input Example It is possible to detect deterioration in the mechanical system and estimate expiration of the equip ment s service life by inputting the signals from sensors installed in the mechanical system driven by the motor 7 23 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Programmable Controller Unit Operating time measurement results DeviceNet Inverter Input travel completion using multi function input Input Table Motor o gt ee NNNNNNNXNUUNSNANANANANANUNUUUUSNANANANANNUUQUUUUCAANANANANANUNUUUASNANA Forward run command Ball screw 7 24 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 m Setting Method 1 Click the Operation Time Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window The numerals 00 to 05 in the No field correspond to the combinations of signals for the operating time measurement explained in 7 2 5 Operating Time Monitor Function 2 Double click the area to be set or select the field to be set and then click the Edit Button The setting window will be displayed Edit Device Parameters x Operation Time Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time No Equipment Name Operation Time Cy
8. Mounting The CS series DeviceNet Master Unit is mounted to the Backplane of the PLC in the same way as other Units are normally mounted e CJ series DeviceNet Master Units need no Backplane so connect the Units together by joining the connectors For details on mounting DeviceNet Master Units to PLCs and PLCs to control panels refer to the applicable PLC Operation Manual 2 3 2 Mounting and Setting Slaves m Settings The following example shows Slave settings For details on how to set Slaves refer to the explana tion in the Slave s operation manual e DRT2 1D16 Remote I O Terminals transistor inputs Node address 01 e DRT2 OD16 Remote I O Terminals transistor outputs Node address 02 e 3G3MV A2001 SYSDRIVE Inverter 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit Node address 03 e DRT2 OD16 Remote I O Terminals transistor outputs XWT OD08 Remote I O Terminal Expansion Unit Node address 05 Mounting Refer to the Inverter s operation manual for details on mounting the Inverter 2 7 Example System Startup Chapter 2 2 3 3 Mounting Connecting Devices The following connecting devices require being mounted e T branch Taps Secure to the control panel with screws or mount to a DIN track e Terminal block Terminating Resistors Secure to the control panel with screws 2 3 4 Connecting Cables m Connecting Communications Cables Connect the DeviceNet Master Unit and T branch Tap
9. 8 2 Wire the main circuit terminals and control circuit terminals of the Inverter When the Communi cations Unit is mounted the terminal block of the Inverter will be covered Therefore be sure to complete wiring for the Inverter terminals first 3 7 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 When the Operator of the Inverter is removed it will be possible to see a block secured at three places underneath Using pliers or another appropriate tool loosen the fixings and remove the block The connector for Optional Unit connections will become visible At this point ensure that dirt or foreign objects do not enter the connector 3 Using pliers cut sections indicated with X 22200000000 eerie 22200000000 p 2 Wire the main circuit terminals and control circuit terminals 4 Mount the mounting base included as an accessory onto the screw holes originally used for hold ing the Operator and the terminal cover to the body of the Inverter and using the screws provided as accessories secure the mounting base 4 Mounting base
10. e Warning Status Register Number 002A Hex Bit Content STP Operator stop SER EF BB OH OV UV FAN CE BUS Not used OH3 FBL STP Emergency stop Not used CO N Oo AJ amp PM H oO 10 33 Appendices Chapter 10 e Input Terminal Status Register Number 002B Hex Content Multi function input 1 terminal S1 1 Multi function input 2 terminal S2 1 Multi function input 3 terminal S3 1 Multi function input 4 terminal S4 1 Multi function input 5 terminal S5 1 Multi function input 6 terminal S6 1 Multi function input 7 terminal S7 1 Not used e Inverter Status Register Number 002C Hex Content During Run 1 During Run Zero speed 1 zero speed Frequency agree 1 frequency agree Warning minor fault 1 alarm Frequency detection 1 1 output frequency lt n095 Frequency detection 2 1 output frequency gt n095 Inverter ready 1 ready UV 1 UV Baseblock 1 during baseblock Frequency reference mode 1 not communications RUN command mode 1 not communications Overtorque detection 1 over torque detection Not used Fault retry 1 fault retry Fault 1 fault Communications timeover over 2 s without normal communications 1 communications timeover detected CO N OD oOo AI OIN o Content Multi function con
11. Strip to 5 5 mm 7 if straight crimp NU terminal is not used Wire Straight crimp terminal or unsoldered cable Black Blue White Red Ly r PENE 3 13 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 m Inverter Wiring e 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Series Keep the DeviceNet wiring separated from the main circuit wiring as much as possible Do not wire them together 3G3RV 3G3PV Inverters of 5 5 kW or Less 3G3FV Inverters of 15 kW or Less Remove the plastic knockout on the side of the Inverter Remove the knockout with snips and wire through this side hole 3G3RV 3G3PV Inverters of 7 5 kW or More 3G3FV Inverters of 18 5 kW or More Route the DeviceNet communications line along the left side of the DeviceNet Communications Card and wire it to the Card e Do not bundle the control wiring and main circuit wiring together DeviceNet Communica Operator tions Card DeviceNet communications line wiring Control wiring Main circuit wiring 3 14 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 2 3 Connecting Communications Cables to T branch Taps To allow for easier maintenance use a T branch Tap or T branch wiring to connect the DeviceNet Communications Unit This section shows how to connect a communications cable with a connector attached to a T branch Tap There are two kinds of T branch Taps one makes a si
12. Communications external fault Select the detection method used input detection method for the communications external EFO Detection fault input from communications DeviceNet Communications Card 0 Faults always detected 1 Faults detected only while run ning i e when Run Commands are input Communications external fault Select the Inverter operation per input operation formed when there is a communi EFO Fault Action cations external fault EFO input from communications DeviceNet Communications Card 0 Decelerates to a stop using C1 02 deceleration time fault detec tion Coats to a stop fault detection Decelerates to a stop using the C1 09 emergency stop time fault detection 3 Continues operating alarm detection Not used Do not set Trace Sample Tim Note If F6 01 is set to 3 continues operating the Inverter will continue operating when a communi cations fault occurs according to the contents of settings immediately before Be sure to take any steps necessary to ensure safety such as installing a limit switch or an emergency stop switch 4 8 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 4 2 4 Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units e Perform the following settings to specify units for data related to frequencies speeds used in DeviceNet communications e The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r min so always set the number of motor poles
13. Cumulative operation time Monitors U1 13 1 hr units FLASH ID software No Monitors U1 14 Frequency reference voltage Terminal A1 input value Monitors U1 15 0 1 units 100 10 V with sign for voltage setting Multi func tion analog input Termi nal A2 input value Monitors U1 16 0 1 units 100 20 mA or 100 10 V with sign for voltage setting 0051 and 0052 Not used 0053 Output fre quency after a soft start Monitors U1 20 0 01 Hz units with sign 0054 and 0055 Not used 0057 PID feed back Monitors U1 24 0 01 units input corresponding to max frequency 100 with sign 0059 and 005A Not used 005B CPU ID Monitors U1 28 005F and 0060 Not used 0061 OPE error parameter Monitors U1 34 outputs parameter 0063 PID input quantity Monitors U1 36 0 01 units max frequency 100 with sign 0064 PID output quantity Monitors U1 37 0 01 units max frequency 100 with sign 0065 PID refer ence Monitors U1 38 0 01 units max frequency 100 10 69 Appendices Class 64 stance In At tribute Register No Hex RS 422A 485 commu nications error Chapter 10 Contents Monitors U1 39 Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error
14. Note 1 The function set with the multi function input selection parameters can be used by operating multi function input 3G3MV The functions set in n052 to n056 function selection for multi function inputs 3 to 7 can be used 3G3RV 3G3PV The functions set in H1 01 to H1 05 function selection for multi function inputs 1 to 5 can be used Multi function input 6 is not used 3G3FV The functions set in H1 01 to H1 06 function selection for multi function inputs 1 to 6 can be used Note 2 The multi function contact output and multi function output O will be enabled when the fol lowing parameters are set so that the outputs in the Inverter s control terminals can be con trolled from communications 3G3MV Enabled when parameters n057 to n059 function selection for multi function outputs 1 to 3 are set to 18 12 hex to specify communications output 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Enabled when parameters H2 01 to H2 03 function selection for the multi function contact output and multi function outputs 1 and 2 are set to F not used 5 22 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 e Output Data Details Signal name Content Frequency reference Specifies the Inverter output frequency from communications 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV e Setting unit 0 01 Hz See note 2 3G3FV e Setting range 0 to maximum frequency in Hz See note 3 Example To set the frequency reference to 60 00 Hz 60 00 Hz 0 01 Hz 6000
15. CMND 490 Reading Inverter output current 3G3MV 3G3RV or 3G3FV Inverter 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit for 3G3MV Inverters 3G3RV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card for 3G3RV 3G3FV Inverters Note T branch wiring using Thin Cables Note When the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card is used the RS 422 RS 485 of the Inverter cannot be used for communications m Types of Message Communications DeviceNet message communications are broadly divided into the two categories described below Of these two categories the Inverter s DeviceNet Communications Unit Card supports explicit mes sages Explicit Messages Explicit messages are defined by DeviceNet The class instance and attribute are specified for executing message communications The messages are the same for all Inverter products so messages can be exchanged in the same way with masters made by other manufacturers e FINS Messages Messages can be exchanged using FINS commands between DeviceNet nodes Masters and Slaves that support FINS messages FINS commands are actually sent and received using DeviceNet explicit messages Note Message communications are supported by CV series CS CJ series and C200HX HG HE PLCs but not by C200HS PLCs Message Communications Chapter 6 m Overview of Explicit Messages Expl
16. Monitor Device Window 2 Click each of the tabs in the window to check the information displayed in each tab page 3 Click the Close Button to close the Monitor Device Window Note The setting methods used in each of the tab pages are described in the following pages m Displaying the Maintenance Information Window 1 From the Main Window click the right mouse button over the icon of the corresponding Slave In verter in the Network Configuration Window and select Maintenance Information From the Maintenance Mode Window double click the icon of the corresponding Slave Inverter in the Network Configuration Window or click the right mouse button over the icon and select Maintenance Information The Maintenance Information Window will be displayed Maintenance Information General Jour IN Inverter Comment Motor Name Last Maintenance Date Unit Conduction Time Fan Conduction Time Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time Average Electric Power Average of 10min Network Power Voltage Network Power Voltage Peak Network Power Voltage Bottom 3G3MV PDRT2 SYSTEM UNIT No 1 M12 2003 01 03 87 Hours 12 Hours 12 Hours Ow 204 V 204 V 203 V Operation Time Warning Torque Current Trace Error History af a J F Gt r Fall frp jo ef frr jn Save Maintenance Counter Maintenance Information Window 2 Click each of the tabs in the window to check t
17. 03204 03303 1388 0070 Return to the display of word 3203 f 03203 03303 0060 0070 Input the forward reference Net Ctrl 1 Net Ref 1 and RUN STOP 1 to word 3203 to input the forward reference CHG 0 0 6 1 WRITE 03203 03303 0060 0074 The During forward run flag will go ON in word 3303 Turn OFF the forward reference and reverse reference in word 3203 Net Ctrl 1 Net Ref 1 Forward Stop 0 Reverse Stop 0 to input the stop reference CHG 0 0 6 O WRITE 03203 03303 0060 0070 The During forward run flag will go OFF in word 3303 Verify that operation stops 2 15 Example System Startup Chapter 2 2 16 Il Chapter 3 Setup and Wiring 3 1 Nomenclature and Settings 3 2 Installation and Wiring 3 3 Communications Line Noise Prevention 3 4 Conformity to EC Directives Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 1 Nomenclature and Settings 3 1 1 Names of Parts e 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit da MS indicator NS indicator NODE ADRNS x10 xi 0 all Node address setting pins o 020 o o PPRP jH lt Shield grounding wire a
18. 4 Attach the solderless crimp terminals to the stripped wire ends and apply electrical tape or heat shrink tubing to the terminal shaft Verify that the each wire is being connected to the correct contact and insert the signal lines power lines and shield wire into the connector holes The following diagram shows the proper order of insertion red white shield blue and black top to bottom In connectors without set screws it isn t necessary to tighten set screws as it was in earlier mod els Press the orange button while inserting each wire fully into the connector After inserting the wire release the orange button and pull lightly on each wire to verify that it is properly installed in the connector Red V White CAN H oe Shield gt Blue CAN L YE es Black V3 3 10 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 The Master and Slave Unit connectors have colored stickers that correspond to the wire colors When wiring the sticker color and wire color can be compared to verify that the wiring is correct The following table shows the cable colors Sticker color Cable color Details Black Communications power supply ground Blue Communications data low side Shield Shield connection White Communications data high side Red Communications power supply 24 V DC a Wiring the Inverter e 3G3MV Series When the DeviceNet Communications Unit is installed the Inverter s main
19. Startup DC injection braking time 0 0 to 25 5 Stall prevention during deceleration 0 1 Stall prevention level during accelera tion 30 to 200 Stall prevention level during operation 30 to 200 Frequency detection level 0 00 to 400 0 Overtorque detection function selection 1 0to 4 Overtorque detection function selection 2 0 1 Overtorque detection level 30 to 200 Overtorque detection time 0 1 to 10 0 0 1 UP DOWN frequency selection 0 1 0 Speed search deceleration time 0 0 to 10 0 2 0 Speed search level 0 to 200 150 Torque compensation gain 0 0 to 2 5 1 0 Torque compensation primary delay time constant 0 0 to 25 5 0 3 Torque compensation core loss 0 0 to 6550 Differs with capacity Rated motor slip Differs with capacity 10 38 Motor phase to neutral resistance Differs with capacity Appendices Class 64 hex In At stance tribute Motor leakage inductance Setting range 0 00 to 655 0 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting Differs with capacity Torque compensation limit 0 to 250 150 Motor no load current 0 to 99 Differs with capacity Slip compensation gain 0 0 to 2 5 0 0 Slip compensation primary delay time 0 0 to 25 5 2 0 Slip compensation during regeneration 0
20. Sourz The number of Mixed I O Slave output words Sino The number of Mixed I O Slave input words Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 Slaves with More than 8 Bytes of Input or Output or Both Tat Tou Teyre X Bin X Tayte out X Bout ms Tou Protocol overhead TBYTE IN Input byte transmission time Bin Number of input bytes Tpyte out Output byte transmission time Bour Number of output bytes Baud rate TBYTE IN TBYTE OUT 0 306 ms 0 040 ms 0 036 ms 0 542 ms 0 073 ms 0 069 ms 1 014 ms 0 139 ms 0 135 ms Note Calculate with Bour 0 for Slaves with inputs only and B y 0 for Slaves with outputs only High density Unit Processing Time Add 3 5 ms if there is at least 1 Slave with more than 8 bytes of input or output or both Explicit Message Processing Time Add the following explicit message processing time when performing explicit message communica tions Sending or receiving Explicit message processing time 0 11 x Tg x n ms n The number of explicit messages that are sent or received within 1 cycle of the CPU Unit Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 COS Cyclic Connection Communications Time Add the following COS cyclic connection communications time COS cyclic connection communications time 0 05 0 008 x S x Tg x n ms S The total number of input and output bytes for COS cycle connecti
21. 0021 Fault status Refer to the following Fault Status table 0022 Data link status Refer to the following Data Link Status table 0023 Frequency reference Follows setting for n035 0024 Output frequency Follows setting for n035 0025 to 0027 Not used 0028 Output voltage Read with 1 V 1 decimal 0029 Fault status 2 Refer to the following Fault Status 2 table 002A Warning status Refer to the following Warning Status table 002B Input terminal status Refer to the following nput Terminal Status table 002C Inverter status Refer to the following nverter Status table 002D Output terminal status Refer to the following Output Terminal Status table 002E Inverter status 2 Refer to the following nverter Status 2 table 002F to 0030 Not used 0031 Main circuit DC voltage Read with 1 V 1 decimal 0032 Torque reference Read with 1 1 decimal Rated motor torque 100 Read with 0033 to 0034 Not used 10 31 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 Register Function Content Instance Attribute number hex 00 35 0035 Accumulated operating Read with 1 h 1 decimal time 00 36 0036 Not used 00 37 0037 Output power Read with 1 W 100 decimal Read with 00 38 0038 PID feedback Read with 1 10 decimal Maximum frequen
22. D00220 430 D00002 0002 D00200 Equals Flag P_EQ CMP 020 0000 D00201 C 402 0001 D00200 D00200 C 402 0004 D00200 D00200 BCD 024 D00200 D00202 MOVD 083 D00005 0210 D00203 MOVD 083 D00006 0012 D00203 Converts command specified in DM Area to CMND data MOVD 083 D00006 0210 D00204 MOVD 083 D00007 0012 D00204 MOVD 083 D00007 0210 D00205 MOVD 083 D00008 0012 D00205 MOVD 083 D00008 0210 D00206 MOVD 083 D00009 0012 D00206 MOVD 083 D00000 0210 D00210 ORW 035 D00210 D00001 D00220 BSET 071 0000 D03000 D03009 Converts command specified in DM Area to CMND data MOV 021 0001 0000 9 11 Communications Programs CS series PLCs 001001 Chapter 9
23. Has the product been damaged in shipping Are any screws or bolts loose Have all accessories been delivered together with or attached to the product Notice OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual Always heed the information provided with them Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or dam age to property N DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury NWARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury N Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PLC means Programmable Controller The abbreviation PC however is used in some Programming Device displays to mean Programm
24. Operation Time Over Notifies that the operation time has exceeded the monitor value 7 2 5 Operating Time Mon itor Function Connected Com ponent Mainte nance Notifies that the total ON time or contact opera tions count for the I O terminals has exceeded the monitor value 7 2 6 Cumulative ON Time Monitor 7 2 7 Contact Operations Monitor Warning Notifies that a warning or error has occurred in the Inverter the details are also displayed During Forward Run and During Reverse Run Notify that the Inverter is operating in forward reverse run Frequency Agree Notifies that the Inverter is agreement frequen cies Configurator Settings 7 4 2 OUT Tab Page Monitor Device General OUT IN 00 Out Pointl 01 Out Point2 02 Out Point 3 Clear Value Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters No OComment f OmorF ON 182 Seconds ON 182 Seconds ON 182 Seconds Close Details The settings in the No field are as follows 00 Multi function contact output 01 Multi function output 1 02 Multi function output 2 Note When the present value for the maintenance counter cumulative ON time or contact operations count exceeds the monitor value an error icon will be displayed to the left of the corresponding No setting No 01 in the above screen example Chapter 7 Reference I O Comment Displays the user
25. Remote I O communications for the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card are performed using either 4 or 8 words allocated in the I O Area of the PLC The Inverter can be controlled using remote I O communications because the basic control I O functions frequency setting functions and output frequency monitoring functions are assigned to remote I O This allows the Inverter to be controlled through simple I O processing Communications with CS CJ series C200HX HG HE and CVM1 CV series PLCs The DeviceNet communications system is supported by CS CJ series C200HX HG HE Z and CVM1 CV series Programmable Controllers More than twice as many Inverters can be connected in comparison to SYSMAC BUS Remote I O Systems to support even larger control systems Note 1 The maximum number of nodes that can be connected to the system depends on the type of DeviceNet Master Unit used whether the message function is used and the number of words used by remote I O communications See 1 5 DeviceNet System Configuration for further details Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Note 2 The CS Series includes the CS1G CPUOH CS1H CPUOCOH CS1G CPULDIL V1 and CS1H CPULI V1 Programmable Controllers The CJ Series includes the CJ1G CPUOOH CJ1H CPUOOH CJ1M CPULL and CJ1G CPU Programmable Controllers The CVM1 CV Series includes the CV1000 CV2000 and CVM1 Programmable Control lers Note 3 C200HS PLCs support only remote I O
26. p Edit Terminal Ei Ome Equipment Name Operation Watch1 Operation Time 500 ms 0 65535ms owe Edit I Hold Status me Details Reference No Refer to the following table For details refer to 7 2 5 Operating Time Moni 7 2 5 Operating Time Monitor tor Function Function Equipment Name Set a user defined name for each device Note When the setting is made in the setting window the setting will be dis played in the Equipment Name field Operation Time Set the monitor value Note When the setting is made in the setting window the setting will be dis played in the Operation Time field Hold Status Set whether to maintain the ON Unit status when the monitor value is exceeded Note The following table shows the meanings of the values set in the No field Multi function contact output ON Input 4 ON Multi function output 1 ON Input 5 ON Input 2 ON Input 3 ON Input 4 ON Input 5 ON Input 0 ON or Input 1 ON Input 4 ON or when a forward reverse run command is sent Input 0 ON or Input 1 ON Input 5 ON or when a forward reverse run command is sent 7 51 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 3 5 Individual Parameters Tab Page Use this tab page to set parameters that cannot be set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page or to set individual parameters General OUT IN Operation Time Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inv
27. 10 2 4 Assembly Objects Class 04 Hex Assembly objects are objects related to remote I O operations Remote I O operations are configured with these objects for communications Support Service Code Service code number her Serice OE Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single 10 6 Appendices Chapter 10 m Object Details Instance Attribute Content Setting range Default Remote I O data Operation is the same as See note 1 00 00 00 for ee remote I O out 00 put Remote I O data Operation is the same as See note 1 00 00 00 for standard remote I O 00 output Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 00 00 for basic remote I O 00 input Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 00 00 for standard remote I O 00 input Remote I O data Operation is the same as See note 1 00 00 00 for special remote I O 00 00 output Remote I O data Remote I O data See note 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 00 00 for special remote I O 00 00 input Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 00 00 for control remote I O 00 00 00 input 00 00 Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 00 00 for control remote I O 00 00 00 unit status input 00 00 00 00 Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 00 00 for control remote I O 00 00 00 multi function input moni 00 00 00 tor input Remote I O data Operation is th
28. Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to F Not used 003E kVA setting 003F Control method 0040 Frequency reference Monitors U1 01 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign 0041 Output fre quency Monitors U1 02 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign 0042 Output cur rent Monitors U1 03 Inverters of 7 5 kW or less 0 01 A units Inverters of 11 KW or more 0 1 A units 0043 and 0044 Not used 0045 Output volt age Monitors U1 06 0 1 V units 0046 Main circuit DC voltage Monitors U1 07 1 V units 0047 Output power Monitors U1 08 0 1 kW units with sign 0048 Not used 0049 Input termi nal status Monitors U1 10 1 ON Bits 0 to 6 correspond to terminals S1 to S7 10 68 004A Output termi nal status Monitors U1 11 Bit 0 Terminals M1 and M2 1 ON Bit 1 Terminals M3 and M4 1 ON Bits 2 to Not used 6 Bit 7 Terminals MA and MC 1 ON Bits 8 to F Not used Appendices Class 64 stance In At tribute Register No Hex Operating status Chapter 10 Contents Monitors U1 12 Bit 0 During RUN Bit 1 Zero speed Bit 2 Forward reverse 1 Reverse operation Bit 3 During fault reset input Bit 4 Frequency agree Bit 5 Operation ready Bit 6 Alarm minor fault Bit 7 Fault Bits 8 to Not used F
29. Depends on capacity Motor iron saturation coefficient 1 0 50 Motor iron saturation coefficient 2 0 75 Motor iron loss for torque compensa tion Depends on capacity Motor rated output Depends on capacity Motor 2 control method selection 0 Motor 2 max output frequency FMAX 60 0 Motor 2 max voltage VMAX 200 0 400 0 See notes 1 and 3 Motor 2 max voltage frequency FA 60 0 Motor 2 mid output frequency 1 FB 3 0 See notes 1 and 3 Motor 2 mid output frequency voltage 1 VC 11 0 22 0 Motor 2 min output frequency FMIN 1 5 See note 3 Motor 2 min output frequency voltage VMIN 9 0 18 0 See notes 1 and 3 Motor 2 rated current Depends on capacity Motor 2 rated slip Depends on capacity 10 57 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Motor 2 no load current Depends on capacity Motor 2 number of poles number of 4 poles Motor 2 line to line resistance Depends on capacity Motor 2 leak inductance Depends on capacity Motor 2 rated capacity Depends on capacity Note 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The values for a 200
30. Multi function analog output type selec 0 1 tion Multi function analog output Multi function analog output gain Multi function analog voltage input gain Multi function analog voltage input bias Multi function analog voltage input filter constant Multi function analog current input gain Multi function analog current input bias Multi function analog current input fil ter constant Pulse train frequency reference gain Pulse train frequency reference bias Pulse train frequency reference input filter constant Multi function analog input terminal function selection Multi function analog input terminal selection Multi function analog input frequency bias 10 37 Appendices Chapter 10 Function Group 3 n080 to n119 Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Carrier frequency selection Setting range 1to 4 7 to9 Setting unit Default setting Differs with capacity Momentary power interruption com pensation 0to2 0 Number of fault retries Oto 10 0 Jump frequency 1 0 00 to 400 0 Jump frequency 2 0 00 to 400 0 Jump frequency 3 0 00 to 400 0 Jump width 0 00 to 25 50 Cumulative operation time selection 0 1 Cumulative operation time 0 to 6550 DC injection braking current 0 to 100 DC injection braking to stop time 0 0 to 25 5
31. Operation Watch4 0 ms 0 ms Operation Watch5 26230 ms 65535 ms Operation Watch6 26230 ms 65535 ms Close Details Reference Refer to the following table for meanings in the No field 7 2 5 Operating Time Mon For details refer to 7 2 5 Operating Time Monitor Func itor Function tion Note When the operating time exceeds the monitor value an error icon is displayed to the left of the corresponding setting in the No field Equipment Name_ Displays the name of each device Response Time Displays the operating time of each device Peak Value Displays the maximum value of the operating time of each device Note The following table shows the meanings of the values set in the No field Operating time measurement trigger Conditions for starting measurement Conditions for ending measurement Multi function contact output ON Input 4 ON Multi function output 1 ON Input 5 ON Input 2 ON Input 3 ON Input 4 ON Input 5 ON Input 0 ON or Input 1 ON Input 4 ON or when a forward reverse run command is sent Input 0 ON or Input 1 ON Input 5 ON or when a forward reverse run command is sent 7 67 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 5 5 Warning Torque Tab Page General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Current Trace Error History Accel Decel Torque Current 014 Accel Decel Peak Torque 044 Torque Current during Frequency Agree 01A Peak Torque
32. Support Service Code Service code number hex Service Get attribute single OE Default 10 Set attribute single 16 m Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Content Indicates the class 95 software revision The revision value is increased whenever there is a change Setting range Save Writes all of the connected device present values to EEPROM Default 10 22 General status Status information Present Unit conduction time Present value of the Unit s total ON time Unit conduction time monitor flag Reports the result of the comparison between the Unit s time monitor value and the present value Unit conduction time monitor set ting Sets the Unit s conduction time monitor value Lifetime data write Saves the current status of the Communications Unit to EEPROM immedi ately The same proce dure is automatically run every 6 min Chapter 10 Appendices Instance Attribute Detail Info 1 Content Reads the Operating Time Exceeded Flags First two bytes Number of bytes in the rest of the array 0001 Data byte Bit 0 Fan operating time exceeded Bit 1 Electrolytic capacitor operating time exceeded The corresponding flag is set to 1 when the operat ing time is exceeded Setting range Default 0001 00 Chapter 10 Detail Info 2 Re
33. Warning Torque General OUT IN In Point 2 Edit Device Parameters xi Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time 00 In Point 1 Time 12584 02 Time 0 03 Edit Terminal EG 4 Set the name of the connected device 05 IO Comment Refer to 7 2 11Connected Device Comment 06 Detection Mode G Time C Count Select either Time or Count as the detection mode Value 14455 0 4294967295 Times i n 0 4294967295 Seconds Set the monitor time in seconds if using the Cancel cumulative ON time function Edit 7 30 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Monitoring Methods e Using the Monitor Device Window e Click the OUT Tab or IN Tab in the Monitor Device Window to monitor in outputs inputs e The following information will be displayed Monitor Device xl OUT Tab Page in the General OUT Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters Monitor Device No 1O Comment ON OFF Window ON Out Point1 182 Seconds Out Point2 ON 182 Seconds Out Point 3 ON 182 Seconds Clear Value Item Details The settings in the No field are as follows 00 Multi function contact output 01 Multi function output 1 02 Multi function output 2 Note When the present value of the maintenance counter total ON time or con tact operations counter exceeds the monitor value the error icon is displayed on the
34. as possible 20 m max and ground the shield at both ends of the cable It is effective to mount a clamp filter right next to the Inverter s output terminals e Use a conductive cable clamp to directly ground the shield to the ground plate Directly ground the motor frame e Use a ZCAT3035 1330 Clamp Filter on the communications cable wind the cable in a loop around it and keep it away from the control panel e Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply for communications 3 28 Chapter 4 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings 4 1 SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Settings 4 2 SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and 3G3PV Settings 4 3 SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Settings SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 4 1 SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Settings In order to perform DeviceNet communications it is necessary to make settings for the Inverter according to the application Note The parameters set here are applied to the DeviceNet Communications Unit when the power is turned ON Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply them 4 1 1 Run Command Selection Register Content Setting Setting Default Write number range unit setting during hex operation Run com Selects the run stop command mand source input method for the Inverter selection Becomes valid when the Remote mode is selected from Local Remote 0 Run stop commands from the Digital Operator are valid 1 Terminal block multi func tion input run
35. Conditions for starting measurement Conditions for ending measurement Multi function contact output ON Input 4 ON Multi function output 1 ON Input 5 ON Input 2 ON Input 3 ON Input 4 ON Input 5 ON Input 0 ON or Input 1 ON Input 4 ON or when a forward reverse run command is sent Input 0 ON or Input 1 ON Input 5 ON or when a forward reverse run command is sent 7 59 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 4 5 Warning Torque Tab Page General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters Accel Decel Torque Current 014 Clear Accel Decel Peak Torque 044 IV Warning Torque during Accel Decel Torque Current during Frequency Agree 014 Peak Torque during Frequency Agree 0 44 IV Warning Torque during Frequency Agree Clear Error Flag Accel Decel Torque Current Close Details Displays the current level during acceleration deceleration Note The present value or most recent value is displayed Accel Decel Peak Torque Displays the maximum current level during acceleration deceleration Note The setting can be cleared to zero by clicking the Clear Button to the right of the setting Warning Torque during Accel Decel Displays this item as selected when the current level exceeds the threshold monitor value during acceleration deceleration Torque Current during Frequency Agree Displays the curren
36. Displays the operating time of the electrolytic capacitor 7 2 8 Conduction Time Monitor Average Electric Power Displays the calculated value of the average power 7 2 2 Average Power Moni tor Function Network Power Voltage Displays the present value for the network power voltage Network Power Voltage Peak Displays the maximum value for the network power voltage Network Power Voltage Bot tom Displays the minimum value for the network power voltage 7 2 9 Network Power Sup ply Voltage Monitor 7 63 Configurator Settings Unit Maintenance Details Notifies that the Inverter s operation time has exceeded the monitor value Fan Maintenance Notifies that the fan s operation time has exceeded the monitor value Electrolytic Capac itor Maintenance Notifies that the electrolytic capacitor s opera tion time has exceeded the monitor value Chapter 7 Reference 7 2 8 Conduction Time Monitor Network Power Voltage Drop Notifies that the network power voltage has dropped below the monitor value 7 2 9 Network Power Sup ply Voltage Monitor Operation Time Over Notifies that the operation time has exceeded the monitor value 7 2 5 Operating Time Mon itor Function Connected Com ponent Mainte nance Notifies that the total ON time or contact opera tions count for the I O terminals has exceeded the monitor value 7 2 6 Cumulativ
37. Monitors U1 19 0 1 units motor s rated secondary current 100 with sign Output fre quency after a soft start Monitors U1 20 0 01 Hz units with sign Input to speed control loop Monitors U1 21 0 01 max frequency 100 with sign Output from speed control loop Monitors U1 22 0 01 units motor s rated second ary current 100 with sign PID feedback Monitors U1 24 0 01 units input corresponding to max frequency 100 with sign Voltage refer ence for sec ondary current Monitors U1 26 0 1 V units 200 400 VAC 100 with sign Voltage refer ence for exci tation current Monitors U1 27 0 1 V units 200 400 VAC 100 with sign CPU ID Monitors U1 28 q axis ACR output Monitors U1 32 0 1 units motor s rated secondary current 100 with sign d axis ACR output Monitors U1 33 0 1 units motor s rated secondary current 100 with sign 10 47 Appendices Class 64 Instance Attribute Register number hex OPE error parameter Chapter 10 Content Monitors U1 34 outputs parameter PID input quantity Monitors U1 36 0 01 units max frequency 100 with sign PID output quantity Monitors U1 37 0 01 units max frequency 100 with sign PID reference Monitors U1 38 0 01 units max frequency 100 RS 422A 485 communica tions error Monitors U1 3
38. Occupied f Byte ca 11 Return to the General Tab Page and click the Download Button 12 When the download has been completed restart with the new settings Reference e When Auto allocation as is registered is selected on the Master s General Tab Page a message will appear every time that connection path settings are changed The message will indicate that the present I O allocation was cleared because the connection was changed When making connection path settings clear the Auto allocation as is registered check box before registering the Slaves e When connection settings are changed a warning mark may be displayed by the Inverter Slave s icon In this case click the Get I O Size from the Scan List Button on the O Information Tab Page of the Inverter Slave s Property Window and edit the information so that the I O information for the Slave s icon matches the Master s scan list For details refer to 7 1 3 Network Connection Precau tions Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 5 3 Basic Remote I O Basic remote I O is the basic built in DeviceNet remote I O function The basic remote I O function is more limited than the standard remote I O function a I O Format Allocated Words e Outputs PLC to Inverter Instance ID 20 Decimal 14 Hex Byte number Forward stop Rotational speed reference rightmost data Rotational speed reference leftmost data e Inputs In
39. The open loop vector control default settings are given above Note 2 Within the setting range 1 to 38 4 10 11 12 13 14 25 28 34 and 35 cannot be set and 29 to 31 are not used m External Terminal Function Parameters Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Multi function input 1 terminal 3 selec tion Multi function input 2 terminal 4 selec tion Multi function input 3 terminal 5 selec tion Multi function input 4 terminal 6 selec tion Multi function input 5 terminal 7 selec tion Multi function input 6 terminal 8 selec tion Setting range Setting unit Default setting Write during opera tion Multi function contact output terminal 9 to 10 Multi function output 1 terminal 25 Multi function output 2 terminal 26 Signal selection terminal 13 Voltage 0 1 Frequency reference voltage gain terminal 13 0 0 to 1000 0 Frequency reference voltage bias terminal 13 100 0 to 100 0 Multi function analog input signal selection terminal 16 0 1 Multi function analog input signal selection terminal 16 0 to 1F Multi function analog input signal gain terminal 16 0 0 to 1000 0 Multi function analog input signal bias terminal 16 100 0 to 100 0 Frequency reference current signal selection terminal 14 0to2 Frequency reference current selec tion
40. V class 0 4 kW Inverter are given above Note 3 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The V f control default settings are given above Note 4 E1 13 will be the same value as E1 05 after autotuning Note 5 The upper setting limit will be 150 0 Hz when C6 01 is set to 0 Note 6 The settings of E1 11 and E1 12 are ignored if set to 0 0 Note 7 If multi function input H1 is set to 16 motor 2 the default setting will depend upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given Note 8 Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters s Option Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default Write In At range unit setting during opera stance tribute tion PG constant 0 to 60000 Operation selection at PG open circuit 0to3 PGO Operation selection at overspeed OS 0 to 3 Operation selection at deviation 0to 3 PG rotation 0 1 PG division rate PG pulse monitor 0 to 132 Integral value during accel decel 0 1 enable disable Overspeed detection level 0 to 120 Overspeed detection delay time Excessive speed deviation detection level Excessive speed deviation detection delay time 10 58 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Number of PG gear teeth 1 0 to 1000 N
41. 0104 Password 0 to 9999 0105 Setting the Password 0 to 9999 0106 to User parameter settings 0180 to 0125 050C Set the register numbers for b1 01 to 02 08 10 90 Appendices Chapter 10 Application Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Frequency reference selection Run source selection Stopping method selection Disabling reverse operation 0 1 Operation selection for minimum fre quency E1 09 or less Setting control input responsiveness 0 1 Operation selection after switching to O 1 remote mode Run source selection when not in drive O 1 mode Excitation level DC injection starting 0 0 to frequency 10 0 DC injection braking current 0 to 100 DC injection braking time at start 0 00 to 10 00 DC injection braking time at stop 0 00 to 10 00 Magnetic flux compensation amount 0 to 500 Speed search selection at start 0 1 Speed search operation current 0 to 200 Speed search deceleration time 0 1 to 10 0 Timer function ON delay time 0 0 to 300 0 Timer function OFF delay time 0 0 to 300 0 PID control selection 0to 4 Proportional gain P 0 00 to 25 00 Integral time I 0 0 to 360 0 Integral limit I 0 0 to 100 0 Differential time D 0 00 to 10 00 PID limit 0 0 to 100 0 PID offset adjustment 00 0 to
42. 10 Write 03 3G3MV Inverter to byte Read PLC Register data leftmost byte Register number rightmost byte Not used Register data rightmost byte m Timing Chart 000000 Read Parameter l Input Bit r 003000 Data Read Flag 003005 Data Read Completed Flag Word n to n 2 Send Data Send Data Read i Word m to m 2 Receive Data r Receive Data Read 1 2 9 19 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Operation 1 Set the register number of the parameter to be read in D00000 When the Read Parameter Input Bit is turned ON the Data Read Flag will be turned ON and parameter reading processing will be executed 2 f the data is normally read the read parameter register number and data will be returned by the Inverter When the register number that was sent agrees with the received register number the parameter data will be stored in D00001 the Data Read Completed Flag will be turned ON and the Data Read Flag will be turned OFF Note If the send data is faulty word m bit 7 will be turned ON which will turn ON the Faulty Data Flag and the program will be stopped until the Faulty Data Reset Input Bit 000002 is turned ON 9 20 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Ladder Program 000000 Read Parameter Input Bit
43. 2003 01 03 v Default Connection Path Operation for Communication Error Stop Default Setting Upload Download Compare Continue Reset 4 Execute the Download operation The Download operation downloads all of the data together in cluding the Inverter s parameters and settings other than those on the General Tab Page 5 Click the Reset Button to reset the Slave and enable the new setting 5 5 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 5 2 2 Switching with the Connection Path Master Use the following procedure to switch the Master s remote I O function with the Configurator In this example the remote I O function is set to Control I O remote I O Unit status Procedure 1 Locate the Master in the Network Configuration Window and either double click the Master or right click and select Parameters Edit from the pop up menu to display the Edit Device Parame ters Window Select the desired Slave from the General Tab Page 2 Click the _ Button to move the desired Inverter to the Register Devices List Edit Device Parameters Communication Cycle Time Message Timer Slave Function General VO Allocation OUT 1 0 Allocation IN r Unregister Device List ka IV Auto allocation as is registered r Register Device List Product Name Out Size OutCh_ inSize non c 2400 3G3MV PDRT2 4 Byte 3200 Bit 4 Byte 3300 Bit Advanced Setup Register Unregisterd Upload D
44. 7 2 6 Cumulative ON Time Monitor 7 2 7 Contact Operations Monitor Note The following tables show the meanings of the numerals set in the No field Details 3G3RV 3G3PV Multi function input 1 Forward stop Forward stop Multi function input 2 Reverse stop Reverse stop Multi function input 3 Multi function input selection 1 Multi function contact input 1 Multi function input 4 Multi function input selection 2 Multi function contact input 2 Multi function input 5 Multi function input selection 3 Multi function contact input 3 Multi function input 6 Multi function input selection 4 Multi function contact input 4 Multi function input 7 Multi function input selection 5 Multi function contact input 5 7 50 Multi function contact input 6 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 3 4 Operation Time Tab Page The Operation Time Tab Page is used to make the settings for the operation time monitor function Edit Device Parameters Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time o1 Cylinder Watch 2 480 ms 02 Oms 03 O ms 04 Oms 05 Oms Edit I Hold Status E Double click the selected field or click the Edit Button Edit Device Parameters Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time 30 200 me Gylinder Watch 2
45. Appendices Chapter 10 e Operator Status Register Number 0011 Hex Content 1 Operation fault 1 EEPROM error 1 Program mode 00 Operator connecting 11 Operator disconnecting Not used e Fault 1 Register Number 0014 Hex Display Content Fuse open Undervoltage main Undervoltage CTL Undervoltage MC Short circuit Ground fault Overcurrent Overvoltage Overheat See note 1 Overheat See note 2 Motor overload Inverter overload Overtorque detection 1 Overtorque detection 2 Braking transistor Braking resistor INIIAI BR PM oO Note 1 Maximum upper limit temperature was exceeded Note 2 Set temperature was exceeded Fault 2 Register Number 0015 Hex Display Content External fault terminal 3 External fault terminal 4 External fault terminal 5 External fault terminal 6 External fault terminal 7 External fault terminal 8 Not used Overspeed Speed deviation PG is disconnected Input phase loss Output phase loss gt O INIo oO AJOIN oO 10 85 Appendices Display Content Not used OPR disconnected EEPROM error Not used i Display comem Not used Communications error Not used Not used Baseblock circuit error EEPROM error Internal A D error See note 1 External A D error See note 2 Option connect
46. Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to Not used F Fan operat ing time Monitors U1 40 1 hr units Current fault Monitors U2 01 Error display Error display Code Error display 01 PUF OE 1C 02 UV1 OF 1D 03 UV2 10 1E 04 UV3 11 1F 06 GF 12 20 07 OC 13 22 08 OV 14 25 09 OH 15 27 OA OH1 18 28 OB OL1 19 29 OG OL2 1A 2A oD OL3 1B 2B Last fault Monitors U2 02 same codes as U2 01 Fault fre quency refer ence Monitors U2 03 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Fault output reference Monitors U2 04 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Fault output current Monitors U2 05 Inverters of 7 5 KW or less 0 01 A units Inverters of 11 KW or more 0 1 A units Not used Fault output voltage refer ence Monitors U2 07 0 1 V units Fault main circuit DC voltage Monitors U2 08 1 V units Fault output power Monitors U2 09 0 1 kW units with sign 10 70 Not used Appendices Class 64 stance In At tribute Register No Hex 008A Fault input terminal sta tus Chapter 10 Contents Monitors U2 11 same contents as U1 10 008B Fault output terminal sta tus Monitors U2 12 same contents as U1 11 008C Fault operat ing status Monitors U2 13 same contents as U1 12 00
47. Bit 8 Baseblock 1 Inverter output baseblock Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1 Not communications 0 Com munications Bit A Run command mode 1 Not communications 0 Communi cations Bit B Overtorque detection 1 Detected Bit C Frequency reference lost 1 Lost Bit D Retrying error 1 Retrying Bit E fault including RS 422A 485 communications time out 1 fault occurred Bit F Communications time out 1 Timed out Multi function output status Bit 0 Multi function output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Multi function output terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 2 to F Not used 002E to 0030 Not used 0031 Main circuit DC voltage Monitors U1 07 1 V units 0032 to 0037 Not used 0038 PID feed back quantity 1 10 100 Input corresponding to max output fre quency without sign 10 67 Appendices Class 64 stance In At tribute Register No Hex PID input quantity Chapter 10 Contents 1 10 100 Max output frequency without sign PID output quantity 1 10 100 Max output frequency without sign CPU software number Flash software number Communications error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error
48. Default Connection Path Standard 1 0 E Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 X Operation for Communication Error Stop Continue Default Setting Upload Download Compare Reset 3 Click each of the tabs i e the General OUT IN Operation Time Parameter Transmission Warning Torque and Inverter Parameters Tabs and check the type of information that is dis played in each tab page 4 Click the Cancel Button to close the Edit Device Parameters Window Note The setting methods used in each of the tab pages are described in the following pages 7 5 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 m Displaying the Monitor Device Window 1 The operation is the same from both the Main Window and the Maintenance Mode Window Click the right mouse button over the icon of the corresponding Slave Inverter in the Network Configuration Window and select Monitor The Monitor Device Window will be displayed Monitor Device x General Jour IN Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters Inverter 3G3MV PDRT2 Comment SYSTEM UNIT No 1 Motor Name M12 Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 Unit Conduction Time 88 Hours Fan Conduction Time 12 Hours Clear Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time 12 Hours Clear Average Electric Power Average of 10min Ow Network Power Voltage 204 V Gime Network Power Voltage Peak 205 V Network Power Voltage Bottom Clear 202 V
49. Enter Code Enter code Monitor Speed reference speed monitor current moni tor output voltage Parameters that Cannot be Set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page Use the Individual Parameters Tab Page Class 64 Instance Attribute Parameter No Details Carrier frequency upper limit Carrier frequency lower limit Carrier frequency proportional gain Parameters that Cannot Be Set from the Configurator Use the Digital Operator A Environment settings All parameters except A1 02 B Application b1 06 61 07 b1 08 b2 08 b4 01 b4 02 b5 09 b5 10 b5 11 b5 12 b5 13 and b5 14 C Tuning C1 10 C1 11 C3 06 C4 03 C4 04 C4 05 C8 09 and C8 30 E Motor constant E1 03 E2 10 E3 LILJ E4 LIL and E5 F Option F2 L1L F3 LIU F4 LIL F7 LiL and F9 L Protection function L8 17 and L8 19 7 47 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 3 Edit Device Parameters Window The settings for the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card and connected Inverter are made in the Edit Device Parameters Window 7 3 1 General Tab Page Edit Device Parameters Parameter Transmission General ouT IN Comment Warning Torque SYSTEM UNIT No 1 Inverter Parameters Operation Time Motor Name MTZ Network Power Voltage 243 555555 15
50. Input 0 is ON input 1 is ON or a forward reverse run command is sent from the network Input 5 ON Note 1 The input references in the above table refer to the inputs in the following table When control I O remote I O is used the input will be turned ON not only when the terminal s signal is ON but also when the corresponding bit is turned ON from remote I O The terminal s ON OFF status is logically ORed with the status of the bit sent through remote I O Terminal S1 multi function input 1 status 3G3RV 3G3PV Terminal S1 forward run stop status Terminal 1 forward run stop status Terminal S2 multi function input 2 status Terminal S2 reverse run stop status Terminal 2 reverse run stop status Terminal S3 multi function input 3 status Terminal S3 multi function input selection 1 status Terminal 3 multi function contact input 1 status Terminal S4 multi function input 4 status Terminal S4 multi function input selection 2 status Terminal 4 multi function contact input 2 status Terminal S5 multi function input 5 status Terminal S5 multi function input selection 3 status Terminal 5 multi function contact input 3 status Terminal S6 multi function input 6 status Terminal S6 multi function input selection 4 status Terminal 6 multi function contact input 4 status Note 2 The combination of 00 and 01 is
51. RST UVW Er Shielded Grounding faces cable IM Motor cable 3 J 20mmax Wiring Diagram for Inverter Remove any coating on the footprints of EMC filter Inverter and metal mounting plate in order to ensure a metal contact between grounding faces e Mount the inverter on top of an EMC compliant input noise filter and attach any Option Units e Use a shielded cable for the Inverter power supply line and connect via the EMC compliant input noise filter with the shortest cable length possible Ground the shield at both ends of the cable 3 26 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 e Use the shortest ground wire possible For 400 V Inverters ground the neutral point on the power supply Ground the metal control panel and doors at the same time e Use a shielded cable for the cable between the Inverter and motor as well Keep the cable as short as possible 20 m max and ground the shield at both ends of the cable It is effective to mount a clamp filter right next to the Inverter s output terminals e Use a conductive cable clamp to directly ground the shield to the ground plate e Ground the motor frame directly and connect the ground from the motor directly to the EMC compli ant input noise filter e Use a ZCAT3035 1330 Clamp Filter on the communications cable wind the cable in a loop around it and keep it away from the control panel e Use conductive packing on the doors of the contr
52. The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Date Revised conten May 2003 Original production R 1
53. characteristics Indicates the communica tions configuration for the DeviceNet Communica tions Unit Card Produced con nection size Indicates the maximum number of bytes for trans mission See note 3 10 9 Appendices Chapter 10 Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size Consumed con nection size Indicates the maximum number of bytes for recep tion See note a Expected packet rate Indicates the length of the internal processing time out when a communica tions request is received Incremented by 10 ms units 0 to 65 535 ms 0000 0 ms Watchdog time out action Indicates the action for internal processing time out related to communica tions 00 Retain timeout status until reset or cleared Produced con nection path length Indicates number of bytes of data for produced con nection path See note 3 Produced con nection path Indicates the data for defining the application object for sending this object instance Note Has a function for switching the DeviceNet Com munication Unit Card s remote I O operation See note 3 Consumed con nection path length Indicates the number of bytes of data for the con sumed connection path See note 3 Note 1 Note 2 Consumed con nection path Indicates the data for defining the application
54. eration time 1 n019 C1 01 and deceleration time 1 n020 C 1 02 minimum unit as 1 ms Depending on the accelera tion deceleration time unit n018 C1 10 setting num bers below 100 ms or 10 ms are truncated Setting the attribute 1C time scale enables a multiplica tion factor to be set 0 0 to 6 000 0 0 00 to 600 00 2710 hex 10 0 s 2710 hex 10 0 s Low Speed Limit See note 2 and 3 High Speed Limit See note 2 and 3 Can be set and read in hexadecimal with the fre quency reference lower limit n034 d2 02 and the fre quency reference upper limit n033 d2 01 minimum unit as 1 ms The minimum unit can be set by the frequency refer ence setting and display units in n035 01 03 n035 01 03 0 0 01 Hz n035 01 03 1 0 01 100 Max frequency n035 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min n035 01 03 40 to 3 999 Follow individual set values When r min units are being used a multipler can be set in attribute 16 the Speed Scale setting 0 to 109 of maximum fre quency 0000 0 to 110 of maximum fre quency 0708 hex 1 800 r min Speed scale Speed data unit selection can be set and read The speed data unit value is cal culated as follows Unit 1 r min x 1 2 a Speed scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement 45 to 15 F1 to OF hex 10 19 Appendices Instance Attribute Current scale Content Curr
55. error Setting range Details Forward run command Sets the signal for trace timing reverse run command fre Note The trace is performed by combining the trigger quency agreement or setting with the Start Trigger Middle Trigger and End Trigger Buttons Current Trace Sam 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms Select the trace sampling cycle from the pull down pling Cycle 100 ms or a value up to menu 100 s 7 18 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 m Tracing Methods Use the following button operations to perform traces Button Details Trace Performs manual tracing When this button is clicked the trace starts and when the Can cel Button is clicked the trace stops Note 1 When the amount of trace data exceeds 150 points the oldest data is deleted Note 2 The 150 points that exist in memory when the Cancel Button is clicked will be stored Recorded trace data l gt Time A Trace start Trace stop Trace Button is ON Cancel Button is ON Trace Buffer full Performs manual tracing When this button is clicked the trace starts and when 150 points have been sampled the trace stops Note If the Cancel Button is clicked during the trace the trace will stop J Recorded trace data Time Trace start Trace stop Trace Button is ON 150 points sampled Start Trigger Starts the trace using the signals selected in the Trigger field and stops the trace when 150 points have been s
56. note 2 Voltage restart time 0 0 to 5 0 0 3 Under voltage detection level UV 150 to 190 210 150 380 to 420 Not used 0 0 Stall prevention during acceleration 0to 2 1 Stall prevention level during accelera 0 to 200 150 tion Stall prevention limit during accelera 0 to 100 tion Stall prevention during deceleration 0to 3 Stall prevention during run 0to 2 Stall prevention level during run 30 to 200 10 99 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Frequency detection level 0 0 to 400 0 Frequency detection width 0 0 to 20 0 Frequency detection level 3 400 0 to 400 0 Frequency detection width 3 0 0 to 20 0 Operation when frequency reference is 0 1 lost Number of auto restart attempts 0 to 10 Auto restart operation selection 0 1 Torque detection selection 1 0to 4 Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 Torque detection time 1 0 0 to 10 0 Torque detection selection 2 0to 4 Torque detection level 2 0 to 300 Torque detection time 2 0 0 to 10 0 Forward torque limit 0 to 300 Reverse torque limit Forward regenerative torque limit Reverse regenerative torque limit DB resistor protection 0 1 Inverter overheat detection pre alarm 50 to 130 level Operation after Inverter overheat pre Oto3 alarm Input open phase
57. set to 3 If this setting is performed frequency reference 1 can only be set through DeviceNet communica tions However parameter values set from DeviceNet communications or the Digital Operator are used for frequency references 2 to 8 and the inching frequency reference d1 02 to d1 09 regard less of the setting of b1 01 Switching of Frequency References from DeviceNet Communications There is a switching signal Net Ref for frequency references speed references from the stan dard remote I O of the DeviceNet Communications Card This function cannot be used with the 3G3FV When it is necessary to switch frequency references from DeviceNet communications change the setting in parameter b1 01 with an explicit message Class 64 hex Instance 01 hex Attribute 03 hex 4 10 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 4 3 2 Inverter Operation Command Selection e Select the method for inputting Run and Stop Commands to the Inverter Select the method suit able for the application Parameter Set value Contents Default No setting Digital Operator Operation commands from the Digital Operator External termi Control circuit terminals sequence input nals Not used Do not set Optional Card Operation commands using DeviceNet Communications Card e When operation commands forward reverse stop from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used set to 3 m Switching of Operation
58. 0 1 See note 3 Multi function analog output 2 signal level selection 0 1 Slave address 0 to 20 See note 2 Communication speed selection 0to 4 Communication parity selection 0to2 Stopping method after communication error 0to 3 10 60 Communication error detection selec tion 0 1 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Send wait time 5 to 65 RTS control ON OFF 0 1 Pulse train input function selection 0to 2 Pulse train input scaling 1000 to 32000 Pulse train input gain 0 0 to 1000 0 Pulse train input bias 100 0 to 100 0 Pulse train input filter time 0 00 to 2 00 Pulse train monitor selection 1 2 5 20 24 36 Pulse train monitor scaling 0 to 32000 Note 1 The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3 wire sequence Note 2 Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS 422A 485 communications Note 3 Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters Note 4 This parameter is not supported by the Asian model Inverters m Protective Function Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Motor protection selection 0to 3 Motor protection time constant 0 1 to 5 0 Alarm operation selection during motor 0 to 3 over
59. 0008 n010 Sel at Operator interruption 0009 n011 Max frequency r Help Used to set the input method for the 4 Default Digital Operator Frequency reference in remote mode Control terminalt4 to 20 m Control terminal 0 to 20 m Pulse train terminal 422 485 communications Multi fun analog input 0 to 10 V Multi fun analog input to 20 mA Optional DeviceNet unit Default Setup Details Reference Parameter Group Select the parameter group to be displayed from the pull 7 2 14 Parameter Setting down menu Parameter Name Displays the number and name of the parameters included in the selected parameter group Value Displays the parameter s set value Note The two setting methods are as follows depends on the parameter e Select the set value from the pull down menu e Enter the numerical value Help Displays the details of the selected parameter Default Displays the factory setting of the selected parameter Default Setup But Returns the set value of the selected parameter to its fac ton tory setting 7 54 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 4 Monitor Device Window The functions set in the Edit Device Parameters Window are monitored from the Monitor Device Win dow 7 4 1 General Tab Page Monitor Device General Jour IN Inverter Comment Motor Name Last Maintenance Date Unit Conduction Time Fan Conduction
60. 03 0217 01 37 ASR Proportional Gain P 2 0 00 to 10 01 20 00 Yes 300 00 See note 2 C5 04 0218 01 38 ASR Integral I time 2 0 000 to 0 001s 10 500 Yes 10 000 See note 2 C5 05 0219 01 39 ASR Limit 0 0 to 0 1 5 0 No 20 0 C5 06 021A 01 3A ASR Primary delay time 0 0000 0 001s 10 004 No 0 500 C5 07 021B 01 3B ASR Switching frequency 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No 400 0 C5 08 0241 01 3C ASR Integral I Limit Oto 400 1 400 No C6 01 021C 01 3D Carrier frequency upper limit 2 0 to 0 1 kHz 15 0 No 15 0 See See note 3 note 4 C6 02 021D 01 3E Carrier frequency lower limit 0 4 to 0 1 kHz 1 15 0 No 15 0 See note 3 C6 03 021E 01 3F Carrier frequency proportional gain 0t099 1 0 No C7 01 021F 01 40 Hunting prevention selection 0 1 1 1 No C7 02 0220 01 41 Hunting prevention gain 0 00 to 0 01 1 00 No 2 50 C8 08 022A 01 42 AFR Gain 0 00 to 0 01 1 00 No 10 00 C8 09 022B AFR primary delay time 0 to 2000 1 ms 50 No C8 30 0240 Carrier Frequency Selection during 1to2 1 2 No Auto tuning Note 1 The setting range and setting unit for acceleration deceleration times will differ according to the setting for C1 10 the unit for acceleration deceleration time If C1 10 is set to 0 the set ting range for acceleration deceleration times is 0 00 to 600 00 s Note 2 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The open loop vector control default settings ar
61. 035 ASL 025 D00202 Word m bit 7 000002 D00206 f 003010 l ANDW 034 003010 MOV 021 Sets write data D00001 0000 00FF 0001 000101 D00207 BSET 071 MOV 021 0000 FF10 D00205 D00205 D00207 MOV 021 XFER 070 00FD 0002 D00206 D00205 MOV 021 n 0000 MOVD 083 Sets enter command D00207 Hata enoinrocessin D00207 000102 Ale ene 9 0010 BSET 071 n 2 OS END 001 Sets 00 function 00209 D00207 9 24 Chapter 10 Appendices 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 10 5 10 6 10 7 Specifications Objects DeviceNet Communications Response Time 3G3MV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 3G3PV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes Appendices Chapter 10 10 1 Specifications 10 1 1 DeviceNet Communications Unit Specifications Model 3G3MV PDRT2 Remote I O e Basic remote I O Allocated 2 input words and 2 output words e Standard remote I O default setting Allocated 2 input words and 2 output words e Special remote I O Allocated 3 input words and 3 output words e Control remote I O Allocated 4 or 5 input words and 4 output words e Unit status Allocated 1 input word e Multi function input monitor Allocated 1 input word Note 1 The user can select from among these six types of remote I O Note 2 Basic and standard
62. 1 Not used Stall prevention level automatic sup pression selection 0 1 Stall prevention acceleration decelera tion time setting 0 1 Low torque detection selection 0to 4 Low torque detection level 0 to 200 Low torque detection time Function Group 4 n120 to n179 Class 64 hex In At stance tribute Frequency reference 9 Frequency reference 10 Frequency reference 11 Frequency reference 12 Frequency reference 13 Frequency reference 14 Frequency reference 15 Frequency reference 16 0 1 to 10 0 Setting range Setting unit 0 01 Hz set with n035 Default setting PID control selection 0to8 Feedback value adjustment gain 0 00 to 10 00 Proportional gain P 0 0 to 25 0 Integral time I 0 0 to 360 0 Derivative time D 0 00 to 2 50 PID offset adjustment 100 to 100 Integral 1 upper limit 0 to 100 PID primary delay time 0 0 to 10 0 Feedback loss detection selection 0to2 Feedback loss detection level 0 to 100 10 39 Appendices Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Feedback loss detection time Setting range 0 0 to 25 5 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting 1 0 Energy saving control selection 0 1 0 Energy saving control c
63. 13 level 0 1 100 10 V Terminal 14 level 0 1 100 20 mA Terminal 16 level 0 1 100 10 V Motor secondary current 0 1 100 Motor rated current Motor excitation current 0 1 100 Motor rated current Output frequency after a soft Set in 01 03 start Input to speed control loop 0 01 100 Maximum fre quency Output from speed control 0 1 100 Motor rated loop current 10 87 Appendices Class 64 Register Monitor Monitored item Instance Attribute Number number Speed deviation Chapter 10 Output unit 0 01 100 Maximum fre quency PID feedback 0 01 100 Maximum fre quency Voltage reference for sec ondary current 0 1V Voltage reference for excita tion current CPU ID Content 1 Terminal 9 and 10 short 1 Terminal 25 and 27 short 1 Terminal 26 and 27 short Not used 1 Terminal 18 and 20 short Not used Content During Run Zero speed Forward reverse 1 Reverse operation during Fault Reset input Frequency agree 1 Operation ready Alarm Fault Not used Class 64 Register Monitor Monitored item Instance Attribute Number number Current fault Output unit Refer to table below Last fault Refer to table below Faul
64. 4 Standard Remote I O 5 5 Special Remote I O Operation 5 6 Control Remote I O Operation 5 7 Unit Status Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 N Caution Be sure to set the switches correctly and check the settings before starting opera tion Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage to the product N Caution Install devices to stop operation as required to ensure safety Equipment damage may result This is particularly important when operation is set to continue for communications errors because the Inverter will continue operation N Caution Do not carelessly change Inverter s settings Doing so may result in injury or dam age to the product 5 1 Overview of Remote I O Functions This section provides an overview of the remote I O functions which provide communications between the Inverter SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3RV or 3G3FV and the Master 5 1 1 Overview of Remote I O Functions The following table lists the four remote I O functions that are supported Use the remote I O func tions most suitable for your application Also the Inverter s status can be monitored easily by attach ing the status flags 16 bits to each function and allocating them in the Master The Unit status flags can also be allocated independently in the Master Note Refer to 5 7 Unit Status for details on the Unit status Function Description Basic remote I O This remote I O function is compatible to DeviceNet remote I O function The basic re
65. 50 when the minimum setting unit is 0 1 50 0 1 500 301F4 hex FEOC Hex Example 3 Setting a value of 1F hex in the multi function input Send the value 1F hex Enabling Parameter Settings with the ENTER Command Always send an ENTER command when setting writing data in parameters New data written to the parameters will be enabled as operating data after the Inverter receives the ENTER command In the 3G3MV the new settings will be enabled after the parameters are received 5 16 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 When two or more parameters are being set written send the ENTER command just one time after all of the parameters have been set All of the parameters that have been set will be enabled when the ENTER command is sent Command ENTER command that writes param eters to EEPROM Send format Function code 10 hex Register number FFFD hex Send data 0000 hex Inverter operation When the ENTER command is received the last string of parameter settings data that was received is stored in EEPROM and enabled as operating data EEPROM can be overwritten up to 100 000 times Remarks Supported by all Inverter software Use this command when you want the data to be retained even after the power is turned OFF ENTER command that does not write parameters to EEPROM Function code 10 hex Register number FFDD hex Send data 0000 hex When the ENTER command is receive
66. 50ms 004 During Accel Dece Current Trace 60ms 004 During Accel Decel Sampling Cycle 70ms 0 04 During ccel Dece 10ms z 80ms 004 During Accel Decel 90ms 004 During Accel Decel 100ms 014 During Accel Dece 110ms 0 14 During Accel Dece 120ms 014 During Accel Decel 130ms 0 14 During Accel Dece During Accel Trigger amp Forward Cmd Time Details Displays the time determined from the current trace sampling cycle Current Displays all the traced current levels for every sampling cycle Status Displays whether the sampling timing is during acceleration deceleration or frequency agreement Trigger Set the signal used for trace timing Note The trace is performed using the trigger setting combined with the Start Trigger Button Middle Trigger Button and End Trigger Button Current Trace Sam pling Cycle Select the trace sampling cycle from the pull down menu Note The cycle can be set to 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms up to 100 s Trace Button Starts the trace Note The trace will continue until the Cancel Button is clicked The 150 points sampled immediately before the Cancel Button is clicked will be stored Trace Buffer Full Button Starts a trace that will stop when 150 points are sampled Note The trace will also stop if the Cancel Button is clicked during the trace Cancel Button Stops the trace Start Trigg
67. 7 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 7 44 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 3 Enter the hexadecimal value to be set in the Value field 4 To write the parameter set values to the Inverter s internal EEPROM to restore the set values after a power interruption select the Write to EEPROM field 5 Click the Write Button to write the set value to the Inverter Note When the Read Button is clicked the set value of the specified parameter Instance Attribute is read from the Inverter and displayed as a hexadecimal in the Result field Parameter Groups and Parameters Not Set in Groups e 3G3MV Parameter Groups Parameter group Details All Parameters Function Group 1 n002 to n049 Function Group 2 n050 to n079 Function Group 3 n080 to n119 Function Group 4 n120 to n179 Function Group 5 ENTER command Save to EEPROM Function Group 6 Speed reference speed monitor current moni tor output voltage Parameters that Cannot be Set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page Use the Individual Parameters Tab Parameter Class 64 Details No Instance Attribute Parameter write prohibit selection parameter initialization Frequency reference loss detection selection Cumulative operation time selection Can be set to 5 5 kW 7 5 kW only Cumulative operation time Speed search deceleration time Speed search level RS 422 communications settings These parameters are not used for
68. Analog Reference Card selection 0 1 1 0 No F3 01 038E Digital Reference Card input selection O to 7 1 0 No F4 01 038F Channel 1 output monitor selection 110038 1 2 No See note 2 F4 02 0390 Channel 1 gain 0 00 to 0 01 1 00 Yes 2 50 F4 03 0391 Channel 2 output monitor selection 11038 1 3 No See note 2 F4 04 0392 Channel 2 gain 0 00 to 0 01 0 50 Yes 2 50 F4 05 03A0 Channel 1 bias 10 0to 0 1 0 0 Yes 10 0 F4 06 03A1 Channel 2 bias 140 0to 0 1 0 0 Yes 10 0 F5 01 0393 Not used 0 F5 02 0394 Not used i me 1 ia F6 01 0395 Not used 0 F7 01 0396 Output pulse multiple selection 0to 4 1 1 No F8 01 0398 Operation selection E 15 0to 3 1 1 No F9 01 0399 Communications external fault input 0 1 1 0 No selection F9 02 039A Communications external fault input 0 1 1 0 No detection selection F9 03 039B Communications external fault input 0to 3 1 1 No operation selection F9 04 039C Not used 0 10 97 Appendices Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Torque reference Torque limit selection from communications Setting range Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting DeviceNet operation selection Note 1 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings
69. CS 003101 D00101 003100 003101 ASL 025 ORW 035 5001 D00101 sa Otros 000101 ANDW 034 CMP 020 0010 0010 Sets control input 00FF Equals Flag P_EQ m D00102 ie ee C 003103 i MOV 021 0008 ANDW 034 D00100 MOV 021 00FF Reads output frequency ae D01002 000103 Se CMP 020 MOV 021 0001 0003 Equals Flag P_EQ D01002 D00100 O 003104 MOV 021 Reads Inverter status 002C D00101 9 17 Communications Programs CS series PLCs 003103 anei 003107 003108 Chapter 9 000102 Equals Flag P_EQ Equals Flag P_EQ TI 003105 003198 999199 TI Equals Flag P_EQ Equals Flag P_EQ 9 18 ASL 025 ANDW 034 0001 m 1 FFOO 000301 D01003 n ANDW 034 CMP 020 oso 0908 00FF m am D01004 C 003105 ORW 035 D01003 ANDW 034 D01004 m 1 0020 00FF MOV 021 D01002 CMP 020 0001 0024 D01002 000303 AEE 000002 003108 ANDW 034 m 40080 ANDW 034 501005 m 1 FFOO CMP 020 D01003 0080 n D01 ANDW 034 Equals Flag P_EQ 01005 m 2 C 003109 ee 003109 000003
70. Commands from DeviceNet Communications There is a switching signal Net Ctrl for operation commands from the standard remote I O of the DeviceNet Communications Card This function cannot be used with the 3G3FV When it is necessary to select the operation command from DeviceNet communications change the setting in parameter b1 02 with an explicit message Class 64 hex Instance 01 hex Attribute 04 hex 4 3 3 DeviceNet Communications Settings The parameters below are for functions that are exclusive to DeviceNet communications Set these parameters according to the desired application Parameter Name Contents Setting Default Ng Operator display range setting Communications external fault Select the type of input used for the input input type communications external fault input EFO Selection from communications DeviceNet Communications Card 0 N O input external fault detected when 1 1 N C input external fault detected when 0 Communications external fault Select the detection method used input detection method for the communications external EFO Detection fault input from communications DeviceNet Communications Card 0 Always detect 1 Detect during operation i e when operation commands are input 4 11 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 Parameter Name Contents Setting Default No Operator display range setting Communications external fault Select t
71. D01004 0199 HH C 008110 ORW 035 003110 D01003 D01004 003110 02000 C 000004 ASL 025 990991 0001 ar 000004 MOV 021 2 00030 0000 ESP VISP 1 CMP 020 on 0003 MOV 021 m 0010 risse D00100 C 003107 MOv 021 ere 0001 ANDW 034 D00101 m 1 HOOFF MOV 021 D01002 90000 D00102 MP 02 MGE XFER 070 0002 D01002 EE D00100 003108 n MOVD 083 D00102 0010 n 2 Executes stop command END 001 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 9 3 2 Reading Parameter Data This programming example is designed to read the parameter data specified in the 3G3MV Inverter To use special remote I O it is necessary to switch the remote I O operation Refer to 5 2 Switching the Remote I O Function and change to the special remote I O operation m Allocation Bit 000000 lt Read Parameter Input Bit Bit 000002 lt Faulty Data Reset Input Bit Bit 003000 lt Data Read Flag Bit 003001 Faulty Data Flag Flag Bit 003005 Data Read Completed Flag D00000 lt Register number of the parameter to be read D00001 lt Read data Input e Remote I O Allocation Areas I O classification Word address Output Register number leftmost Function code 10 Write 03 PLC to 3G3MV byte Read Inverter Register data leftmost byte Register number rightmost byte Not used Register data rightmost byte Input Register number leftmost Function code
72. DeviceNet Communica tions Unit or Card approximately every six minutes Therefore depending on the power OFF timing up to six minutes worth of data may be lost To monitor more closely click the Save Maintenance Counter Button located on the General Tab Page of the Maintenance Information Window immediately before turning OFF the power The maintenance informa tion including the number of contact operations will be written to the EEPROM m Application Example The applications are the same as for the Cumulative ON Time Monitor refer to the previous func tion 7 32 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 m Setting and Monitoring Methods Use the same methods for the Cumulative ON Time Monitor refer to the previous function 7 2 8 Conduction Time Monitor Functions e The time that power is supplied to the Slave s internal circuit power supply is totaled and recorded every 0 1 hours six minutes e The DeviceNet Communications Unit Card has three monitor values that can be set independently for the following three time monitoring functions Each of these values however is a total of the time that the Inverter s power is ON and the fan and electrolytic capacitor are not monitored sepa rately Use these operating times as a guide for when the corresponding parts need to be replaced Main Unit operating time Cannot be reset Fan operating time The present value can be reset to zero Electrolytic capacitor The prese
73. EIX DRT21 E3XDAT21 01 ESEK AA2 DRT ESEK AA2DRT 03 DRT21D16 XWT 0D08 DRT21D16 XWT 0D08 02 CPM2C 5100C DRT CPM2C 5100C DAT 104 CJ1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 05 Change Node Address Ethernet FINS NodeNo 0 UnitNo 000 000 01 1P 0 0 0 0 9600 O Off line 2 A Node Address Setting Window will be displayed Input the desired node address New Node Address m 3 Setup Range 0 63 Cancel 3 Click the OK Button Note Any node address between 0 and 63 can be set as long is it is not duplicated in another Master or Slave in the network If the node address is duplicated in another node in the network an error will occur and the Slave will not be able to participate in network communications Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 2 Installation and Wiring N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING N WARNING A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution 3 6 Do not touch the conductive parts such as internal PCBs or terminal blocks while power is being supplied Doing so may result in electrical shock Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover terminal cov ers bottom cover Operator and optional items Leave them mounted in place while power is being supplied Not doing so may result in electrical shock mal function or damage to the product Wiring maintenance or inspection must be performed by authorized personnel Not doing so may result in e
74. Inverter to PLC Reference When a CS1 CJ1 DeviceNet Master Unit is being used we recommend allocating the Unit status to a COS connection instead of using the default connection path setting during normal operation the status of the flags in the Unit status will not change so allocation to a COS connection is more effi cient If the Unit status is set in the default connection path there input data occupies 5 words so the communications speed will be slower 5 34 pn ULT ID Mm Chapter 6 Message Communications 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 Overview of Message Communications Sending Messages from an OMRON PLC Overview of Messages and Responses Motor Data Objects Class 28 Hex Control Supervisor Objects Class 29 Hex AC DC Drive Objects Class 2A Hex Reading and Writing Parameters Class 64 Hex Message Communications Chapter 6 6 1 Overview of Message Communications s Message Communications Operations Message communications enable data to be exchanged as required between nodes i e between Masters or between Masters and Slaves on a DeviceNet Network For example the accumulated data from a given PLC can be read from another PLC and constants from various Slaves can be changed from a PLC To use message communications however both nodes involved in the data exchange must support message communications DeviceNet Master Unit CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 Message communications function
75. Main circuit DC voltage Monitors U1 07 1 V units 0032 to 0037 Not used 0038 PID feedback quantity 1 10 100 Input corresponding to max output frequency without sign 0039 PID input quantity 1 10 100 Max output frequency without sign 003A PID output quantity 1 10 100 Max output frequency without sign 003B CPU software number 003C Flash software number 10 45 Appendices Class 64 Instance Attribute Register number hex Chapter 10 Content Communications error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bit 7 to 15 Not used KVA setting Control method Frequency ref erence Monitors U1 01 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Output fre quency Monitors U1 02 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Output current Monitors U1 03 Inverters of 7 5 KW or less 0 01 A units Inverters of 11 kW or more 0 1 A units Control method Monitors U1 04 set in A1 02 Motor speed Monitors U1 05 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Output voltage Monitors U1 06 0 1 V units Main circuit DC voltage Monitors U1 07 1 V units Output power Monitors U1 08 0 1 kW units wit
76. Not used Open input phase detection level 0 to 100 Open input phase detection time 0 to 255 10 40 Open output phase detection level 0 to 100 Appendices n169 Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Open output phase detection time Setting range 0 0 to 2 0 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting n170to n172 Not used n173 DC injection braking proportional gain 1 to 999 n174 DC injection braking integration time 1 to 250 n175 Low carrier frequency at low speed 0 1 n176 Parameter copy and verify function selection read only 0to 5 n177 Parameter read prohibit selection read only n178 Fault log read only n179 Software number read only 10 41 Appendices Chapter 10 10 5 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 10 5 1 Inputting Control Frequency Read Write The Inverter s various control inputs are allocated to the registers shown in the following table For example to set the frequency reference and begin operation first set the reference value to the fre quency reference register 0002 and then write the run command to the Inverter s run command register 0001 Note 1 Set values are retained until changed by the next writing operation Note 2 The following registers are in RAM so they are all cleared to zer
77. ON Input 4 ON Input O ON input 1 ON or a run com mand is sent from the network Input O ON input 1 ON or a run com mand was sent from the network Output Input Output Input Input Input Input Input Forward or Reverse run command Input Forward or Reverse run command Input Instance 06 Input 5 ON Note 1 The following table shows the meaning of Input O in a start or stop condition When using the control I O remote I O function the input bit will be turned ON not only when the termi nal s signal is ON but also when the corresponding bit is turned ON from remote I O The terminals ON OFF status is logically ORed with the status of the bit sent through remote I Meaning 3G3RV Status of terminal S1 Forward Stop Status of terminal S2 Reverse Stop Status of terminal S3 multi function input 1 selection Status of terminal S4 multi function input 2 selection Status of terminal S5 multi function input 3 selection Status of terminal S6 multi function input 4 selection Status of terminal S1 multi function input 1 Status of terminal S2 multi function input 2 Status of terminal S3 multi function input 3 Status of terminal S4 multi function input 4 Status of terminal S5 multi function input 5 Status of terminal S6 multi function input 6 Status of terminal 1 For ward Stop Status of terminal 2 Reverse Stop
78. Overtorque detection 2 Overcurrent Input phase loss Output phase loss Main circuit overvoltage Undervoltage main Undervoltage MC Overheat 10 16 Appendices Chapter 10 DeviceNet error code Operator display Meaning Overheat Control power supply fault Fuse open Operator disconnection EEPROM write failure Braking transistor failure Braking resistor overheating PG is disconnected Overspeed Speed deviation Communications error External fault Terminal 3 External fault Terminal 4 External fault Terminal 5 External fault Terminal 6 External fault Terminal 7 External fault Terminal 8 Communications external fault 10 2 10AC DC Drive Objects Class 2A Hex AC DC drive objects are assigned to command related functions for drive devices such as Inverters and Servomotors Command related data reading and writing monitor data reading set data scale changes and so on are all enabled These functions are shared with similar functions used for remote I O so even if they have been set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote I O Support Service Code Service code number hex Servie OE Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single m Object Details Instance Attribute Content Setting range Default Object Software Indicates class 2A software Revision revisions
79. Parameter Set value Contents Default No setting 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 01 units max frequency is 100 2 to 39 r min units Set the number of motor poles 40 to 39 999 Specifies the value used to set and display the maximum fre quency Set a 4 digit value without the decimal point Set the position of the digit where the decimal point is to be displayed starting from the rightmost digit Example To display the maximum frequency as 200 0 specify 4 2000 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 4 3 SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Settings In order to perform DeviceNet communications it is necessary to make settings for the Inverter according to the application Note The parameters set here are applied to the DeviceNet Communications Card when the power is turned ON Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply them 4 3 1 Frequency Reference Selection e Select the method for inputting frequency references to the Inverter Select the method suitable for the application Parameter Set value Contents Default No setting b1 01 0 Digital Operator Value set in d1 01 used 1 1 External termi Set using analog input from control cir nals cuit terminals 2 Not used Do not set 3 Optional Card Set using DeviceNet Communications Card e When frequency references from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used
80. Peak Value Close Item Details Displays a number indicating the combination of start signals and end signals of the operating time measurement An error icon will be displayed to the left of the number if the response time exceeds the monitor value Equipment Name Displays the name of each device Response Time Displays the operating time present value of each device Peak Value Displays the maximum operating time of each device Clear Error Button Clears the Operation Time Over Flag in the Unit s Status Area Note This button is enabled when the Status Hold field is selected to hold sta tuses on the Operation Time Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window Clear Peak Value Button Clears the operation time peak value to zero Note Select the device for which the peak value is to be cleared and click the Peak Value Clear Button to clear the value to zero Note The ON OFF status of the Operation Time Over Monitor Flag can be checked on the General Tab Page of the Monitor Device Window When this flag is ON Operation Time Over check box will be selected Using the Maintenance Information Window e Click the Operation Time Tab in the Maintenance Information Window Note The differences between the Operation Time Tab Page in the Monitor Device Window and in the Maintenance Information Window are as follows e The Operation Time field in the Maintenance Information Window shows the value when
81. Port 0 0 Normal end 1 Abnormal end Master Unit status flags 6 6 Online Flag 25 x Unit number 1511 00 0 Offline 1 Online Message Communications Enabled Flag 25 x Unit number 1524 Indicates the same status as the Online Flag 0 Offline 1 Online This function is compatible with C200HW DRM21 V1 Message Communications Chapter 6 6 3 Overview of Messages and Responses When message communications are used the Inverter s DeviceNet Communications Unit Card returns responses as explained below Basically DeviceNet communications are executed in 1 byte 8 bit units In the case of single word data 16 bits the rightmost bits least significant and the leftmost bits most significant are reversed in order due to the following reasons Data on communications line is transmitted in the order of rightmost bits and leftmost bits e Data that is internally processed by PLC for issuing commands is transmitted in the order of left most bits and rightmost bits Therefore reverse the order for attributes where Word is written in the Size column in the tables on subsequent pages and create attached data or read response data Note There is no need to take this into consideration for remote I O because the rightmost bits and leftmost bits are automatically reversed Command Format Lee foo JJ T T T srbyesman Command code Destination S
82. Programmable Controllers support only the remote I O function 3 Although care has been given in documenting the product please contact your OM RON representative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual 4 The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover Do not attempt to open the cover under any circumstances Doing so may result in injury or death and may damage the product Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product 5 We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals you prepare for the system into which the product is being installed Precautions on the dangers of high voltage equipment e Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been turned off These terminals are live even with the power turned off 6 Inverter and Option Unit wiring and Digital Operator operations must be performed by somebody with a specialist knowledge of electrical systems 7 The individual life expectancies of the Inverter s internal components must be consid ered Perform maintenance such as Unit replacement appropriate for the operating conditions 8 Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve prod uct performance Items to Check Before Unpacking 1 Check the following items before removing the product from the package e Has the correct product been delivered i e the correct model number and speci fications
83. Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 5 4 Standard Remote I O Standard remote O is the factory setting for the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card General Inverter control can be performed with this remote I O function a I O Format Allocated Words e Outputs PLC to Inverter Instance ID 21 Decimal 15 Hex Byte number Net Ref Reverse Forward erence stop stop Rotational speed reference rightmost data Rotational speed reference leftmost data e Inputs Inverter to PLC Instance ID 71 Decimal 47 Hex Byte number At Refer Refer Control Inverter During During ence ence From Net Ready reverse forward From Net run run Rotational speed monitor rightmost data Rotational speed monitor leftmost data Note A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Bit and Data Functions e Output Bit Details Forward stop 0 Stop 1 Forward Reverse stop 0 Stop 1 Reverse Fault Reset O 1 Fault reset Net Control 0 Specified in n003 b1 02 1 Device Net See notes 1 and 2 Net Reference 0 Specified in n004 b1 01 1 Device Net See notes 1 and 3 5 12 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 Note 1 In this manual the parameter location for the 3G3MV is written ahead of the parameter lo cation for the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV so n003 b1 02 indicates a parameter location of n003 for the 3
84. Status of terminal 3 multi function contact input 1 Status of terminal 4 multi function contact input 2 Status of terminal 5 multi function contact input 3 Status of terminal 6 multi function contact input 4 10 25 Appendices Chapter 10 Note 2 Instances 01 and 02 will be enabled when using the control I O remote I O function and the following parameter settings have been made e 3G3MV Set a value of 18 communications output in parameters n057 and n058 function selection for multi function outputs 1 and 2 e 3G3RV 3G3FV Set a value of F not used in parameters H2 01 and H2 02 function selection for the multi function contact output and multi function output 1 When these settings are made the Inverter s control terminal outputs can be controlled from commu nications and those signals can be used as measurement start triggers 10 26 Appendices Chapter 10 10 3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time This section describes communications response time when OMRON Master and Slave Units are being used Use this section for reference when planning I O timing The equations provided here are valid under the following conditions e The Master Unit is operating with the scan list enabled All of the required Slaves are participating in communications e No errors are being indicated at the Master Unit e Messages are not being produced in the network from another company s
85. The revision value is advanced when ever there is a change At Reference 00 Stopped accelerating or decelerating 01 At reference Net Reference 00 Operate with setting in See note 1 n004 b1 01 01 Force DeviceNet opera tion not valid in 3G3FV 10 17 Appendices Instance Attribute Drive Mode Content Set to parameter n002 A1 02 Some Inverters do not support the setting 00 Open loop vector N002 A1 02 2 01 VA control n002 A1 02 0 02 V f control with PG A1 02 1 03 Flux vector control A1 02 3 After changing the setting the power must be turned OFF and then ON again to enable the new setting Setting range 00 to 03 Default Chapter 10 Speed Actual Rotational Speed Monitor See note 2 The output frequency moni tor U 02 U1 02 can be monitored in hexadecimal with the minimum unit as 1 The frequency monitor s minimum unit can be set by the frequency reference setting and display units in n035 01 03 n035 01 03 0 0 01 Hz n035 01 03 1 0 01 100 Max frequency n035 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min n035 01 03 40 to 3 999 Follow individual set values When r min units are being used a multipler can be set in attribute 16 the Speed Scale setting Speed Refer ence Rotational Speed Refer ence See note 2 Can be set and read in hexadecimal with the fre quency reference minimum unit as
86. Time Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time Average Electric Power Average of 10min Network Power Voltage Network Power Voltage Peak _ Network Power Voltage Bottom IV Unit Maintenance IV Fan Maintenance v IV Electrolytic Capacitor Maintenance IV Network Power Voltage drop IV Operation Time Over IV Connected Component Maintenance a7 pet el Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters 3G3MV PDRT2 SYSTEM UNIT No1 M12 2003 01 03 97 Hours 21 Hours Clear 21 Hours Clear w 20 2 v 25V Clear 202 V Clear arne Error External Fault Gnput terminal 53 Durme Forsvard Ror Durme Reverse Bur Frequency Kereg Inverter Close Details Displays the name of the mounted Inverter Unit Status Report Area Reference Comment Displays the name of the device 7 2 10 Unit Comment Motor Name Displays the motor name 7 2 11 Connected Device Comment Last Maintenance Date Displays the last date that maintenance was performed 7 2 13 Last Maintenance Date Unit Conduction Time Displays the operating time of the Inverter s Main Unit Fan Conduction Time Displays the operating time of the fan Note This setting can be cleared to zero by clicking the Clear Button at the right of the item Electrolytic Capacitor Conduc tion Time Displays the operating time of the electrolytic capacitor Note This setting can be c
87. Unit Conduction Time fields Monitor Device x General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters Q Network Power Voltage OFF 85 Hours Q Network Power Voltage OFF 87 Hours Q Network Power Voltage OFF 87 Hours Q Network Power Voltage OFF 8 Hours Update Clear e Click the Clear Button to clear the communications error log e Click the Update Button to check whether a communications error has occurred and refresh the error log details Note If a new error occurs while the Error History Tab Page is being displayed the error will not be displayed on the Error History Tab Page in real time Click the Update Button to display the most recent error log e Using the Maintenance Information Window Click the Error History Tab in the Maintenance Information Window 7 40 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Note The differences from the Monitor Device Window are as follows e The Update Button is not included in the Maintenance Information Window To update the er ror log Click the Update Button on the General Tab Page 7 2 13 Last Maintenance Date Function e The date on which maintenance was last performed can be written to the Unit e The timing for future maintenance can be determined more easily m Setting Methods 1 Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window 2 Select the desired date from the pull down menu for the Last Maintenance Date field Edit Device
88. any order e Limitations That Apply to Both Methods The following limitations apply when allocating words using either settings in the DM Area or using the Configurator e The maximum that can be allocated in one block is 500 words For Slaves with more than 8 points the first byte cannot be specified as the leftmost byte 7 to 15 e The same Slave cannot be used for more than one DeviceNet Master Unit Words are allocated to Slaves as follows e 8 point Slaves Allocated leftmost or rightmost byte of a word e 16 point Slaves Allocated 1 word e Slaves with more than 16 points Allocated multiple words for Slaves with an odd number of bytes the last byte will be the rightmost byte Maximum number of Inverters using one DeviceNet Master Unit only 63 Maximum number of Inverters with more than one DeviceNet Master Unit Calculate from the number of words allocated in the data areas and the number of words allocated to the Inverters 4 to 8 words The DM Area cannot be manipulated by bit so it cannot be allocated for remote I O for Inverters 1 19 Functions and System Configuration m C200HW DRM21 V1 or CVM1 DRM21 V1 DeviceNet Master Units e Communications without Configurator Fixed Allocation Applicable PLC DeviceNet Master Unit CVM1 CV Series CVM1 DRM21 V1 CS Series and C200HX HG HE C200HW DRM21 V1 Chapter 1 C200HS Supported communications Remote I O and me
89. background refer to the DRT2 series DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual W404 Note 2 The 3G3FV PDRT2 listing in the Hardware list refers to the 3G3RV PDRT2 mounted to the 3G3FV series Inverter 3G3FV PDRT2 is not a DeviceNet Communications Card model number Displaying the Edit Device Parameters Window 1 From the Main Window double click the icon of the corresponding Slave Inverter in the Network Configuration Window or click the right mouse button over the icon and select Parameter and Ed it 2 From the Maintenance Mode Window click the icon for the corresponding Slave Inverter click the right mouse button and select Parameter and Edit The Edit Device Parameters Window will be displayed Example of Operations from the Main Window 7 4 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Click the right mouse button and select Parameter and Edit S File Tools Option Hele wee So LAPRX Edit Device Parametere OMRON GSF TORMA DIS BOOKE G Orie RUM Edit Device Parameters Window Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time Comment JS Motor Name Network Power Voltage 11 0 V 110 250V Unit Conduction Time 2 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Fan Conduction Time 0 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time 0 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Average Electric Power Calculation Cycle 10min x
90. basic operating procedures for DeviceNet 2 1 1 Basic Procedures The following list outlines the basic application procedures For details on settings and connections refer to the operation manual for the DeviceNet Master Unit For further details on Slave Units refer to the operation manual s for the Slave Units Preparing the Units 1 Select the appropriate Units Refer to 2 2 1 Selecting Units 2 Determine the appropriate wiring method Refer to 2 2 2 Wiring 3 Determine the appropriate method for supplying communications power Refer to 2 2 3 Commu nications Power Supply Setting and Wiring Hardware 1 Separate and lay the cables 2 Mount the DeviceNet Master Unit and specify the correct settings Refer to 2 3 1 Mounting and Setting the DeviceNet Master Unit 3 Mount the Slave Units and specify the correct settings Refer to 2 3 2 Mounting and Setting Slaves 4 Mount other devices to be connected to the Network Refer to 2 3 3 Mounting Connecting Devic es 5 Connect the cables Refer to 2 3 4 Connecting Cables 6 Wire the I O cables Refer to 2 3 4 Connecting Cables Starting Communications 1 Create the I O tables Refer to 2 4 1 Creating I O Tables for the DeviceNet Master Unit 2 Start up the system Refer to 2 4 2 Starting the System 3 Create and register the scan list Refer to 2 4 3 Creating and Registering Scan Lists Checking Operations 1 Check the status of the indicators on the Unit Refer to 2 5 1
91. circuit and control circuit terminals will be inaccessible so always wire the main circuit terminals and control circuit terminals in advance according to the directions in the User s Manual 3 2 2 DeviceNet Communications Card Installation N Caution Before installing and wiring an Optional Card always turn OFF the power to the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverter and wait for the CHARGE indicator to turn OFF Mounting Procedure 1 Turn OFF the Inverter wait for at least 5 minutes remove the front cover of the Inverter and check that the CHARGE indicator is not lit 2 Mount the Optional Card to the option C area 3 The 3G3RV and 3G3PV has a securing latch for option C and option D so the securing latch must be removed 4 Insert the provided spacers into the spacer holes on the mounting base of the Inverter 5 After properly engaging the connectors of the Optional Card and control circuit board insert the spacers to the spacer holes of the Optional Card and press the Optional Card until the spacers click 6 If a 3G3RV or 3G3PV is being used replace the securing latch that was removed in step 3 7 Connect the shield grounding wire of the Optional Card to FG terminal 12 E on the control circuit board of the Inverter 8 Press the top of the connector 2CN and check that the apexes of the triangular marks on both sides match 3 11 Chapter 3
92. communications are incom plete Lit A fatal error hardware error has occurred in the Unit Card Flashing A non fatal error such as a switch setting error has occurred Not lit Power is not being supplied from the Inverter The Unit Card is not connected properly and power is not being to supplied toit Lit The DeviceNet Network is operating normally Online and communications connection established Flashing The Network is normal but the communications connection with the Master Unit is not established Lit A fatal communications error has occurred A DeviceNet communications error was detected caused by node address duplication or Bus OFF These errors make communications impossible Flashing A non fatal communications error has occurred due to communications time out Not lit A DeviceNet Network error has occurred offline For example the Network does not exist power is not supplied to the Unit or the baud rates do not match 3 1 4 Node Address Settings A unique number called a node address is assigned to each Master Slave in order to manage com munications in the network There are two ways to set the node addresses The node addresses can be set with the rotary switches on the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card or from the Configurator m Setting the Node Address with the Rotary Switches GER GER ie I m I 27 27 Node address setting x 1 Node addre
93. configuration wiring and other conditions of the equipment or control panel in which the OMRON products are installed The customer must therefore perform the final check to confirm that products and the overall machine conform to EMC standards Note Applicable EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility standards are as follows EMS Electromagnetic Susceptibility EN61800 3 EMI Electromagnetic Interference EN61000 6 3 EM61000 6 3 radiated emission 10 m regulations e Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1 000 VAC or 75 to 1 500 VDC meet the required safety standards EN50178 m Conformity to EC Directives The following countermeasures must always be implemented to conform to EC Directives when using DeviceNet Communications Units or DeviceNet Communications Cards 3 25 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 e 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit Mount the Unit in a metal control panel as shown in the diagram Detailed precautions are given below EMC compliant input noise filter 3G3MV PDRT 3G3MV Inverter ZCAT3035 1330 Clamp Filter manufactured by TDK AC power supply Motor PLC with DeviceNet master L1L2L3 PE Control Panel 3 phase O og Metal Mounting noise filter me a lt 1 Grounding o dlelt l faces I G oa O u MV series Inverter
94. configurator for exam ple Communications Cycle Time e One Master in Network The following equations show the communications cycle time TRM when there is only one Master in the network If the calculation result is less than 2 ms the communications cycle time TRM will be considered as 2 ms Tam Communications time for 1 Slave High density Unit processing time Explicit message processing time COS Cyclic connection communications time 0 01 x N 1 0 ms Note N Number of Slaves Communications Time for 1 Slave This is the time required for 1 Slave to perform communications Communications time for 1 Slave in the above equation represents the sum of the communications times for each Slave in the network The equations used to calculate the communications time TRS for different types of Slave are given below Output Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Output Trt 0 016 x Tp x Sour1 0 11 x Tg 0 07 ms Souri The number of Output Slave output words Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 Input Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Input Trt 0 016 x Tp x Sind 0 06 x Tg 0 05 ms Sint The number of Input Slave input words Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 Mixed I O Slaves with 8 or Less Bytes of Both Input and Output Trt 0 016 x Tg xX SouT2 SiN2 0 11 x Tg 0 07 ms 10 27 Appendices Chapter 10
95. connect the shield wire at the other power supplies Note 1 Always ground the communications cable shield at one and only one location in the Network Note 2 Always ground to 100 Qor less Note 3 Always use a separate ground Never use the same ground as for Inverters or other drive system devices 3 20 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 m Grounding the DeviceNet Communications Unit The DeviceNet Communications Unit should be grounded according to DeviceNet recommendations installing a noise filter as shown in the following diagram The ground is normally wired to the ground terminal 2 Note If the cable grounded to the Inverter is not sufficient and is receiving noise interference discon nect the grounding cable Van Shield OOOOVDO 3 3 3 Communications Power Supply Noise Prevention The communications power supply is the most important power supply in a DeviceNet Network The following measures will prevent noise in the communications power supply e Use the recommended power supply S82H S82J made by OMRON for communications e Use an independent power supply for communications e Make sure to install a noise filter on the primary AC input side of the communications power supply Always use a control system power supply for the primary AC side of the communications power supply that is not shared with power devices such as Inverters or motors If noise interference remains
96. correct the data setting range send the range for the requested service the data again Manufacturer fault code Stop the Inverter and send the data again Check and correct the data setting range send the data again FINS Message Errors CS1 CJ1 FINS Meaning Likely cause Countermeasures response 0000 Normal completion 0101 Local node not in net The local node DeviceNet Unit is Check the DeviceNet Unit s set work not participating in the network tings and network settings 0105 Local node address The local node s DeviceNet Unit s Set the DeviceNet Unit s node out of range error node address is not between 0 and address correctly Set a unique 63 node address between 0 and 63 0106 Local node address The local node s DeviceNet Unit s duplication error node address is duplicated on another node 0201 Remote node not in The other node is not participating Establish a proper network connec network in the network The MS NS indica tion at the remote node tors will not be normal 8 4 Communications Errors FINS response Meaning No such Unit in remote node Likely cause The wrong node address was specified Chapter 8 Countermeasures Check the other node s node address The DeviceNet Unit s FINS address is incorrect Check the FINS address specified in the CMND instruction s control data Respon
97. data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following conditions set Number of poles set in n035 01 03 4 Speed scale attribute 16 0 e Converting frequency to rotational speed Frequency x 120 number of poles 60 x 120 4 1 800 r min e Converting rotational speed to minimum unit Rotational speed unit 1 800 1 r min x 1 2 1 800 e Converting communications data to hexadecimal 1 800 decimal 0708 hex Example 2 Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following condition set Frequency setting in n035 01 03 0 Cannot be set with DeviceNet protocol e Converting frequency to minimum setting unit Frequency minimum unit 60 0 01 6 000 e Converting communications data to hexadecimal 6 000 decimal 1 770 hex Example 3 Finding the communications data for setting a one minute acceleration time with the fol lowing condition set Time scale attribute 1C 33 FD hex e Matching the acceleration time unit 1 minute 60 seconds 60 000 ms e Converting acceleration time to minimum unit Acceleration time unit 60 000 1 ms x 1 23 7 500 e Converting communications data to hexadecimal 7 500 decimal 1D4C hex e Communications Data Reference Example In this example the hexadecimal value OBB8 that has been read is converted to frequency with the following conditions set Number of poles set in n035 01 03 4 Speed scale attribute 16 1 e Co
98. decimal 1770 hex Set as 1770 hex Torque reference torque Specifies the torque reference or torque limit for the Inverter output limit 3G3FV See notes 4 and 5 The torque limit torque reference is only enabled when flux vector control is set e Whether torque reference or torque limit is specified depends on the Inverter s control mode Speed control torque limit Torque control torque reference e Setting unit 0 1 100 motor rated torque e Setting range 300 0 to 300 0 See note 6 Example To set the torque reference to 10 10 0 1 100 decimal 64 hex Set as 64 hex Note Note Note Note Note Note Torque compensation bias Specifies the torque compensation bias when using torque control 3G3FV See note 4 Torque compensation bias is only available when performing torque control in flux vector control mode It is used separately from torque control to compensate for mechanical torque loss e Setting unit 0 1 100 motor rated torque e Setting range 300 0 to 300 0 See note 6 Example To set the torque compensation bias to 100 100 0 0 1 1000 decimal 3E8 hex Set as 3E8 hex In this manual the parameter location for the 3G3MV is written ahead of the parameter lo cation for the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV so n035 01 03 indicates a parameter location of n035 for the 3G3MV and parameter location of 01 03 for the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV The data setting
99. defined connected device comment for each output terminal 7 2 11 Connected Device Comment ON OFF Displays the ON OFF status for each output terminal Maintenance Counter Displays the present value of the maintenance counter for each output terminal Note Displays the cumulative ON time in seconds or the contact operations count number of times Clear Value Button Clears the present value of the maintenance counter to zero Note Select the terminal to be cleared and click the Clear Button to clear the value to zero 7 2 6 Cumulative ON Time Monitor 7 2 7 Contact Operations Monitor 7 57 Configurator Settings 7 4 3 IN Tab Page General OUT N Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters No 1O Comment fON OFF Maintenance Counter In Point 1 0 Seconds In Point 2 0 Seconds In Point 3 23 Seconds In Point 4 23 Seconds Chapter 7 In Point 5 2 Times In Point 6 2 Times In Point 7 56 Seconds Clear Value Close Item Reference Refer to the following table for meanings in the No field Note When the present value for the maintenance counter cumulative ON time or contact operations count exceeds the monitor value an error icon will be displayed to the left of the corresponding No setting No 05 in the above screen example Displays the user defined connected device comment for 7 2 11 Connected Device each input terminal Comm
100. error Not used Note 1 CPU internal A D converter error Note 2 CPU external A D converter error e CPF Error 2 Register Number 0018 Hex Bit Display Contem 0 CPF20 Optional Card A D error 1 to 15 Not used e Alarm 1 Register Number 0019 Hex Display Content Undervoltage main Overvoltage Overheat External overheat Overtorque detection 1 Overtorque detection 2 Forward reverse simultaneous input Baseblock External fault terminal 3 External fault terminal 4 External fault terminal 5 External fault terminal 6 41 0 SIDI oOo RA JO NI Oo 10 86 Chapter 10 Appendices Chapter 10 12 External fault terminal 7 External fault terminal 8 Not used Overspeed 0 Speed deviation 1 PG is disconnected Not used Class 64 Register Monitor Monitored item Output unit Instance Attribute umber number Frequency reference Set in 01 03 Output frequency Set in 01 03 Output current 8192 decimal Inverter rated current Control method Set in A1 02 Motor speed Set in 01 03 Output voltage 0 1 V Main circuit DC voltage 1V Output power 0 1 kW Torque reference 0 1 Input terminal status Bits 0 to 7 terminals 1 to 8 Output terminal status Refer to table below Operating status Refer to table below Elapsed time 1 hour FLASH ID software No Terminal
101. in the DM Area allocated to the PLC and sending them using the CMND instruction The IOWR instruction is used with C200HX HG HE PLCs If there is an error in the command the completion code is stored in the DM Area and the command is re executed us Allocations lt Program Start Input Bit lt Message Execution Flag lt Sending Message Flag lt Slave node address 3G3MV Inverter lt Service code OE Read 10 Write lt Number of command data bytes Hex to D00009 lt write data Hex See note lt No of received data bytes Input Flag Note If the written data size is Word set in the order of the rightmost bits and leftmost bits lt Node address and service code 8E Read normal 90 Write normal 94 Error to DO3007 lt Completion code storage for communications errors Bit 001000 Bit 000000 Bit 000001 lt Command Write Flag Bit 000002 lt Response Flag Bit 003000 Bit 003001 lt Message Sent Flag D00000 D00001 D00002 D00003 lt Class ID Hex D00004 lt Instance ID Hex D00005 lt Attribute ID Hex D00006 Response data storage area D03000 lt Command code 2801 D03001 lt Completion code D03002 D03003 D03004 D00100 lt Read data or error code 9 9 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Timing Ch
102. is turned ON Inverter operations will continue until the Program End Input is turned ON The frequency speed reference specified in the DM Area D01000 of the PLC is repeatedly set in the Inverter The output frequency value will be repeatedly read and stored in the DM Area D02000 The Inverter status will also be read repeatedly and stored in words 0020 allocated in the PLC If any communications error occurs the program will stop and a stop command will be sent to the Inverter This state will continue until the Communications Fault Reset Input Bit is turned ON Note Write the program so that the Inverter operation commands 001000 and 001001 will be turned OFF when the Fault Bit 002014 of the Inverter status turns ON and also take appro priate countermeasures according to maintenance information in the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Multi function General purpose Inverter User s Manual a Allocations e Inverter Control Input Word Allocation Word Function Forward Stop 1 forward Bit Reverse Stop 1 reverse Bit Multi function Input 3 set with n052 Bit Multi function Input 4 set with n053 Bit set with n054 Bit Multi function Input 5 Multi function Input 6 set with n055 Bit Multi function Input 7 set with n056 Bit Not used External Fault Input 1 EFO Bit Fault Reset 1 reset Bit e Inverter Status Word Allocation During Run 1 during run Bit Zero Speed 1 zero spe
103. left side of the corresponding No setting I O Comment Displays the comment for the connected device for each output terminal ON OFF Displays the ON OFF status present value status for each output terminal Maintenance Counter Displays the present value of the maintenance counter for each output terminal Note The total ON time s or contact operations count No of times is dis played Clear Value Button Clears the present value of the maintenance counter to zero Note Select the terminal to be cleared click the Clear Value Button to clear the value to zero Note 1 The monitoring items in the IN Tab Page are similar to the OUT Tab Page The numeric val ues in the No field however indicate each input terminal Refer to page 29 Note 2 The ON OFF status of the Connected Component Maintenance Flag can be checked on the General Tab Page of the Monitor Device Window When this flag is ON the Connected Com ponent Maintenance check box will be selected 7 31 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 e Using the Maintenance Information Window Click the OUT Tab or IN Tab in the Maintenance Information Window Note The differences between the OUT Tab Page and IN Tab Page in the Monitor Device Window and in the Maintenance Information Window are as follows e The Maintenance Counter field shows the value when the maintenance information was re freshed and not the present value e The Clear Monitor Present Va
104. limiter 0 to 100 0 Appendices Chapter 10 Note 1 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The V F con trol default setting is given above Note 2 The default setting is 0 1 for V f control with PG Note 3 The default setting is 2 00 s for Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more Note 4 The same capacity as the Inverter can be set by initializing this parameter Note 5 The setting range for Asian models is 0 to 300 0 Note 6 The setting range for Asian models is 0 to 1 Tuning Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Acceleration time 1 0 0 to 0 1s ion ti 6000 0 Set with Deceleration time 1 Set with C1 10 Acceleration time 2 C1 10 Deceleration time 2 Acceleration time 3 Deceleration time 3 Acceleration time 4 Deceleration time 4 Deceleration Stop Time Accel decel time setting unit 0 1 Accel decel time switching frequency 0 0 to 400 0 S curve characteristic time at accelera 0 00 to tion start 2 50 S curve characteristic time at accelera 0 00 to 0 20 tion end 2 50 S curve characteristic time at decelera 0 00 to 0 20 tion start 2 50 S curve characteristic time at decelera 0 00 to 0 00 tion end 2 50 Slip compensation gain 0 0 to 2 5 0 0 0 See note 1 Slip compensation primary delay time O to 2000 10000 See note 1 Slip compensation limit 0 to 2
105. list is enabled The following example shows a node address of 63 for the DeviceNet Master Unit Master Unit 7 segment Display co mh l ON Slave function operation is stopped t tt OFF Scan list enabled Master Unit node address 63 When an error has occurred the display alternates between the error code and the node address where the error occurred ar 2 5 2 Reading and Writing Data Connect the Peripheral Device for the PLC to the DeviceNet Master Unit write the DeviceNet Mas ter Unit s OUT Area and read the IN Area and check that the data are the same in the Slaves Refer to the operation manual for the DeviceNet Master Unit for details on OUT Area and IN Area addresses and how to allocate Slave I O m I O between Remote I O Terminals Create ladder programs in the PLC of the DeviceNet Master Unit and check that when the switch on the DRT2 ID16 Input Terminal turns ON the indicator on the DRT2 OD16 Output Terminal is ON Master Unit DRT2 ID16 Remote I O j of ae Terminal 16 transistor inputs Node 01 Switch 1 bit 00 330100 320200 Cj DRT2 0D16 Remote I O Terminal 16 transistor outputs Node 02 Indicator bit 00 rO 2 13 Example System Startup Chapter 2 Example IN Area and OUT Area The following diagram shows the IN and OUT Are
106. min When the speed scale value is O and the number of motor poles is set in n035 01 03 so unit is r min 1 800 r min 1 800 x2 1 800 0708 hex Note 1 Under the DeviceNet protocol the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r min The number of motor poles 2 to 39 must be set in parameter n035 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units when using DeviceNet open network Note 2 If the setting in not within the proper range the previous data will be retained and the des ignated rotational speed will not be entered e Input Bit Details Fault Normal 1 Fault Alarm Minor Fault Normal 1 Alarm minor fault During forward run Stop reverse 1 During forward run See note 1 Stop forward 1 During reverse run See note 2 Preparing 1 Ready Not DeviceNet n003 b1 02 1 Device Net See note 3 Not DeviceNet n004 b1 01 1 DeviceNet See note 4 Accelerating or Decelerating 1 At reference During reverse run Inverter Ready Control From Net Reference From Net At Reference O 0 0D 0 0 0 0D O 5 13 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 Note 1 Forward Operation indicates either forward run status or DC braking DC injection status This bit turns ON even for DC braking DC injection during reverse run Note 2 Reverse Operation indicates reverse output status This bit does not turn ON for DC braking DC injection Note 3 Control From Net
107. negative value as its 2 s complement 45 to 15 F1 to OF hex Time scale Time data unit selection can be set and read The time data unit value is cal culated as follows Unit 1 ms x 1 2 e Voltage scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement 45 to 15 F1 to OF hex Reference From Net See note 1 00 Reference other than DeviceNet n004 b1 01 01 Operating with DeviceNet Electric power Average power value W Electric power time scale Power value measure ment period T 00 10 minutes 01 30 minutes 02 60 minutes 00 to 02 Specific alarm Alarm code of the alarm or minor fault detected in the Inverter For more details refer to 8 5 Inverter Alarms Specific error Fault code of the fault detected in the Inverter For more details refer to 8 4 Inverter Faults Message Communications Chapter 6 Note 1 The Net Reference and Reference From Net functions cannot be changed during running Note 2 Under the DeviceNet protocol the unit for the speed reference is always r min The number of motor poles 2 to 39 must be set in parameter n035 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units when using DeviceNet open network After changing the unit setting turn the power OFF and then ON again Note 3 Cannot be changed during running e Communications Data Setting Examples Example 1 Finding the communications
108. number Clearing and Creating Scan Lists Switch the operating mode switch to PROGRAM mode Enable the DeviceNet Master Unit functions Set the DeviceNet Master Unit function enable switch bit 06 of word n from OFF to ON Clear the scan lists Set the scan list clear switch bit 01 of word n from OFF to ON Select the fixed allocation areas 1 to 3 Set the DeviceNet Master Unit s setting switch for fixed allo cation areas 1 to 3 bit 00 of word n from OFF to ON Enable the scan lists Set the scan list enable switch bit 00 of word n from OFF to ON Switch the operating mode switch to RUN or MONITOR mode Checking the Normal Slave Table Monitor the normal Slave table words n 20 to n 23 and confirm that the corresponding bits are ON In the normal Slave table the corresponding bits will be ON for the nodes that are communicating properly Note With this Chapter s example system configuration a value of 002E in word n 20 indicates nor mal operation 2 12 Example System Startup Chapter 2 2 5 Checking Operation Use the procedures provided here to check that I O communications are operating normally 2 5 1 Indicator Status I O communications are operating normally if the MS and NS indicators for all nodes are lit green and the 7 segment indicator on the front panel of the DeviceNet Master Unit is displaying the node address of the DeviceNet Master Unit as shown in the following diagram and the scan
109. object for receiving this object instance Note Has a function for switching the DeviceNet Com munication Unit Card s remote I O operation a COS or Cyclic connection Note 3 eProduced Connection Path Remote I O function 46 hex Basic remote I O input Connection Size See note 3 The following table shows the connection path for each Instance Connection Path 20 04 24 46 30 03 Produced means output Inverter to PLC and Consumed means input PLC to Inverter Instance 02 is a Poll connection Instance 03 is a Bit strobe connection and Instance 04 is Remarks 47 hex input Standard remote I O 20 04 24 47 30 03 Instance 02 default setting 96 hex Special remote I O input 20 04 24 96 30 03 97 hex input 10 10 Control I O remote I O 20 04 24 97 30 03 Appendices Chapter 10 Remote I O function Connection Connection Path Remarks Size 98 hex Control I O remote I O 20 04 24 98 30 03 Unit status input 99 hex Control I O remote I O 20 04 24 99 30 03 multi function input monitor input 9A hex Unit status input 20 04 24 9A 30 03 Instance 04 default setting 9B hex Multi function input moni 20 04 24 9B 30 03 tor input No remote I O function set Instance 03 default setting eConsumed Connection Path Remote I O function ig eae Connection Path Remarks ize 1
110. on the Slave but it isn t nec essary to set the baud rate for Smart Slaves The baud rate is automatically set to match the Mas ters baud rate m Network Power Supply Voltage Monitor Function The network power supply values present value maximum value and minimum value can be recorded in the Slave In addition the Slave can report through the Unit status flags when the volt age drops below the SV monitor voltage set in the Slave m Unit Comment Function An user defined name can be set for each Unit and the names can be stored in the Slaves Connected Device Comment Function User defined names can be set for the motor connected to the Inverter and devices connected to control I O terminals and those names can be stored in the Inverter Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 s Communications Error Log Monitor Function The error status communications error source code and communications power supply voltage at the time for the last four communications errors can be recorded in the Slave m Last Maintenance Date Maintenance Function The date of the last maintenance can be written in the Unit m Parameter Setting Function The Inverter s user parameters can be set with the Configurator There are two ways to set the parameters as follows e Several of the major parameters can be displayed and set An individual parameter s Instance Attribute can be specified and set Functions and System Configura
111. overload Overtorque detection 1 Overtorque detection 2 Braking transistor Braking resistor External fault Terminal 3 External fault Terminal 4 External fault Terminal 5 1 hour 10 89 Appendices Chapter 10 Display Content External fault Terminal 6 External fault Terminal 7 External fault Terminal 8 Not used Overspeed Speed deviation PG is disconnected Input phase loss Output phase loss Not used OPR disconnected EEPROM error Not used Note 1 Maximum upper limit temperature was exceeded Note 2 Set temperature was exceeded 10 7 3 Parameter Reading and Writing The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Inverter parameters and the corresponding regis ter numbers Write and read the various parameters with 1 as the minimum setting unit Negative numbers are expressed as two s complement If the setting unit is in hexadecimal there is no need to convert it When writing data in parameters be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data Unless the enter command is transmitted the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start Parameters for Initialize Mode Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute 0100 Display Language Oto 6 0101 Access Level 0to 4 0102 Select Control Method 0to 3 0103 Initialize 0 to 3330
112. power lines and other power lines near to each other Keep the power lines for Inverters motors regulators and contactors the communications lines and the PLC power lines separated from each other by at least 300 mm Also provide separate conduits or ducts for the communications lines and power lines Low voltage Suspended duct Floor duct cableCommunications 1 2 cable 1 SSSSSOISISSSO Communications line 000000 SESS PLC I O Line 2 Control cable 300 mm min 888000 PLC Power Line 9920090999 General control circuit line Shieldi Power cable 300 mm min PO 1 Communications line 50000000 1 2 SYSMAC I O Line Power lines 306006000600 29 2 Power line OO OG l Ground 100 Q max e Do not install communications lines and PLC power lines onto the control panel on which high volt age devices are mounted e Because noise currents flow through metallic equipment such as casings the communications cables should be placed as far away from metallic equipment as possible 3 22 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 e Ground the shielding wire on the communications cable at one point If the same ground is used for the communications cables and communications power supply there is a possibility that noise may be transmitted through the ground line to the communications line In order to avoid this be sure that the power line ground and the grounds for
113. protection selection O 1 Output open phase protection selec 0 1 tion Ground fault protection operation 0 1 selection Low speed carrier frequency reduction O to 3 selection 2 Low speed Inverter overload OL2 0 1 characteristic selection Note 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given above 10 100 Appendices Chapter 10 Operator Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Monitor selection Monitor selection after power on Frequency reference setting and dis play units V f pattern setting units Not used Local Remote Key Stop Key User constant initial values Inverter capacity selection Frequency reference setting method Operation selection when Digital Oper ator is disconnected Cumulative operation time setting Cumulative operation time selection Factory use Note The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given above 10 101 Appendices Chapter 10 10 102 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No 1539 E1 01 Revision code
114. remote I O are compatible with DeviceNet The other remote I O functions are applicable only to this product and are not defined in DeviceNet Specification Explicit messages A maximum of 32 bytes of data can be sent or received Note Explicit messages are applicable to the AC DC drive profile Communications power supply speci fications 11 to 25 V DC 50 mA max 20 mA typical Internal circuit power supply Supplied from the 3G3MV Inverter Operating location Indoors with no corrosive gases oil mist metallic particles etc Operating ambient temperature 10 to 50 C Operating ambient humidity 90 RH max with no condensation Storage temperature 20 to 60 C Area 1 000 m max Weight m Dimensions SEN mer MS NODE ADR NS OO 128 68 10 2 100 g max Appendices Chapter 10 10 1 2 DeviceNet Communications Card Specifications Model 3G3RV PDRT2 Remote I O e Basic remote I O Allocated 2 input words and 2 output words e Standard remote I O default setting Allocated 2 input words and 2 output words e Special remote I O Allocated 3 input words an
115. setting Setting range 155 to 255 155 to 510 See note 1 Setting unit Default setting 200 400 See note 1 V f pattern selection 0 to F F Max output frequency 40 0 to 400 0 See note 5 50 0 60 0 See notes 3 and 8 Max voltage 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 See note 1 200 0 400 0 See note 1 Base frequency 0 0 to 400 0 50 0 60 0 See notes 3 and 8 id output frequency 0 0 to 400 0 3 0 See note 3 id output frequency voltage 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 See note 1 15 0 30 0 See notes 1 in output frequency 0 0 to 400 0 in output frequency voltage 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 See note 1 id output frequency 2 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 See note 6 id output frequency voltage 2 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 See note 1 0 0 See note 6 Base voltage 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to Motor rated current Depends on capacity 10 56 Motor rated slip Depends on capacity Appendices Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Motor no load current Setting range Depends on capacity Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting Depends on capacity Number of motor poles 2 to 48 4 Motor line to line resistance 0 000 to 65 000 Depends on capacity Motor leak inductance
116. shows the input status of word n bit 5 Net Control for DeviceNet com munications Note 4 Reference From Net shows the input status of word n bit 6 Net Reference for DeviceNet communications e Input Data Details Word address Bit Signal name Rotational speed monitor data Content Communications data Rotational speed monitor x 2 a Speed scale value of Class 2A Instance 01 Attribute 16 Initial value 0 The speed scale is assigned to the message function For instructions on how to change it refer to Chapter 6 Message Communications The unit for the rotational speed monitor is set in n035 01 03 frequency reference set ting and display units Data conversion example When the speed scale value is 0 and the number of motor poles is set in n035 01 03 and the read data is 03E8 hex 03E8 hex 1 000 1 000 2 31 000 r min Note Under the DeviceNet protocol the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r min The number of motor poles 2 to 39 must be set in parameter n035 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units when using DeviceNet open network 5 14 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 5 5 Special Remote I O Operation The special remote I O function is a proprietary OMRON format not a remote I O format specified by DeviceNet This remote I O function can be used to read set all of a 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV or 3G3FV Inverter s parameters and take advantage of all of the Inverte
117. status to the Master Refer to 7 2 Smart Slave Functions for details on making settings such as each functions threshold value Note When using the control I O remote l o function there is a default setting available a default connection path setting which attaches the unit status 16 bits to the remote I O 5 7 1 Unit Status This section explains the I O format allocated words and bit data functions when the unit status is allocated to a COS connection a I O Format Allocated Words e Inputs Inverter to PLC Instance ID 154 Decimal 9A Hex Byte number Con Opera Warning Cooling Inverter Network nected tion time torque fan elec unit power compo over flag detected trolytic mainte voltage nent flag capaci nance drop flag mainte tor main flag nance tenance flag flag Error flag Inverter detected fault code Note 1 A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Note 2 Outputs PLC to Inverter cannot be allocated 5 29 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 m Bit and Data Details e Input Bit Details Network power volt age drop flag Normal The network power supply voltage is higher than the preset threshold voltage present value gt threshold value Fault The network power supply voltage is less than or equal to the preset threshold voltage present value lt threshold value Inverter unit mainte nance flag Normal
118. ter minal status Monitors U2 11 same contents as U1 10 008B Fault output terminal status Monitors U2 12 same contents as U1 11 008C Fault operating status Monitors U2 13 same contents as U1 12 008D Fault cumula tive operation time Monitors U2 14 1 hr units 0090 0800 Content of last fault Monitors U3 01 same codes as U2 01 0091 0801 Content of 2nd prior fault Monitors U3 02 same codes as U2 01 0092 0802 Content of 3rd prior fault Monitors U3 03 same codes as U2 01 0093 0803 Content of 4th prior fault Monitors U3 04 same codes as U2 01 0094 080A Cumulative operation time since last fault Monitors U3 05 1 hr units 0095 080B Cumulative operation time since 2nd prior fault Monitors U3 06 1 hr units 0096 080C Cumulative operation time since 3rd prior fault Monitors U3 07 1 hr units 0097 080D Cumulative operation time since 4th prior fault Monitors U3 08 1 hr units Connect of 5th prior fault Monitors U3 09 same codes as U2 01 See note Connect of 6th prior fault Monitors U3 10 same codes as U2 01 See note Connect of 7th prior fault Monitors U3 11 same codes as U2 01 See note Connect of 8th prior fault Monitors U3 12 same codes as U2 01 See note 10 49 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 Register Content Instance At
119. terminal S6 1 Bit 6 Multi function input terminal S7 1 Bit 7 to 15 Not used Appendices Class 64 Instance Attribute Register number hex Inverter status Chapter 10 Content Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating Bit 1 Zero speed 1 Zero speed Bit 2 Frequency agreement 1 Agreement Bit 3 User defined speed agreement 1 Agreement Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 1 Output frequency gt L4 01 Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1 Startup completed Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1 Detected Bit 8 Baseblock 1 Inverter output baseblock Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1 Not communications 0 Communications Bit 10 Run command mode 1 Not communications 0 Com munications Bit 11 Overtorque detection 1 Detected Bit 12 Frequency reference lost 1 Lost Bit 13 Retrying error 1 Retrying Bit 14 Fault including RS 422A 485 communications time out 1 fault occurred Bit 15 Communications time out 1 Timed out Multi function output status Bit 0 Multi function contact output terminals M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Multi function PHC output 1 terminals P1 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 Multi function PHC output 2 terminals P2 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 3 to 15 Not used 002E to 0030 Not used 0031
120. the communications cables and the communications power supply are located as far from each other as possible N Caution Connect the communications signal lines V CAN H shield CAN L and VJ so that they do not come into contact with each other If noise is generated check the wiring e Communications may be performed even if the V and CAN H or V and CAN L are in contact with each other but differential operation will not be performed reducing resistance to noise e If the shield wire comes into contact with any of the signal lines a high level of noise will be superimposed on the line reducing resistance to noise 3 3 5 Noise Prevention for Peripheral Devices e Install surge suppressors on devices that generate noise particularly devices that have an induc tive component such as motors transformers solenoids and magnetic coils Surge suppressor Surge suppressor _ Installed next to device ye Installed next to device o 0 O O f 1 T I 3 z 3 DC input type Device such as a motor AC input type Device such as a motor If a surge suppressor does not fit on the device installing a ferrite core directly next to the device s contactors such as a contactor may be effective Ferrite core 0443 164151 en er Device such as a motor Insert a line filter on the primary side of the communications power supply e When there are two or more communications power
121. then close the window 7 7 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 General 10 Information OUT Poll allocated to 63 3200 Bit00 a IN Poll allocated to 63 3300 Bit00 gt te Connection Out h Size Help 9 Poll Out 4 Bytes h 4 Bytes Bit Strobe Out 0 Bytes 0 Bytes cos 0 Bytes 2 Bytes 0 Bytes 2 Bytes Get I O Size from the Scanlist Close 3 Check that the warning icon has been canceled from the Network Configuration Window or Device EDS File Tools Option Help Den rR Network Edit Vi leres TeX 4 ix BEE SE I Hardware 3 63 Vendor 4 Gj OMRON Corporation 20 3 263 5 8 DeviceType 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet OS1W DRM21 BJ AC Drives 2169 3G3FV PDRTI SIN z 3G3FV PDRT2 E 3G3MV PDRTI SIN 5 3G3MV PDRT2 3G3PV PDRTI SIN E 3G3PV PDRT2 5 3GARV PDRTI SIN 5 9G3RV PDRT2 4 4 Communications Adapter Sy General Purpose Discrete I O Generic Device Human Machine Interface Position Controller E Ready OMRON SG8F7 DRM21 D413 500K Bit s On line NUM Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 2 Smart Slave Functions This section describes the details of Smart Slave functions and the operating procedures used in the Edit Device Parameters Window that is important for setting the Smart Slave functions The details on setting and monitoring these functions from the Configurator are also provided here 7 2 1 Precautions when Ope
122. trunk line Use the methods described here to connect the Terminating Resistors e T branch Tap Terminating Resistor A Terminating Resistor is included with the T branch Tap Insert the Terminating Resistor into the T branch Tap as shown in the following diagram The Terminating Resistor can face in either direction e Terminal block Terminating Resistor OMRON DRS1 T 8 Model DRS1 T Q Specifications 121 QH 1 4W 20 Manufacturer OMRON 41 max al 20 max A Terminating Resistor is built into the Terminal block Terminating Resistor To connect the cable to the Terminating Resistor attach standard M3 crimp terminals to the signal wires and securely screw the terminals to the Terminal block Terminating Resistor Tighten to a torque of 0 5 N m 3 16 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 6 0 mm max Do 6 0 mm max Om Note To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires do not pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when connecting it to the terminal block Also never place heavy objects on top of the cable 3 2 5 Making Multi drop Connections with Thin Cable m Using the Connector Provided with Unit When connecting thin cable with the multi drop method it is possible to insert two wires with the same color into the same hole as shown in the following diagram Example Connector without Set Screws AN Insert the two wires into the same crimp terminal as shown below Ins
123. valid when combined with control I O remote I O and the following parameter settings 3G3MV When 18 12 hex communications output is set in n057 and n058 multi function outputs 1 and 2 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV When F not used is set in H2 01 and H2 02 multi function contact output and multi function output 1 Under these conditions output from the Inverter control terminal can be controlled by com munications and these signals can be used as triggers to start measurement Application Example e Output to input Example It is possible to detect deterioration in cylinder operation and estimate expiration of the cylinder s ser vice life by using the Inverter s multi function output to drive the cylinder and inputting the cylinder s travel completed signal in the multi function input 7 22 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Programmable Controller DeviceNet Master Operating time Unit measurement results DeviceNet Inverter Cylinder driven by Cylinder Travel completion multi function output N i Travel completion input by multi function input Input to input Example It is possible to detect deterioration in conveyor operation and estimate expiration of the conveyor s service life by inputting sensor signals from two locations on the conveyor into the Inverter s multi function input Programmable Controller
124. value Fault The value monitored by the cumulative ON time monitor function or number of contact operations monitor function is greater than or equal to the preset threshold voltage maintenance counter gt threshold value Normal A fault is not detected in the Inverter Fault A fault was detected in the Inverter This flag operates together with the Inverter detected fault code e Input Data Details Inverter Detected Fault Code When an fault has occurred in the Inverter the fault code will be reported in bits 0 to 6 of the leftmost byte At the same time the error flag will be turned ON The following table lists the fault codes and corresponding faults Applicable Inverters Operator Meaning 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV display Inverter normal Fuse open Undervoltage main Control power supply fault Undervoltage MC failure in the 3G3RV 5 30 Short circuit Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 Applicable Inverters Operator Meaning 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3FV display 3G3PV Ground fault Overcurrent Main circuit overvoltage Overheat Inverter overheating for 3G3MV 3G3RV Overheat Inverter overheating for 3G3RV Motor overload Inverter overload Overtorque detection 1 Overtorque detection 2 Braking transistor failure Braking resistor overheating External fault Terminal 3 External fault Terminal 4 Ext
125. word m bit 7 turns ON communications errors will be detected and the Commu nications Error Flag will be turned ON and will be self holding While this flag remains ON the sys tem will perform the same processing as when the Program End Input Bit is turned ON When the Communications Error Reset Input Bit is turned ON the self holding state will be cleared 9 16 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Ladder Program 000000 000004 000100 f DIFU 013 SS 003002 003000 000101 003000 000004 aa C 000002 000102 000002 000103 003000 MOV 021 i f PEN 003002 Sets shift register XFER 070 000100 0002 MOV 021 D00100 40010 n D00100 MOVD 083 ANDW 034 D00102 D01000 s0010 FF00 aa D00101 000100 ORW 035 CMP 020 D00101 0010 0002 Equals Flag P_EQ m D00101 C 003100 ANDW 034 D01000 ANDW 034 Sets frequency reference 00FF wear D00102 000101 00FF MOV 021 D01002 oe CMP 020 D00100 Fe ANDW 034 Equals Flag P_EQ D01002 0010 HFFOO
126. 0 Parameters for Initialize Mode Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute 0100 Language selection for Digital Operator 0 to 6 display 0101 Parameter access level 0to 2 0102 Control method selection 0to2 0103 Initialize 0 to 3330 0104 Password 0 to 9999 0105 Password setting 0 to 9999 0106 to User parameter settings 0180 to 0125 050C Set the register numbers for b1 01 to 02 11 Application Parameters Regis Class 64 hex Default ter num in At setting hex stance tribute Reference selection 0to 4 Operation method selection 0to 3 Stopping method selection 0to 3 Prohibition of reverse operation 0to 2 See note 6 Read sequence input twice 0 1 Operation selection after switching to O 1 remote mode Run command selection in program 0 1 ming modes Zero speed level DC injection braking 0 0 to starting frequency 10 0 DC injection braking current 0 to 100 DC injection braking time at start 0 00 to 10 00 DC Injection braking time at stop 0 00 to 10 00 Speed search selection current detec 0 to 3 tion or speed calculation Speed search operating current cur 0 to 200 rent detection Speed search deceleration time cur rent detection Speed search wait time current detec tion or speed calculation Timer function ON delay time
127. 0 ms units Setting range 0 to 65 535 ms Default Chapter 10 Watchdog time out action Indicates the action for internal processing time out related to communica tions 00 Retain timeout status until reset or cleared 01 Cut connection auto matically 02 Operate again with same connection as is Produced con nection path length No data for explicit mes sages Produced con nection path No data for explicit mes sages Consumed con nection path length No data for explicit mes sages Consumed con nection path No data for explicit mes sages State Indicates the status of this object instance 00 Does not exist in net work or is not ready 01 In network state wait ing for connection event from Master Unit 02 Waiting for connection ID attribute writing 03 Connection com pleted 04 Timeout Must be 03 when communi cations are estab lished Instance type Indicates the type of object instance 00 Explicit message 01 Remote I O Transport class trigger Indicates the communica tions configuration for the DeviceNet Communica tions Unit Card Produced con nection ID Consumed con nection ID Indicates the label used for the communications header for the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card Note These are set when the commu nications connec tion is made Initial comm
128. 00 loss detection level PID feedback command 0 0 to loss detection time 25 5 PID sleep function opera 0 0 to tion level 400 0 PID sleep operation delay 0 0 to i 0 0 time 25 5 Accel decel time for PID ref 0 0 to 0 0 erence 25 5 Energy saving mode selec 0 or 1 0 tion Energy saving coefficient 0 00 to De 655 00 pends See on ca note pacity Power detection filter time O to 20 constant 2 000 Search operation voltage 0 to 100 0 limiter Note The same capacity as the Inverter can be set by initializing this parameter Tuning Parameters Register Class 64 Hex Setting Setting Default Changes In At range unit setting during stance tribute opera tion Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 Deceleration Stop Time Accel decel time switching frequency S curve characteristic time at acceleration start S curve characteristic time at acceleration end 10 74 Appendices Register Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute Torque compensation gain Setting range 0 00 to 2 50 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting 1 00 Changes during opera tion Torque compensation pri mary delay time constant 0 to 10 000 200 See note 1 Carrier frequency selection 1toF De pends on ca paci
129. 0000 Write Parameter Input Bit Bit 000002 Faulty Data Reset Input Bit Input Bit 003000 lt Data Write Flag Bit 003005 Data Agree Flag Function Code and Register No Bit 000100 lt Sending Written Data Flag Bit 000101 lt Sending Enter Command Flag Flag Bit 000102 lt Setting 00 Function Code Flag Bit 000103 lt Data Write Completed Flag Bit 003010 lt Faulty Data Flag D00000 lt Register number of the parameter to be written D00001 Written data e Remote I O Allocation Areas I O classification Word address Output n Register number leftmost Function code 10 Write 03 PLC to 3G3MV byte Read Inverter n 1 Register data leftmost byte Register number rightmost byte n 2 Not used Register data rightmost byte Input m Register number leftmost Function code 10 Write 03 3G3MV Inverter to byte Read PLC m 1 Register data leftmost byte Register number rightmost byte m 2 Not used Register data rightmost byte 9 22 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Timing Chart 000000 Write Parameter Input Bit l 003000 Data Write Flag EI 003005 Data Agree Flag 000100 Sending Written Data Flag 000101 Sending Enter Command Flag 000102 Sending 00 Function Flag 000103 Data Write Completed Flag Word n to n 2 Send Data lt Send Data Write En
130. 01 53 Trim control level Oto 100 1 25 No d5 01 0291 01 54 Torque control selection 0 1 1 0 No d5 02 0292 01 55 Torque reference delay time 0 to 1000 1 ms 0 No d5 03 0293 01 56 Speed limit selection 1 2 1 1 No d5 04 0294 01 57 Speed limit oe to 1 0 No d5 05 0295 01 58 Speed limit bias 0to120 1 10 No d5 06 0296 01 59 Speed torque control switching timer O to 1000 1 ms 0 No 10 94 Appendices Chapter 10 Motor Constant Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Input voltage setting 155 to 255 155 to 510 Motor selection 0to 2 0 V f pattern selection OtoF F Maximum frequency FMAX 40 0 to 60 0 400 0 Maximum voltage VMAX 0 0 to 200 0 255 0 400 0 0 0 to 510 0 Maximum voltage frequency FA 0 0 to 60 0 400 0 Intermediate frequency FB 0 0 to 3 0 See 400 0 note 2 Intermediate voltage VC 0 0 to i 11 0 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 Minimum frequency FMIN 0 0 to 400 0 Minimum voltage VMIN 0 0 to 2 0 4 0 255 0 See 0 0 to note 2 510 0 Mid output frequency B 0 0 to 0 0 400 0 Mid output frequency voltage B 0 0 to 0 0 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 Base voltage 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 Motor rated current 0 32 to 6 40 See note 4 Motor rated slip 0 00 o 20 00 Motor no load current 0 00 to 2 90 See note 5 Number of motor po
131. 010026 S0026 June 2002 VSP010025 S0025 June 2001 VSP010024 S0024 September 2000 Supports all functions Current trace function and warning torque detection function are use increments of 0 1 A for detection and display 3G3MV Series 5 5 kW and more VSP010105 80105 September 2002 VSP010104 80104 May 2001 Supports all functions Current trace function and warning torque detection function are use increments of 0 1 A for detection and display 3G3RV Series VSF105081 55081 and higher November 2001 Supports all functions Current trace function and warning torque detection function are use increments of 0 1 A for detection and display 3G3PV Series VSE102014 82014 July 2002 VSE102013 S2013 March 2001 Supports all functions Current trace function and warning torque detection function are use increments of 0 1 A for detection and display 3G3FV Series 1 10 VSG101114 51114 September 2002 VSG101113 81113 September 2000 VSG101043 81043 September 1998 It is not possible to force switch the com mand right from the network Specifically even if netref and netctrl see 5 4 Standard Remote I O are turned ON the command right will not be switched to the network Use parameters b1 02 and b1 01 to set the command right There are no restrictions to other functions Functions and System Configuration Cha
132. 04 oD S P2 function select open col O to 37 1 2 No ector 10 59 Appendices Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Signal select terminal A1 voltage See note 4 Setting range Oor1 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting Frequency reference voltage gain terminal A1 0 0 to 1000 0 Frequency reference voltage bias terminal A1 100 0 to 100 0 Multi function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection 0to2 Multi function analog input terminal A2 function selection Oto 1F Frequency reference current gain terminal A2 0 0 to 1000 0 Frequency reference current bias terminal A2 100 0 to 100 0 Analog input filter time constant 0 00 to 2 00 Terminal A1 A2 switching 0 1 Multi function analog output 1 monitor selection terminal FM 1 to 40 Multi function analog output 1gain ter minal FM 0 0 to 1000 0 0 00 to 2 50 see note 3 Multi function analog output 1 bias ter minal FM 1410 0 to 110 0 40 0 to 10 0 See note 3 Multi function analog output 2 monitor selection terminal AM 1 to 40 3 Multi function analog output 2 gain ter minal AM 50 0 50 See note 3 Multi function analog output 2 bias terminal AM 1410 0 to 110 0 40 0 to 10 0 See note 3 0 0 Multi function analog output 1 signal level selection 0 1 2
133. 1 Main circuit undervoltage UV detected Bit 12 Main circuit undervoltage UV1 control power sup ply error UV2 inrush prevention circuit error UV3 Bit 13 Missing output phase LF Bit 14 RS 422A 485 communications error CE Bit 15 Operator disconnected OPR 10 43 Appendices Class 64 Instance Attribute Register number hex Data link status Chapter 10 Content Bit 0 Writing data Bit 1 to 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit 4 Data integrity error Bit 5 to 15 Not used Frequency ref erence Monitors U1 01 Unit set with 01 03 Output fre quency Monitors U1 02 Unit set with 01 03 Output volt age reference Monitors U1 06 0 1 V units Output current Monitors U1 03 Inverters of 7 5 kW or less 0 01 A units Inverters of 11 kW or more 0 1 A units Output power Monitors U1 08 0 1 kW units Torque refer ence Monitors U1 09 0 1 units 100 motor s rated torque Note Only enabled for vector control 0029 to 002A Not used 10 44 002B Sequence input status Bit 0 Multi function input terminal S1 1 Bit 1 Multi function input terminal S2 1 Bit 2 Multi function input terminal S3 1 Bit 3 Multi function input terminal S4 1 Bit 4 Multi function input terminal S5 1 Bit 5 Multi function input
134. 1 The frequency reference minimum unit can be set by the frequency reference setting and display units in n035 01 03 n035 01 03 0 0 01 Hz n035 01 03 1 0 01 100 Max frequency n035 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min n035 01 03 40 to 3 999 Follow individual set values When r min units are being used a multipler can be set in attribute 16 the Speed Scale setting 0 to max fre quency 10 18 Current Actual Can be referenced in hexa decimal with the output cur rent monitor U 03 U1 03 minimum unit as 0 1 A Setting the attribute 17 cur rent scale enables a multi plication factor to be set Appendices Instance Attribute Power Actual Content Can be referenced in hexa decimal with the output power monitor U 11 U1 08 minimum unit as 1 W Setting the attribute 1A power scale enables a mul tiplication factor to be set Setting range Default Chapter 10 Input Voltage Can be referenced in hexa decimal with the input volt age setting 200 or 400 E1 01 minimum unit as 1 V Setting the attribute 1B volt age scale enables a multi plication factor to be set Output Voltage Can be referenced in hexa decimal with the output volt age monitor U 04 U1 06 minimum unit as 1 V Setting the attribute 1B volt age scale enables a multi plication factor to be set Accel Time Decel Time Can be set and read in hexadecimal with the accel
135. 1 Parameter access level 04 Password 05 Password setting A3 Timer function ON delay time A4 Timer function OFF delay time 25 Carrier frequency upper limit 26 Carrier frequency lower limit 27 Carrier frequency proportional gain 19t0 20 Motor 2 V f pattern 21to27 Motor 2 set values 1E Multi function analog output 1 terminal FM output gain 1F Multi function analog output 1 terminal FM bias 21 Multi function analog output 2 terminal AM output gain 22 Multi function analog output 2 terminal AM bias 7 46 Configurator Settings Class 64 Instance Parameter No Attribute Chapter 7 Details Multi function analog output 1 terminal FM signal level selection Multi function analog output 2 terminal AM signal level selection LCD brightness Inverter capacity selection Note When the 3G3RV 3G3PV is used all parameters can be set from the Configurator e 3G3FV Parameter Group Parameter group Details All Parameters Initialize Mode Parameters A Environment settings A1 02 only Application Group B Application Tuning Parameters C Tuning Reference Parameters D Reference Motor Constant Parameters E Motor constant Option Parameter F Option Terminal Parameter H Terminal function setting Protection Parameter L Protection function Operator Parameter O Operator
136. 100 0 PID primary delay time constant 0 00 to 10 00 PID output characteristic selection 0 1 PID output gain 0 0 to 25 0 PID output reverse selection 0 1 Feedback loss detection selection 0to2 Feedback loss detection level 0 to 100 Feedback loss detection time 0 0 to 25 0 10 91 Appendices Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Dwell frequency at start Setting range Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting Dwell time at start Dwell frequency at stop Dwell time at stop 0 0 to 10 0 Droop control gain 0 0 to 100 0 Droop control delay time 0 03 to 2 00 Energy saving gain 0 to 100 Energy saving frequency 0 0 to 400 0 Zero servo gain 0 to 100 Zero servo completion width 0 to 16383 Note When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The open loop vector control default setting is given above Tuning Parameters Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1 Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 Acceleration time 3 Deceleration time 3 Acceleration time 4 Deceleration time 4 Emergency stop time Setting range Setting unit Default setting Acceleration deceleration time units Acceleration de
137. 2 13 Last Maintenance Date Operation for Communica tions Error Select whether the motor will stop or continue operating when a DeviceNet communications error occurs Note This setting is displayed for the 3G3MV only Default Setting Button Returns the Communications Unit Card internal settings except the Inverter parameters to the default values Upload Button Reads all the data set in the Edit Device Parameters Window in a batch from the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card 7 2 1 Precautions when Operating the Edit Device Parameters Win dow Download Button Writes all the data set in the Edit Device Parameters Window in a batch to the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card 7 2 1 Precautions when Operating the Edit Device Parameters Win dow Compare Button Compares the set values in the Configurator with the set values in the Unit Reset Button Performs a software reset enables the set values written to the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card 7 2 1 Precautions when Operating the Edit Device Parameters Win dow OK Button Saves all the data set in the Edit Device Parameters Window and closes the Window Cancel Button 7 48 Cancels the changes made to settings in the Edit Device Parameters Window and closes the Window Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 3 2 OUT Tab Page Use the OUT Tab Page to make settings for multi function outputs Parameter
138. 2 to 39 is set in this parameter the r min unit is used When the factory setting O is used the x0 01 Hz is used as the unit 7 62 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 5 Maintenance Information Window 7 5 1 General Tab Page Maintenance Information x General Jour IN Inverter Comment Motor Name Last Maintenance Date Unit Conduction Time Fan Conduction Time Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time Average Electric Power Average of 10min Operation Time Warning Torque Current Trace Error History 3G3MV PDRT2 SYSTEM UNIT No1 M12 2003 01 03 87 Hours 12 Hours 12 Hours Ow Network Power Voltage Network Power Voltage Peak Pr MEE ESN Unt Martener metelelelel Inverter Save Maintenance Counter Details Displays the name of the mounted Inverter Unit status report area Reference Comment Displays the name of the device 7 2 10 Unit Comment Motor Name Displays the motor name 7 2 11 Connected Device Comment Last Maintenance Date Displays the last date that maintenance was performed 7 2 13 Last Maintenance Date Unit Conduction Time Displays the operating time of the Inverter s Main Unit Fan Conduction Time Displays the operating time of the fan Note This setting can be cleared to zero by clicking the Clear Button at the right of the item Electrolytic Capacitor Conduc tion Time
139. 3G3RV High function General purpose 1532 Inverters User s Manual SYSDRIVE 3G3FV High function General purpose 1516 Inverters User s Manual Note Refer to the user s manual for the Inverter for information on Inverter operation DeviceNet Manuals Name Cat No DeviceNet Operation Manual W267 DeviceNet Configurator Operation Manual Version 2 W382 CS1 CJ1 DeviceNet Unit Operation Manual W380 DeviceNet DRT2 Series Slave Operation Manual W404 Note Refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual for details on the DeviceNet network Table of Contents Chapter 1 Functions and System Configuration 1 1 ed BUTIGHIONS 22 2 2d eects fare 8a sue a cael Bie A aia Sa ee EER a ta le kaien 1 2 1 2 Overview of Smart Slave Functions 0 0 0 0000 ccc cece teens 1 5 1 3 Comparison to Earlier Models 0 00 eee eee eee ae 1 8 1 4 DeviceNet F atures conde darms dad dl seia od Mh hd ah he oo be et 1 11 1 5 DeviceNet System Configuration avanvanrvra vara ra cece eee 1 13 Chapter 2 Example System Startup cceeeceeeeee 2 1 2 1 Basic Procedures and Configuration Examples 0 0 0 c eee eee eee eee 2 2 2 2 Preparations n vand aed g Ree aan T ER RA OS OE IE WE AED OR ER SE 2 4 2 3 Setting and Wiring Hardware 0 2 cent ene 2 6 2 4 Starting Communications 0 0 02 ee 2 10 2 5 Checking Operation 24 ecco g te he hae E
140. 4 hex Basic remote I O input 20 04 24 14 30 03 15 hex Standard remote I O 20 04 24 15 30 03 Instance 02 input default setting 64 hex Special remote I O input 20 04 24 64 30 03 65 hex Control I O remote I O 20 04 24 65 30 03 input No remote I O function set Instance 03 and Instance 04 default setting 10 2 6 Input Terminal Control Objects Class 08 Hex Support Service Code Service code number hex Service 05 Reset return to initial status OE Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single 10 11 Appendices m Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Content Indicates the software revision of Class 08 The revision value increases when changes have been made Setting range Default Max Instance Indicates the number of input terminals Depends on the Inverter being used 01 to 08 Value one per Terminal status 00 OFF 01 ON terminal Lifetime mode selection Maintenance count method 00 Conduction time 01 Number of ON operations Lifetime present value Present value of the mainte nance count Lifetime monitor flag Maintenance count compari son result ON when PV threshold lt 0 00 OFF 01 ON Lifetime thresh old setting 10 2 7 Class 09 Hex Support Service Code Lifetime monitor value Set the cumulative time that the input is ON s or the nu
141. 422 485 communications Multi fun analog input 0 to 10 V Multi fun analog input to 20 mA Optional DeviceNet unit Help Used to set the input method for the Default Digital Operator Frequency reference in remote mode Default value of the selected A zj parameter Default Setup Details of the selected parameter Click this button to return the set value of the selected parameter to the default value m Setting Method 2 Individual Parameters Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window 1 Click the Individual Parameters Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window Edit Device Parameters Individual Parameters Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window General OUT IN Operation Time Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters Instance No lz Attribute No eo Value po Result E Read Write Vv Refer to your manual for instance numbers attribute numbers and settings These depend on the Inverter being used 2 Set the Instance and Attribute of the parameter to be set in the nstance No and Attribute No fields Note Refer to the following sections for details on Instance Attribute settings e 3G3MV 10 4 3G3MV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes e 3G3RV 10 5 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes e 3G3PV 10 6 3G3PV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes e 3G3FV 10
142. 50 200 Slip compensation selection during 0 1 0 regeneration Output voltage limit operation selection 0 1 0 Torque compensation gain 0 00 to 2 50 Torque compensation primary delay 0 to time constant 10000 Starting torque value forward See 0 0 to note 4 200 0 Starting torque value reverse See 200 0 to note 4 0 0 Starting torque time constant See note 0 to 200 4 10 53 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute ASR proportional P gain 1 0 00 to 300 00 ASR integral I time 1 0 000 to 10 000 ASR proportional P gain 2 0 00 to 300 00 ASR integral I time 2 0 000 to 10 000 ASR limit 0 0 to 20 0 CT VT selection 0 1 1 Carrier frequency selection OtoF Depends on capacity Carrier frequency upper limit 2 0 to Depends 15 0 on See capacity note 2 and 3 Carrier frequency lower limit 0 4 to Depends 15 0 on See capacity note 2 and 3 Carrier frequency proportional gain 00 to 99 00 See note 3 Note 1 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The V f control default setting is given above Note 2 The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter Note 3 These parameters can be monitored or set o
143. 58888 14888888 Unit Gonduction Time Fan Conduction Time Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time Average Electric Power Calculation Cycle 10min v Vv 110 250V Hours 0 429496729 Hours Hours 0 429496729 Hours Hours 0 429496729 Hours Default Connection Path Last Maintenance Date Stop Default Setting Upload Download Compare Standard 1 O 2003 01 03 v Operation for Communication Error C Continue Reset Cancel Comment Details Set the name of the device Reference 7 2 10 Unit Comment Motor Name Set the name of the motor 7 2 11 Connected Device Com ment Network Power Voltage Set the monitor value for the network power supply voltage 7 2 9 Network Power Supply Volt age Monitor Unit Conduction Time Set the monitor value for the Inverter s operating time Fan Conduction Time Set the monitor value for the fan s operating time Electrolytic Capacitor Con duction Time Set the monitor value for the electrolytic capacitor s operating time 7 2 8 Conduction Time Monitor Average Electric Power Cal culation Cycle Set the average power cycle 7 2 2 Average Power Monitor Function Default Connection Path Set the type of remote I O used 5 1 2 Selecting the Remote I O Function Last Maintenance Date Select the date that maintenance was last performed from the calendar 7
144. 8D Fault cumu lative opera tion time Monitors U2 14 1 hr units 008D Fault cumu lative opera tion time Monitors U2 14 1 hr units 0090 0800 Content of last fault Monitors U3 01 Same codes as U2 01 0091 0801 Content of 2nd prior fault Monitors U3 02 Same codes as U2 01 0092 0802 Content of ard prior fault Monitors U3 03 Same codes as U2 01 0093 0803 Content of 4th prior fault Monitors U3 04 Same codes as U2 01 0094 080A Cumulative operation time since last fault Monitors U3 05 1 hr units 0095 080B Cumulative operation time since 2nd prior fault Monitors U3 06 1 hr units 0096 080C Cumulative operation time since 3rd prior fault Monitors U3 07 1 hr units 0097 080D Cumulative operation time since 4th prior fault Monitors U3 08 1 hr units Content of 5th prior fault Monitors U3 09 same codes as U2 01 See note Content of 6th prior fault Monitors U3 10 same codes as U2 01 See note Content of 7th prior fault Monitors U3 11 same codes as U2 01 See note Content of 8th prior fault Monitors U3 12 same codes as U2 01 See note Content of 9th prior fault Monitors U3 13 same codes as U2 01 See note 10 71 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 Register No Contents In At Hex stance tribute Content of Monitors U3 14 same code
145. 9 Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bit 7 to Not used 15 Fan operating time Monitors U1 40 1 hr units Current fault Monitors U2 01 Code Error dis play 01 PUF OE 02 UV1 OF RR 1D 03 UV2 10 RH 1E 04 UV3 11 EF3 1F 06 GF 12 EF4 20 07 OC 13 EF5 22 08 OV 14 EF6 25 09 OH 15 EF7 27 OA OH1 18 OS 28 0B OL1 19 DEV 29 OG OL2 1A PGO 2A oD OL3 1B PF 2B Last fault Monitors U2 02 same codes as U2 01 Fault fre quency refer ence Monitors U2 03 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Fault output reference Monitors U2 04 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Fault output current Monitors U2 05 0 1 A units 10 48 Fault motor speed Monitors U2 06 0 01 Hz units units set in 01 03 with sign Appendices Class 64 Instance Attribute Register number hex Fault output voltage refer ence Chapter 10 Content Monitors U2 07 0 1 V units Fault main cir cuit DC volt age Monitors U2 08 1 V units 0088 Fault output power Monitors U2 09 0 1 kW units with sign 0089 Fault torque reference Monitors U2 10 0 1 units 100 motor s rated torque with sign 008A Fault input
146. 9 e Remote I O Allocation Areas I O classification Word address Output Register number leftmost bits Function code 10 Write 03 PLC to 3G3MV Read Inverter Register data leftmost bits Register number rightmost bits Not used Register data rightmost bits Input Register number leftmost bits Function code 10 Write 03 3G3MV Inverter to Read PLC Register data leftmost bits Register number rightmost bits Not used Register data rightmost bits m Timing Chart 000000 Program Start Input Bit EE p 000001 Program End Input Bit or 003110 Communications Error Flag 000002 Program Execution Flag 000100 Frequency Reference Write Flag 000101 Control Input Write Flag l 000102 Output Frequency Read Flag l 000103 Inverter Status Read Flag ME 000300 Control Input Write i Completed Flag l 000301 Frequency Reference Write l Completed Flag i l 000302 Output Frequency oa 2 ee Completed Flag i i i 000303 Inverter Status Read Completed Flag i i i i 000004 Inverter Stop Command i Flag i i i 9 15 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Operation 1 When the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON the Program Execution Input Bit will be set to self holding and the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be turned ON When the Frequency Refer ence Write Flag is ON the frequency r
147. 9 Hours Average Electric Power Calculation Cycle 10min Default Connection Path Standard I O zi Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 7 r Operation for Communication Error Stop Continue Default Setting Upload Download Compare 7 36 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Monitoring Methods e Using the Monitor Device Window Click the General Tab in the Monitor Device Window e The voltage values are displayed in the Network Power Voltage Network Power Voltage Peak and Network Power Voltage Bottom fields e The ON OFF status of the Network Power Voltage Drop Flag can be checked in the Unit status report area When the flag is ON the Network Power Voltage Drop check box is selected Monitor Device x General Tab Page in the General Jour IN Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters Monitor Device Window Inverter 3G3MV PDRT2 Comment SYSTEM UNIT No1 Motor Name M12 Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 Unit Conduction Time 90 Hours Fan Conduction Time 14 Hours Clear Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time 14 Hours Clear Average Electric Power Average of 10min 30 w Network Power Voltage 20 4 V Network Power Voltage Peak 205 V The maximum and minimum values Network Power Voltage Bottom 202 V can be cleared IV Unit Maintenance IT Warnine IV Fan Maintenance IT Error gt IV Electrolytic Capacitor Maintenance IV Networ
148. Accel Decel Peak Torque Displays the maximum current level during acceleration deceleration Note The value can be cleared to zero by clicking the Clear Peak Value Button on the right side of the window Warning Torque during Accel Decel Displays this item as selected when the current level exceeds the threshold monitor value during acceleration deceleration Torque Current during Fre quency Agree Displays the current level during frequency agreement Note The present value is displayed during frequency agreement and the most recent value is displayed during acceleration deceleration Peak Torque during Fre quency Agree Displays the maximum current level during frequency agreement Note The value can be cleared to zero by clicking the Clear Peak Value Button on the right side of the window Warning Torque during Frequency Agree Displays this item as selected when the current level exceeds the threshold monitor value during frequency agreement Clear Error Flag Button Clears the Warning Torque Detection Flag in the Unit s Status Area Note This button is enabled when the Status field is selected on the Warning Torque Tab Page of the Edit Device Parameters Window 7 15 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 e Using the Maintenance Information Window Click the Warning Torque Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window and set each setting item Note The differences between the Warning T
149. Cat No 1539 EN1 01 OMRON USER S MANUAL DeviceNet Communications Unit MODEL 3G3MV PDRT2 For SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Multi function Compact Inverters DeviceNet Communications Card MODEL 3G3RV PDRT2 For SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and 3G3FV High function General purpose Inverters Thank you for choosing a 3G3MV 3G3RV Series Inverter and DeviceNet Communi cations Unit This manual describes the specifications and operating methods of the DeviceNet Communications Unit used for exchanging data between an Inverter and a Programmable Controller Specifically it describes the operation methods commu nications methods and data setting methods of the 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Com munications Unit and 3G3RV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card Proper use and handling of the product will help ensure proper product performance will lengthen product life and may prevent possible accidents Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product with care For details about the 3G3MV Inverter and DeviceNet communications system refer to the following reference manuals Inverter Manuals DeviceNet Manuals NOTICE 1 This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other products You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible 2 PLC in this manual refers to the SYSMAC CS CJ series C200HX HG HE and CV series Programmable Controllers that can be connected to a DeviceNet System C200HS
150. Communications Chapter 6 6 2 Sending Messages from an OMRON PLC This section explains how to send and receive messages using a CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 DeviceNet Unit Using CMND 490 With a CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 DeviceNet Unit CMND 490 is used to send explicit mes sages To send an explicit message it is necessary to place FINS command 2801 in front and to send the command to the Master Unit The Master Unit that receives the command converts the command data to an explicit message and transfers it to the destination node When sending an explicit message it is not possible to directly specify the destination node with CMND 490 1 CMND 490 e S Beginning Command Storage Word Specify the beginning word address for the command data transferred to the DeviceNet Master Unit Preset the data to be transferred in consecutive words as shown in the following table Word address S Command data Set explicit message FINS command 2801 S 1 Node of Slave or Master for transmission Explicit message service code Address 0 to 3F hex 0 to 63 Write 10 Read 0E S 2 Class ID code Set DeviceNet class code for relevant function Set within 0001 to 002A or 0064 hex with Inverter s DeviceNet Communications Unit S 3 Instance ID code Set DeviceNet instance code for relevant function S 4 Attribute ID code Attached data for writing Set DeviceNet attribute code for re
151. D02001 MOV 021 Class ID 0029 D02002 MOV 021 Instance ID 0001 D02003 MOV 021 Attribute ID 0D00 D02004 Sets CMND data 9 7 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 Communications 000000 Enabled Flag 000000 003002 003003 A20200 Network C 003003 ASL 025 151100 0000 Online Flag CMND 490 D02000 A20200 A21900 D03000 Communeatons canmunications D01000 000001 Enabled Flag Error Flag ASR 026 A21900 0000 Network ommunications Error Flag H ASL 025 0000 151100 000002 Online Flag CMP 020 A20200 0000 Per anion D03001 Enabled Flag H MOV 021 Equals Flag D03001 P_EQ D00100 ASR 026 0000 ASR 026 0000 MOV 021 Equals Flag D03004 P_EQ D00200 MOV 021 40000 0000 0 003002 9 8 END 001 Executes CMND instruction Confirms execution of CMND instruction The completion code examined If an error is found the command is re executed If the command is executed normally the data is stored in D00200 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 9 2 2 Reading Writing Data This programming example writes and reads data using explicit messages Explicit messages can be executed by specifying FINS commands
152. DRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card For 3G3RV 3G3PV and 3G3FV Inverters v 64 nodes max including the Master Unit Slave Slave Slave Configurator ae 64 nodes max including the Master Unit Note 1 The DeviceNet Master Unit and Configurator each occupy one node of the DeviceNet Net work Note 2 If C200HS PLCs are used only remote I O communications are possible Note 3 The maximum number of nodes that can be connected to the Network will be limited by the maximum number of control points of the PLC used 1 14 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 1 5 2 Configurator Overview The Configurator is a software application run on an IBM PC AT or compatible computer and is used to support a DeviceNet communications system Connection to the Network is achieved either via a serial communications port peripheral bus or Host Link or by connecting the computer directly to the DeviceNet using a hardware interface The Configurator occupies one node on the DeviceNet Network but has no specific functions on the network itself The Configurator provides the following functions e Free Allocation of Remote I O The remote I O allocations in the PLCs can be changed from the Configurator I O can be flexibly allo cated for each node within the specified I O areas e More than One DeviceNet Master Unit per Network Slaves
153. DeviceNet so they are not set Motor code set value differs with capacity Open input phase detection level Can be set to 5 5 kW 7 5 kW only Open input phase detection time Open output phase detection level Open output phase detection time 7 45 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Parameter Class 64 Details Instance Attribute Parameter copy and verify function selection read only Fault log Note When the 3G3MV is used all parameters can be set from the Configurator e 3G3RV 3G3PV Parameter Groups Parameter group Details All Parameters A Initialize Mode Parameters A Environment settings B Application Parameters B Application C Tuning Parameters C Tuning D Reference Parameters D Reference E F H L E Motor Constant Parameters Motor constant F Option Parameters Option H Terminal Function Parameters Terminal function setting L Protection Function Parameters Protection function N Special Adjustments N Special adjustments O Digital Operator Parameters O Operator Enter Code Enter code Monitor Speed reference speed monitor current moni tor output voltage Parameters that Cannot be Set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page Use the Individual Parameters Tab Page Parameter Class 64 Details Instance Attribute 00 Language selection for Digital Operator display 0
154. DeviceNet Communications Unit Card has 2 operation indicators that show the status of the power and communications Indicator Display Meaning Countermeasures Color Status Lit The Unit is operating normally Flashing Initial settings or necessary prepara Turn ON the Inverter power supply tions for communications are incom again plete e Replace the Option Unit A fatal error hardware error has e Turn ON the Inverter power supply occurred in the Unit again Replace the Option Unit Flashing A non fatal error such as a switch e Check the baud rate setting setting error has occurred e Turn ON the Inverter power supply again Replace the Option Unit Not lit Power is not being supplied from the Check the Option Unit connector Inverter and turn ON the Inverter power The Unit is not connected properly supply and power is not being to supplied to Replace the Option Unit it 8 2 Communications Errors Indicator Display Color Status Meaning The DeviceNet Network is operating normally Communications connections estab lished Chapter 8 Countermeasures Flashing The Network is normal but the com munications connection with the Master Unit is not established Turn ON the power supply again after the following steps e Register in the scan list e Set the connection path e Turn ON the power supply to the Master Unit A f
155. Fault Reset when Inverter Ready is output Attribute Content Setting range Default Object Software Indicates class 29 soft Revision ware revisions The revi sion value is advanced whenever there is a change Forward Stop 00 Stop 01 Forward operation Reverse Stop 00 Stop 01 Reverse operation Net Control 00 Operate with setting in Local remote n003 b1 02 switch 01 Operate by DeviceNet See note 1 not valid with 3G3FV State 00 hex Vendor specific Inverter status 01 hex Startup See note 1 02 hex Not Ready 03 hex ready 04 hex Enabled 05 hex Stopping 06 hex Fault Stop 07 hex Faulted During forward 00 No Inverter output or run operating in reverse 01 Forward operation or DC braking Either DC braking from reverse operation or oper ating forward During reverse 00 No Inverter output or run operating in forward 01 Operating in reverse reverse operation output status Becomes 00 with DC braking 6 10 Message Communications Instance Attribute Inverter Ready Content 00 Preparing Initial processing not drive mode fault 01 Inverter ready Inverter can receive run command Chapter 6 Default Setting range Fault 00 Normal 01 Fault Alarm minor fault 00 Normal 01 Alarm minor fault Fault Reset 00 Normal status 01 Fault reset Fault code Indicates the content
156. From Net is ON During Forward Run is OFF During Reverse Run is OFF and During Run is ON Fault Stop Operating with fault detected Alarm signal is ON Faulted Fault detected Fault signal is ON Note 2 The Net Control and Control From Net functions cannot be changed during running 6 11 Message Communications Chapter 6 Note 3 A DeviceNet Fault mode can be set from communications in the 3G3MV only it cannot be changed from communications in the 3G3RV 3G3PV or 3G3FV Set the fault mode in the Inverter s parameters e Fault Codes DeviceNet fault code Operator display Meaning Inverter normal Ground fault Short circuit Inverter overload Motor overload Overtorque detection 1 Overtorque detection 2 Overcurrent Input phase loss Output phase loss Main circuit overvoltage Undervoltage main Undervoltage MC Overheat Overheat Control power supply fault Fuse open Operator disconnection EEPROM write failure Braking transistor failure Braking resistor overheating PG is disconnected Overspeed Speed deviation Communications error External fault Terminal 3 External fault Terminal 4 External fault Terminal 5 External fault Terminal 6 External fault Terminal 7 External fault Terminal 8 Communications external fault 6 12 Message Communications Chapt
157. G3FV Inverter Slave Slave Slave 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit For 3G3MV Inverters 3G3RV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card For 3G3RV 3G3PV and 3G3FV Inverters y CS CJ series PCs 64 nodes max including the Master Unit CV series PCs 64 nodes max including the Master Unit C200HX HG HE PCs 51 nodes max including the Master Unit C200HS PCs 33 nodes max including the Master Unit TITT Note 1 The DeviceNet Master Unit occupies one node of the DeviceNet Network Note 2 If C200HS PLCs are used only remote I O communications are possible Note 3 If one node uses more than one word the maximum number of nodes will be reduced by one node for each extra word that is used The above numbers of nodes assume that each node is allocated one I O word 1 13 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 m Free Allocation Configuration with a Configurator DeviceNet Master Unit CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 C200HW DRM21 V1 CVM1 DRM21 V1 3G8F5 DRM21 E ISA Board or na lee SG8E2 DRM21 EV1 PC Card Configurator y SYSDRIVE 3G3MV al 3G3RV 3G3PV or 3G3FV Inverter Slave Slave Slave 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit For 3G3MV Inverters 3G3RV P
158. G3MV and parameter location of b1 02 for the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Note 2 Net Control is used to change the run command as follows cannot be changed while the Inverter is running 0 The run command input method specified by the run command source selection Nn003 b 1 02 is used 1 Operate by DeviceNet regardless of the setting in n003 b1 02 according to the run com mand in word n bits 0 and 1 This setting is invalid in the 3G3FV Inverters Note 3 Net Reference is used to specify the frequency reference as follows cannot be changed while the Inverter is running 0 The frequency reference input method specified by the frequency reference source selec tion N004 b1 01 is used 1 Operate by DeviceNet regardless of the setting in n004 b1 01 Operates with rotational speed reference in word n 1 This setting is invalid in the 3G3FV Inverters e Output Data Details Word address Bit Signal name Rotational speed reference data Content Communications data Rotational speed reference x 2 a Speed scale value of Class 2A Instance 01 Attribute 16 Initial value 0 Setting range 0 to the rotational speed at maximum frequency The speed scale is assigned with the message function For instructions on how to change it refer to Chapter 6 Message Communications The unit for the rotational speed reference is set in n035 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units Setting example providing reference of 1 800 r
159. Indicator Status 2 Check that data is reading and writing properly Refer to 2 5 2 Reading and Writing Data Note The examples provided in this section show the minimum settings needed to operate the sys tem If details on other settings for actual operation are required refer to the operation manual for the DeviceNet Master Unit and the operation manual s for the Slave Units Example System Startup Chapter 2 2 1 2 System Configuration Example The following diagram shows the operating procedure using a system configuration example The system configuration shown here uses Thin Cables The following diagram is simplified so it does not include the separate I O power supply that must be provided to the Output Unit or Expansion Output Unit DRT2 ID16 Remote I O Terminal 16 transistor inputs Node 01 GJ DRT2 0D16 Remote I O Terminal 16 transistor outputs Node 02 Terminating Resistor CS1W DRM21 DeviceNet Master Unit Node 63 S82K 05024 24 VDC Power Supply 100 VAC 50 W Communications power supply DRT2 0D16 Remote I O DCN1 1C Terminal 16 transistor outputs T branch Ta XWT OD08 Remote I O Terminal Expansion Unit DCN1 3C DCN1 1C 1 8 transistor outputs T branch Tap T branch Tap Node 05 LU Fe 3G3MV A2001 SYSDRIVE I
160. Jump frequency width 0 0 to 20 0 Field weakening level 0 to 100 Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute Field frequency Input voltage setting 0 0 to 400 0 Setting range 155 to 255 155 to 510 See note 1 Setting unit Default setting Changes during opera tion V f pattern selection OtoF E can not be set Max output frequency 0 0 to 120 0 Max voltage 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 See note 1 Base frequency 0 0 to 120 0 Mid output frequency 0 0 to 120 0 Mid output frequency volt age 0 0 to 255 0 0 to 510 0 See note 1 10 76 Min output frequency 0 0 to 120 0 Appendices Register Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute Min output frequency volt age Setting range 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 See note 1 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting 9 0 18 0 See note 1 Changes during opera tion Mid output frequency 2 0 0 to 120 0 0 0 See note 2 Mid output frequency volt age 2 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 See note 1 0 0 See note 2 Base voltage 0 0 to 255 0 0 0 to 510 0 See note 1 0 0 See note 3 Motor rated current 0 32 to 6 40 See note 4 De pends on ca pacity Note Note Note Note ROAN Motor
161. Parameters x General Tab Page in the Edit Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters Device Parameters Window General OUT IN Operation Time Comment SYSTEM UNIT No 1 Motor Name M12 Network Power Voltage 250 VO11 0 250 Unit Conduction Time Hours 0 429496729 Hours Fan Conduction Time Hours 0 429496729 Hours Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time Hours 0 429496729 Hours Average Electric Power Calculation Cycle 10min x Default Connection Path Standard I O v 2003 03 01 Last Maintenance Date k A IContinue 5 ab Default Setting Upload Download 23 24 25 26 30 31 Click the date on the calendar to input the date To enter today s date click Today at the bottom of the calendar m Checking Methods e Using the Monitor Device Window or Maintenance Information Window Click the General Tab in the Monitor Device Window or Maintenance Information Window The set date will be displayed in the Last Maintenance Date field 7 41 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Monitor Device xj General Tab Page in General Jour IN Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters the Monitor Device Window Inverter 3G3MV PDRT2 Comment SYSTEM UNIT No 1 Motor Name M12 Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 gt Unit Conduction Time 90 Hours Fan Conduction Time 14 Hours Clear Electrolytic Ca
162. Remarks Used to store data even after a power interruption Not writing to EEPROM ENTER command not sent Previously received param eter setting data is already validated as operating data Send ENTER command only if storing to EEPROM If there is frequent rewriting of data do not send ENTER commands each time because of the limit to the number of times EEPROM can be written Be sure to send an ENTER command once before the power sup ply is interrupted e Enabling Parameter Data in a 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Using the ENTER Command To enable parameter data that has been received send an ENTER command as shown in the follow ing table to either store or not store the parameters in EEPROM To enable a series of data for more than one transmission send only one ENTER command after sending all of the data Data type ENTER command that writes param eters to EEPROM Transmission Write 0000 as follows Class 100 decimal 64 hex Instance 255 decimal FF hex Attribute 253 hex FD hex Inverter Operation Previously received param eter setting data is stored in EEPROM Note The maximum num ber of write opera tions that can be performed to EEPROM is 100 000 Remarks Used to store data even after a power interruption ENTER command that does not write parameters to EEPROM Write 0000 as follows Class 100 decimal 64 hex Instance 255 decimal FF hex Attribute 221 he
163. Remote I O Operation for details on setting parameters with special remote I O Refer to 6 7 Reading and Writing Parameters Class 64 Hex for details on setting parameters with message communications Refer to Chapter 10 Appendices for reference data such as register numbers which are required when setting parameters The information is organized by Inverter series Comparison of Installation Specifications The installation conditions for the 3G3MV PDRT2 have changed in comparison to those for the 3G3MV PDRT1 SINV 1 Observe the following precautions when changing models e Install the Unit into a metal panel The EMC immunity of the 3G3MV PDRT2 is somewhat less than that of the 3G3MV PDRT1 SINV 1 Refer to 3 4 Conformity to EC Directives for information on electromagnetic wave coun termeasures e The installation dimension at the bottom has been increased by 7 mm 1 9 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 The 3G3MV PDRT2 is equipped with a connector for DeviceNet connection rather than a terminal block The dimension of the connector that extends below the case must be added m Inverter Software Versions Supported software versions are listed in the following table 3G3MV Series 3 7 kW and less Software version VSP010027 S0027 and higher Release date June 2003 Description Supports all functions Current trace function and warning torque detection function use increments of 0 01 A VSP
164. Reverse For function function function function function stop ward sto input 7 input6 linput5 input4 input 3 p Multi Multi Multi Fault External function function function reset fault output 2 output 1 contact input output Frequency reference rightmost byte Frequency reference leftmost byte 5 20 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverters Byte number Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Reverse For function function function function function function stop ward sto input 6 input5 input4 input3 input2 input1 p Multi Multi Multi Fault External function function function reset fault output 2 output 1 contact input output Frequency reference rightmost byte Frequency reference leftmost byte Torque reference torque limit rightmost byte Torque reference torque limit leftmost byte Torque compensation bias rightmost byte Torque compensation bias leftmost byte e Inputs Inverter to PLC Instance ID 151 Decimal 97 Hex Fault Alarm Inverter Atrefer During During Zero During minor ready ence reset reverse speed run fault input run P lock Multi Multi Multi Local re Power Opera comple function function function mote interrup tion fault tion See output 2 output 1 contact tion note 4 output recovery Output frequency mon
165. S1 CJ1 PLC This connection is possible when a CS1 CJ1 series DeviceNet Master Unit is being used Ethernet Connect from the computer s Ethernet port through a CS1 CJ1 PLC s Ethernet This connection is possible when a CS1 CJ1 series DeviceNet Master Unit is being used Relation to Network Using a dedicated interface Connect directly to DeviceNet e Operates as one node on the Network requires one node address and only one Configurator can be connected to the Network e The Configurator can be disconnected from the Network after remote I O has been allocated Using a serial or Ethernet connection e Possible only when a CS1 CJ1 series DeviceNet Master Unit is being used e A DeviceNet node address is not required Connects through the DeviceNet Master Unit A node address is not allocated so the Configurator can be connected or disconnected freely There are some limitations compared to a direct DeviceNet connection through a dedicated interface For exam ple the refreshing interval for PV monitoring is much slower that it is with a direct connection 1 5 3 DeviceNet Communications Specifications Communications protocol DeviceNet Supported connections com Remote I O munications Master Slave connection Poll Bit strobe COS or Cyclic Explicit messages Explicit connection Both conform to DeviceNet specifications Connection forms Combination of multi drop and T branch connec
166. Tab Page in the Monitor Device Window Using the Maintenance Information Window Click the General Tab in the Maintenance Information Window The present average power value will be displayed in the Average Electric Power field 7 2 3 Warning Torque Detection Functions e This function can detect equipment errors by monitoring the output current e Problems in the load can be detected in the Inverter s current torque level The function provides advanced warning of an increased load caused by deterioration in the mechanical system such as a loose chain low bearing oil or worn out equipment so preventative maintenance can be per formed e The monitor values can be set for the output current level during acceleration and deceleration and during frequency agreement while operating at constant speed e When the detected output current is greater than or equal to the monitor value a warning torque is detected e When a warning torque is detected the Warning Torque Detection Flag in the Units Status Area turns ON Flags in the Unit s Status Area can also be checked from the Configurator Note This function generates a warning alarm so operation continues 7 12 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Application Example Programmable Controller DeviceNet Master Unit Load error warning alarm DeviceNet Inverter i Bearing Curren
167. The Inverter s operating time is less than the preset threshold voltage operating time lt threshold value Fault The Inverter s operating time is greater than or equal to the preset thresh old voltage operating time gt threshold value Cooling fan electro lytic capacitor mainte nance flag Normal The operating time of either the fan or the electrolytic capacitor is less than the preset threshold voltage operating time lt threshold value Fault The operating time of either the fan or the electrolytic capacitor is greater than or equal to the preset threshold voltage operating time gt threshold value Warning torque detected flag Normal The output torque is less than the preset threshold voltage output cur rent lt threshold value Fault The output torque is greater than or equal to the preset threshold voltage output current gt threshold value Operation time over flag Normal The operating time is less than the preset threshold voltage operating time lt threshold value Fault The operating time is greater than or equal to the preset threshold volt age operating time gt threshold value Connected compo nent maintenance flag Normal The value monitored by the cumulative ON time monitor function or number of contact operations monitor function is less than the preset threshold voltage maintenance counter lt threshold
168. Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time O1 Out Point 2 Time 10000 Clear 02 Out Point 3 Time 0 Clear Edit Core IL Double click the selected field or click the Edit Button Edit Device Parameters Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General UT IN Operation Time o0 Out Point 1 VO Comment Detection Mode Time C Count 4 0 4294967295 Times Value J444 0 4294967295 Seconds Fault Action Clear f Hold Edit me Details Reference No The settings in the No field are as follows 00 Multi function contact output 01 Multi function output 1 02 Multi function output 2 I O Comment Set a user defined name for each terminal 7 2 11 Connected Device Comment Detection Mode Set the detection mode to either Cumulative ON Time or Contact 7 2 6 Cumulative ON Time Operations Counter Monitor Note When the setting is made in the setting window the setting 7 2 7 Contact Operations will be displayed in the Detection Mode field Monitor Value Set the monitor value time or count Note When the setting is made in the setting window the setting will be displayed in the Value field Fault Action Set the status of the output terminal when communications error occurs Note When the setting is made in the setting window the setting will be displayed in the Fault Acti
169. Unit 63 63 63 Maximum number of controlled points per DeviceNet Master Unit 1 20 6 400 100 words x 4 blocks Without messages 4 800 With messages 1 600 1 280 total of 4 blocks Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Applicable PLC Allocation areas CVM1 CV Series CS Series and C200HS C200HX HG HE Core I O Area IR Area 1 IR 000 to IR 235 CIO 0000 to CIO 2555 IR Area 2 IR 300 to IR 511 CIO 0000 to CIO 2427 for CV500 CVM1 CPU01 VL CPU Bus Link Area CS1 HR Area G008 to G255 HR HO00 to H099 HR 00 to HR 99 CIO 1000 to 1063 LR Area C200HX HG HE LR 00 to LR 63 HR Area HR 00 to HR 99 LR Area LR 00 to LR 63 DM Area CS1 DM Area D00000 to D24575 DM D00000 to D05999 DM 0000 to DM 5999 D00000 to D08191 for C200HX HG HE CV500 CVM1 CPUO1 DM DM 0000 to DM VO 5999 DM 0000 to DM 4095 for C200HE CPU11 Z E Allocation method Words are allocated to each node in the above data areas in any order using the Configurator The following limitations apply e The allocation areas are in 4 blocks OUT 1 OUT 2 IN 1 and IN 2 Each block consists of sequential words e 100 words max per block e For Slaves with more than 8 points the first byte cannot be specified in leftmost bits 7 to 15 Words are allocated to Slaves as follows e 8 point Slaves Allocated leftmost or rightmost byte of 1 word e 16 po
170. Unit and secure them by tightening the screw in the center 10 Attach the MS and NS stickers on the provided sheet of DeviceNet indicators labels over the RUN and ALARM labels on the front cover The LED indicator functions have changed from RUN to MS and from ALARM to NS m Connecting Communications Cables This section explains how to prepare and connect the communications cables to connectors for the DeviceNet Network Use the following procedure to prepare and connect the communications cables to the connectors Note For connecting of the DeviceNet Communications Unit of the Inverter use DCA1 5C10 Thin Cables Thick Cables cannot be used for this kind of wiring because of the terminal block dimensions 1 Remove about 30 mm of the cable covering being careful not to damage the shield weaving un derneath Do not remove more than about 30 mm removing too much of the covering can result in short circuits Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 Approx 30 mm 2 Carefully peel back the weaving to reveal the signal lines power lines and the shielding wire The shielding wire will be loose on the outside of the other lines but it is harder than the weaving 3 Remove the exposed weaving and the aluminum tape from the signal and power lines Strip the covering from the signal and power lines to the proper length for the crimp terminals Twist together the wires of each of the signal and power lines Strip to match the crimp terminals
171. a allocations for this Chapter s example system configuration when fixed I O allocation is used for remote I O communications Word OUT Area Word IN Area Fixed allocation 3200 Not used 3300 Not used Node 0 3201 Not used 3301 DRT2 ID16 node 1 Node 1 3202 DRT2 OD16 node 2 3302 Not used Node 2 3203 3G3MV PDRT2 3303 3G3MV PDRT2 Node 3 3204 node 3 3304 node 3 Node 4 3205 DRT2 OD16 node 5 3304 Not used Node 5 3206 Not used XWT OD08 3304 Not used Node 6 3207 Not used 3304 Not used Node 7 3208 Not used 3304 Not used Node 8 3209 Not used 3304 Not used Node 9 When shipped the Inverter s default communications setting is Standard Remote I O so the follow ing functions are allocated to the node 3 Inverter e Outputs PLC to Inverter Byte number Wd 3203 Right O Net Ref Net Con Fault Reverse Forward most erence trol Reset stop stop Left 1 most Wd 3204 Right 2 Rotational speed reference rightmost data most Left 3 Rotational speed reference leftmost data most e Inputs Inverter to PLC Byte number At Refer Refer Control Inverter During During Alarm ence ence From Net Ready reverse forward minor From Net run run fault Rotational speed monitor rightmost data Rotational speed monitor leftmost data Note A shaded box indi
172. able Controller Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product OMRON 2003 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is con stantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication General Precautions The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems railroad systems aviation systems vehicles combustion sys tems medical equipment amusement machines safety equipment and other systems machines and equipm
173. ads the Warning Torque Monitor Flags First two bytes Number of bytes in the rest of the array 0001 Data byte Bit 0 Warning torque dur ing acceleration decelera tion Bit 1 Warning torque dur ing frequency coincidence The corresponding flag is set to 1 when the warn ing torque is detected 0001 00 Detail Info 3 Reads the Operating Time Monitor Flags First two bytes Number of bytes in the rest of the array 0001 Data byte Bit 0 Instance 01 Bit 1 Instance 02 Bit 2 Instance 03 Bit 3 Instance 04 Bit 4 Instance 05 Bit 5 Instance 06 A flag will be set to 1 when Class 97 Attribute 66 for the corresponding Instance equals 01 0001 00 10 23 Appendices Chapter 10 Instance Attribute Name Content Setting range Default Read Write Size Detail Info 4 Reads the Lifetime Moni tor Flags First two bytes Number of bytes in the rest of the array 0003 Data byte 1 Input Termi nal Lifetime Flags Bit 0 Instance 01 Bit 1 Instance 02 Bit 2 Instance 03 Bit 3 Instance 04 Bit 4 Instance 05 Bit 5 Instance 06 A flag will be set to 1 when Class 08 Attribute 67 for the corresponding Instance equals 01 Data byte 2 Reserved 00 Data byte 3 Output Termi nal Lifetime Flags Bit 0 Instance 01 Bit 1 Instance 02 Bit 2 Instance 03 A flag will be set to 1 when Class 09 Attribute 67 f
174. alog output termi nal 23 monitor selection Note 3 The Inverter s multi function outputs can be turned from ON to OFF by means of communi cations To do that set F for multi function output parameters H2 01 multi function contact output terminals 9 10 function selection H2 02 multi function output 1 terminal 25 func tion selection and H2 03 multi function output 2 terminal 26 function selection 10 7 2 Inverter Monitoring Functions All Inverter monitoring can be accessed To read Inverter status fault monitoring alarm monitoring I O status monitoring error log etc specify the register number from the following table and read the data Class 64 Register Function Content Instance Attribute Number hex 0010 Inverter status Refer to table below 0011 Operator status Refer to table below 0012 Operator setting error OPE error number number 0013 Not used 0014 Fault 1 0015 Fault 2 Refer to table below 0016 Fault 3 Refer to table below 0017 CPF error 1 Refer to table below Refer to table below 0018 CPF error 2 Refer to table below 0019 Alarm 1 Refer to table below 001A Alarm 2 Refer to table below 001B to 001F Not used Content During Run Zero speed Forward reverse 1 Reverse operation during Fault Reset input Frequency agree 1 Inverter operation ready Alarm Fault Not used 10 84
175. ameters Window Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time Comment SYSTEM UNIT No 1 Motor Name M12 ee Network Power Voltage 110 W 11 0 250V Unit Conduction Time Hours 0 429496729 Hours Fan Conduction Time 0 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time 0 Hours lt 0 429496729 Hours gt Average Electric Power Calculation Cycle 10min be T min Default Connection Path pe Thour Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 he Operation for Communication Error fe Stop C Continue Default Setting Upload Download Compare 7 11 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 s Monitoring Methods e Using the Monitor Device Window Click the General Tab in the Monitor Device Window The present average power value will be dis played for the Average Electric Power Monitor Device General Jour IN Inverter Comment Motor Name Last Maintenance Date Unit Conduction Time Fan Conduction Time Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time Average Electric Power Average of 10min Network Power Voltage Network Power Voltage Peak Network Power Voltage Bottom Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters 3G3MV PDRT2 SYSTEM UNIT No 1 M12 2003 01 03 88 Hours 12 Hours 12 Hours Clear Clear Ow 204 V Clear 205 V 202 V Clear General
176. amming example given here reads and stores the fault data using explicit messages for fault outputs from the Inverter If the Inverter has a fault the remote I O input s Fault Bit word m bit 0 will turn ON Be sure to turn OFF the Run Command Bits word n bits 0 and 1 In this program example the fault code is stored in D00200 If commands are interrupted by faults store the completion code in the DM Area and re execute the command When a fault occurs check the contents of the fault and take countermeasures referring to information provided in the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Multi function Compact Inverter User s Manual 1527 us Allocations Bit 003000 lt Fault Flag Bit 000000 lt Fault Code Read Flag Bit 000001 lt CMND Write Completed Flag Fla Bit 000002 lt Response Flag 9 Bit 003003 lt Sending Message Flag Bit 003002 lt Message Sent Flag Bit 000100 lt Reset Input Bit D00000 lt Slave node address 3G3MV Inverter hex Response data storage area DO3000 lt Command code 2801 D03001 lt Completion code D03002 lt No of received data bytes Node address and service code 8E D03003 Read normal 94 Error D03004 lt Read data or error code D00100 lt Completion code storage for communications errors D00200 lt Fault code storage for Inverter faults 9 5 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapte
177. ampled Note The trace will also stop if the Cancel Button is clicked during the trace Recorded trace data I gt Time A Start Trigger Button ON Trace start trigger signal ON Trace stop 150 points sampled Middle Trigger When this button is clicked the trace starts When the signals selected in the Trigger field are turned ON 75 points are sampled and then the trace stops Note 1 When the trigger signal is ON the 75 points before the trigger and the 75 points after the trigger are recorded Note 2 The trace also stops when the Cancel Button is clicked Recorded trace data l gt Time A A Trace start Middle Trigger Trigger Trace stop 75 points Button ON signal ON sampled End Trigger When this button is clicked the trace starts When the signals selected in the Trigger field are turned ON the trace stops Note 1 The 150 points from immediately before the trigger signal turns ON are recorded Note 2 The trace also stops when the Cancel Button is clicked Recorded trace data l Time A Trace start End Trigger Trace stop Button ON Trigger signal ON 7 19 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Monitor Methods The trace data can be checked on the History Tab Page and Graph Tab Page e History Tab Page General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Current Trace Error History Current Trace Tab Page and History Tab Page in the Maintenance Informatio
178. ance At tribute Register No Hex Reserved Contents Frequency reference Bit 0 Run stop command 1 Run 0 Stop Bit 1 Reverse stop command 1 Reverse 0 Stop Bit 2 Multi function input command 3 Bit 3 Multi function input command 4 Bit 4 Multi function input command 5 Bit 5 Multi function input command 6 Bit 6 Multi function input command 7 Bit 7 Not used Bit 8 External error 1 Error EFO Bit 9 Error reset 1 Reset command Bits 10 to 15 Not used 0002 Frequency reference Set units using parameter 01 03 0003 to 0005 Not used 0006 PID target value 0007 Analog output 1 setting 11 V 726 Dec to 11 V 726 Dec 0008 Not used 0009 Multi function contact output setting Bit 0 Contact output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Contact output terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 2 to 5 Not used Bit 6 Set error contact terminal MA MC output using bit 7 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 1 ON 0 OFF Error contact terminal MA MC Bits 8 to 15 Not used 000A to 000E Not used 000F Note Set all unused bits to 0 Reference sel ection settings Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 PID target value register 0006H 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Bits 2 to 15 Not used 10 65 Appendices Chapter 10 10 6 2 Invert
179. and rated voltage can be set and read Support Service Code Service code number he Servise OE Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single 10 13 Appendices m Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Content Indicates class 28 soft ware revisions The revi sion value is advanced whenever there is a change Setting range Default Motor Type Indicates the type of motor to be used The setting for a squirrel cage inductive motor is 7 Motor Rated Current The motor s rated current can be set and read The setting unit is 0 1 A The Inverter rated output current 10 to 120 See note Chapter 10 setting unit can be changed using the cur rent scale in Class 2A Instance 1 Attribute 17 The motor s rated voltage 0 to 255 V can be set and read The 0 to 510 V setting unit is 1 V The See note 2 setting unit can be changed using the voltage scale in Class 2A Instance 1 Attribute 1B 00C8 0190 See note 2 Motor Rated Voltage Note 1 The default setting for the motor s rated current depends on the Inverter model Example 1 90A 0013 hex for 200 V class 0 4 kW Note 2 The figures enclosed in parentheses in the Setting range and Default columns are the values for 400 V class Inverters 10 2 9 Control Supervisor Objects Class 29 Hex Control supervisor objects are objects that ha
180. art 001000 Program Start Input Bit A 001001 l E 000000 Message Execution Flag 003000 i DA Sending Message Flag i j 1 003001 l Message Sent Flag CMND instruction execution ST _ Ty i 000001 CMND Write Completed Flag 000002 Response Flag LT TT a eee ae Message Communications i l Enabled Flag T l Completion code error Completion code D00100 t f t Completion code storage 1 2 3 Operation 1 When the Program Start Input Bit is turned ON the Message Execution Flag will turn ON and the command specified in the DM Area will be sent using the CMND instruction 2 When the Message Communications Enabled Flag is turned ON the completion code D03001 is examined If an error is found the completion code is stored in D00100 and the command is re executed 3 If the completion code of the response is normal the Message Sent Flag will be turned ON and the Sending Message Flag will be turned OFF m Network Configuration This program is based on the following conditions Master unit number 0 Master node address 63 Fixed allocation area setting 1 Network Communications Enabled Flag A20200 Online Flag 151100 Network Communications Error Flag A21900 9 10 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Ladder Program 001000 001001 DIFU 013 001001 001001 BSET 071 0000 D00200
181. at have a short maximum network length power can be supplied to all nodes by using one communications power supply Various conditions constraints and measures affect how the communications power is supplied In the examples shown here the power is supplied from one communications power supply and com munications cables are connected using T branch Taps For details on methods of supplying communications power refer to the DeviceNet Operation Man ual W267 Note Use the OMRON Connectors shown below when using Thick Cables and multi drop connec tions for wiring XW4B 05C4 TF D and XW4G 05C4 TF D Both are made by OMRON and have securing screws XW4B 05C4 TF D With set screws Example System Startup Chapter 2 2 3 Setting and Wiring Hardware Use the following procedures to mount set and wire the hardware 2 3 1 Mounting and Setting the DeviceNet Master Unit m Settings The components functions and switch settings for the CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 DeviceNet Master Unit mounted to a CS CJ series PLC are shown as an example in the following diagram For information on switch settings refer to the operation manual for the DeviceNet Master Unit m CS1W DRM21 Indicators Unit No switch This rotary switch sets the single digit hexadecimal unit number of the Master on the DeviceNet network Node address switches DRO These rotary switches set the double digit decimal DR1 lesTP node address of t
182. atal communications error has occurred A DeviceNet communications error was detected caused by node address duplication or Bus OFF These errors make communications impossible Turn ON the power supply again after the following steps e Correct node address duplication e Connect termination resistance to both ends of the communications line e Correct communications line con nection problem e Correct the Master Unit errors that occur when the Master Unit stops after communications is once established e Correct environmental such as noise conditions Flashing A non fatal communications error has occurred due to communications tim eout Turn ON the power supply again after the following processing e Connect termination resistance to both ends of the communications line e Correct defective connections in the communications line e Correct environmental such as noise conditions Not lit A DeviceNet Network error has occurred For example the Network does not exist power is not supplied to the Unit or the baud rates do not match e Check the baud rate setting e Check the Option Unit connector and turn ON the Inverter power supply Replace the Option Unit Note For communications line problems detailed error codes will be displayed on the indicators of the Master Unit Check the error code and take appropriate countermeasures according to the descriptions i
183. atibility e Special Remote I O These functions provide compatibility with earlier models 83G3MV PDRT1 SINV1 and 3G3FV PDRT1 SINV1 e Control I O Remote I O These remote I O functions support the functions and arrays that control the I O signals of SYSDRIVE Inverters These are proprietary OMRON functions and are not part of the DeviceNet specifications e Unit Status These 16 bits of data a proprietary OMRON function include information on the In verter s fault code and the status of the monitoring functions We recommend using this remote I O function with the COS communications method e Multi function Input Monitor This information is the result of a logical OR between the Inverter s ter minal block and the control I O remote I O s multi function input signals This function can be used to monitor references to the various Inverter functions Also if a terminal block signal is set not to function in the Inverter s parameters the Inverter s terminal block can be used for sensor inputs to the ladder program Message Communications Inverter control and monitoring are possible with DeviceNet explicit messages Messages conforming to the DeviceNet AC DC driver specifications can be used The Parameter Read message Class 64 which is a special OMRON function can be used to read the current value register in the Inverter Message communications operate independently of the remote I O functions so message communicat
184. ation Cycle 10min x Default Connection Path Standard I O x Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 7 ea for Communication Error Stop C Continue Default Setting Upload Download Compare m Checking Methods e Using the Monitor Device Window or Maintenance Information Window Click the General Tab in the Monitor Device Window or Maintenance Information Window The set name Unit comment will be displayed in the Comment field Monitor Device J General Tab Page in General Jour IN Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters the Monitor Device Window Inverter 3G3MV PDRT2 Comment SYSTEM UNIT No1 Motor Name M12 Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 Unit Conduction Time 90 Hours Fan Conduction Time 14 Hours Clear Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time 14 Hours Clear Average Electric Power Average of 10min 30 w Network Power Voltage 20 4 DES Network Power Voltage Peak 205 V Network Power Voltage Bottom 202 V Clear IV Unit Maintenance FI Warnine IV Fan Maintenance IT Error IV Electrolytic Capacitor Maintenance IV Network Power Voltage drop FI Dorie Forvard Rar Jp Tit if IV During Reverse Run f IV Frequency Agree 7 2 11 Connected Device Comment Function e User defined names can be set for the motor connected to the Inverter and devices connected to control I O terminals and those names can be stored in the Inverter e The d
185. ations control Zero servo error External fault PID feedback reference loss Undertorque detection 1 Undertorque detection 2 Overload during HSB Hardware fault FOLI displayed in 3G3MV 8 11 Communications Errors Chapter 8 8 5 Inverter Alarms m Detecting Inverter Alarms The Inverters alarm codes are not specified in DeviceNet they are a proprietary function of these products When an alarm occurs the status will change as described below Inverter alarm status The alarm output allocated in the remote I O will turn ON If necessary we recommend programming a sequence to handle the alarm such as Function Remote I O stopping the Inverter when the alarm output goes ON Read the alarm output for Class 29 Instance 1 Attribute OB using message commu nications We recommend programming a stop sequence such as turning OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter when an alarm occurs in the Inverter Explicit messages m Reading the Alarm Code The following methods can be used to read the Inverter s alarm code Function Inverter alarm status Inverter s Operator dis When the Inverter is in alarm status the relevant information will be displayed flash play ing on the Inverter s Digital Operator Explicit messages The alarm code of an alarm that is currently occurring can be read with message communications Devi
186. cal Remote 0 Digital Operator frequency settings are valid 1 Frequency reference 1 n024 is valid 2 Frequency reference control terminal 0 to 10 V voltage input is valid 3 Frequency reference control terminal 4 to 20 mA current input is valid 4 Frequency reference control terminal 0 to 20 mA current input is valid 5 Pulse train reference control terminal is valid 6 Frequency reference from RS 422 485 communications is valid 7 Multi function analog voltage input 0 to 10 V is valid Used when two analog inputs are required for PID control Nor mally not used 8 Multi function analog current input 4 to 20 mA is valid Used when two analog inputs are required for PID control Normally not used 9 Frequency reference from the Optional Unit DeviceNet Communications Unit is valid Perform the above setting according to the source of the frequency reference in the application When frequency references from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used set to 9 If this setting is performed frequency reference 1 can only be set through DeviceNet communications However frequency references 2 to 16 and the inching frequency can be set from DeviceNet com munications or the Digital Operator regardless of the setting of n004 4 3 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 Switching of Frequency References from DeviceNet Communications There is a switching
187. can be set for each DeviceNet Master Unit from the Configurator enabling communications be tween multiple groups of PLCs and Slaves The maximum number of nodes connected to one Network remains at 64 Note One Slave can be connected to no more than one DeviceNet Master Unit e More than one DeviceNet Master Unit per PLC Remote I O can be allocated for each Slave of the DeviceNet Master Unit from the Configurator so more than one DeviceNet Master Unit can be mounted to the same PLC Note In allocating Remote I O for each DeviceNet Master Unit be careful not to allow any dual allocation m Configurator Specifications Dedicated interface 3G8F5 DRM21 E 3G8E2 DRM21 EV1 Software WS 02 CFDC1 E Packaged with the Interface Personal computer Desktop model or Desktop model ISA Desktop model PCM Notebook model Board CIA Card 1 15 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Dedicated interface 3G8F5 DRM21 E 3G8E2 DRM21 EV1 Operating Compatible Windows 95 98 ME Windows 95 98 ME Windows 95 98 or environ OS NT 4 0 or 2000 or NT 4 0 2000 ment Minimum com IBM PC AT or compatible OS requirements may be stricter than the fol puter require lowing ments CPU 166 MHz Pentium min Memory 32 MB min Hard disk 15 MB min free space Connec Dedicated Sold separately ISA Board PCMCIA Card tion interface method Serial Connect from the computer s COM port through a C
188. cates that the bit is not used 2 14 Example System Startup Chapter 2 a Verification Procedure Use the following procedure to operate the Inverter and verify proper operation The operational check is performed with the Inverter s forward reference Thoroughly confirm the safety of the equipment before operating the system Note Refer to the preceding page for details on the contents of each word 000000 CTOO Monitor word 3303 CLR SHIFT CH 3 3 0 3 MONTR 03303 0010 SHIFT CH 3 2 0 3 Display word 3203 in the same window MONTR 03203 03303 0000 0010 Write the value 0060 Net Ctrl 1 and Net Ref 1 to word 3203 to enable the network CHG 0 0 6 O WRITE Change word 3303 Ref From Net 1 and Ctrl From Net 1 to confirm rights to the communications reference A frequency of 0 00 will be displayed in the data display on the front of the Inverter Display word 3204 03203 03303 0060 0070 03204 03303 0000 0070 Input 50 00 Hz 5 000 decimal 1388 hexadecimal to word 3204 to change the frequency reference CHG 1 3 8 8 WRITE A frequency of 50 00 will be displayed in the data display on the front of the Inverter Verify the frequency
189. cations 422 485 communications 3 Optional Card Operation commands using DeviceNet Communications Card e When operation commands forward reverse stop from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used set to 3 m Switching of Operation Commands from DeviceNet Communications There is a switching signal Net Ctrl for operation commands from the standard remote I O of the DeviceNet Communications Card The input method for operation commands can be changed in the following ways using the Net Ctrl signal Net Ctrl 1 ON Enables operation commands from DeviceNet communications remote I O operation commands become valid regardless of the setting in b1 02 Net Ctrl 0 OFF Enables the operation command setting in b1 02 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 4 2 3 DeviceNet Communications Settings The parameters below are for functions that are exclusive to DeviceNet communications Set these parameters according to the desired application Parameter Name Contents Setting Default No Operator display range setting Communications fault opera Select the Inverter operation per tion formed when a communications Comm Bus Fit Sel fault is detected 0 Decelerates to a stop using C1 02 deceleration time fault detec tion Coasts to a stop fault detection Decelerates to a stop using the C1 09 emergency stop time fault detection 3 Continues operating alarm detection See note
190. ceNet Communications Unit Card alarm code Class 2A Instance 1 Attribute 6F Alarm Codes The following table lists the alarm codes Refer to the Maintenance Operation Chapter of your Inverter User s Manual for more details on troubleshooting and correcting alarms also known as warnings and non fatal faults e 3G3MV Alarm Codes Alarm code hex Operator display Meaning 0000 No Inverter alarm detected 8000 STP flashing Operator stopped 8001 SER flashing Sequence error 8002 EF flashing External terminal fault 8003 BB flashing Baseblock input 8004 OL3 flashing Overtorque 1 8005 OH flashing Cooling fins overheating 8006 OV flashing Main circuit overvoltage 8007 UV flashing Main circuit undervoltage 8008 FAN flashing Cooling fan fault 8009 CE flashing Communications timeout 800A BUS flashing Option transfer error 800C OHS flashing Motor overheating 800D FBL flashing Feedback loss error 800E STP flashing Emergency stop 8 12 Communications Errors e 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Alarm Codes Fault detection supported 3G3RV 3G3FV 3G3PV Operator Display Chapter 8 Content No Inverter alarm detected flashing Main circuit undervoltage UV OV flashing Main circuit overvoltage OH flashing Cooling fins overheating OH2 flashing Inverter overheating warning OL3 flashing Overtorque de
191. celeration switching fre quency S curve characteristic time at accelera tion start S curve characteristic time at accelera tion end 0 20 S curve characteristic time at decelera tion start 0 20 S curve characteristic time at decelera tion end 0 00 Slip compensation gain 1 0 See note 2 10 92 Slip compensation primary delay time 200 See note 2 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute C3 03 0211 01 30 Slip compensation limit 010250 1 200 No C3 04 0212 01 31 Slip compensation during regeneration 0 1 1 0 No C3 05 0242 01 32 Flux Calculation Method 0 1 1 0 No C3 06 0243 Output voltage limiting action selection 0 1 1 0 No C4 01 0213 01 33 Torque compensation gain 0 00to 10 01 1 00 Yes 2 50 C4 02 0214 01 34 Torque compensation delay time O to 1 ms 20 See No 10000 note 2 C4 03 0244 Startup torque forward operation 0 0 to 0 1 0 0 No 200 0 C4 04 0245 Startup torque reverse operation 200 0 to 0 1 0 0 No 0 0 C4 05 0246 Startup torque compensation time Oto 200 1 ms 10 No C5 01 0215 01 35 ASR Proportional P gain 1 0 00 to 0 01 20 00 Yes 300 00 See note 2 C5 02 0216 01 36 ASR Integral I time 1 0 000 to 0 001s 10 500 Yes 10 000 See note 2 C5
192. cified in n057 H2 01 See note 1 output Multi function output 1 1 Function specified in n058 H2 02 See note 1 Multi function output 2 1 Function specified in n059 H2 03 See note 1 P lock completion Position lock engaged See note 2 Note 1 The function set in the multi function output selection parameter is enabled 3G3MV The function set in parameter n057 to n059 function selection for multi function outputs 1 to 3 is enabled 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV The function set in parameter H2 01 to H2 03 function selection for the multi function con tact output and multi function outputs 1 and 2 is enabled Note 2 The P lock function position lock or zero servo function is valid only for a 3G3FV Inverter operating with flux vector control This bit is not used with other Inverters or control modes 5 24 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 e Input Data Details Signal name Content Output frequency monitor Gives the frequency being output by the Inverter 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV e Monitor unit 0 01 Hz See note 1 3G3FV Example Output frequency when the monitor value is 1388 hex 1388 hex 5000 decimal x 0 01 Hz 50 00 Hz Torque reference monitor Gives the torque reference value inside the Inverter See note 2 ae e Monitor unit 0 1 100 is motor rated torque Example Torque reference for monitor value of 1F4 hex 1F4 hex 500 decimal x 0 1 50 re
193. commands are valid 2 RS 422 485 communica tions run commands are valid 3 Run commands from the Optional Unit DeviceNet Com munications Unit are valid Note In Local mode run com mands are restricted to those performed using the operation keys of the Digital Operator Perform the above setting according to the source of the run commands forward operation reverse operation STOP in the application When run commands forward operation reverse operation STOP are always to be made from DeviceNet communications set to 3 m Switching of Run Commands from DeviceNet Communications There is a switching signal Net Ctrl for run commands from the standard remote I O of the DeviceNet Communications Unit The input method for run commands can be changed in the follow ing way using the Net Ctrl signal Net Ctrl 1 ON Enables run commands from DeviceNet communications remote I O run commands become valid regardless of the setting in n003 4 2 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 Net Ctrl 0 OFF Enables the run command setting in n003 4 1 2 Frequency Reference Selection Register Content Setting Setting Default Write number range unit setting during hex operation n004 0104 Frequency Selects the frequency refer 0t0 9 1 0 No reference ence input method for the source selec Inverter Becomes valid when tion the Remote mode is selected from Lo
194. communications they do not support message com munications as Multi vendor Network The DeviceNet conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification which means that devices Masters and Slaves produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Net work The DeviceNet Communications Unit supports the DeviceNet AC DC drive object m Choice of Communications Functions The DeviceNet Communications Unit Card has various functions to choose from to suit the Inverter applications e Supported Master Communications Methods The DeviceNet Unit Card supports 4 DeviceNet I O connection methods Poll Bit Strobe Cyclic and Change of State COS It is possible to set another connection method to be used simultaneously in addition to the regular Poll connection The COS method is a function that sends with a high priority status only when there has been a change in the status of the Unit s ON OFF data so the communica tions volume is normally zero The COS communication method is ideal for applications such as error or alarm notifications e Remote I O Communications Basic Remote I O These are the basic remote I O functions defined in DeviceNet Specification e Standard Remote I O These are the factory settings for the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card These settings are for DeviceNet comp
195. ction 1 Oto 8 Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 10 80 Torque detection time 1 0 0 to 10 0 Appendices Register Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute Overheat pre alarm level Setting range Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting Changes during opera tion Operation selection after overheat pre alarm 0to 3 Ground protection selection Oor1 Cooling fan control delay time 0 to 300 Ambient temperature 45 to 60 Register Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute OL2 characteristics selec tion at low speeds Note Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters m Special Adjustment Parameters Hunting prevention func tion selection Oor1 Setting range Oor1 Setting unit Default setting Changes during opera tion Hunting prevention gain 0 00 to 2 50 High slip braking decelera tion frequency width 1 to 20 High slip braking current limit 100 to 200 High slip braking stop dwell time 0 1 to 10 0 Register Operator Parameters Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute High slip braking OL time Monitor selection 30 to 1200 Setting range 4 to 40 Setting unit Default setting Changes during opera tion Monitor selection after power up 1to4 Freque
196. cy corresponds to 100 00 39 0039 PID input Read with 1 10 decimal Maximum frequency corresponds to 100 Read with 00 3A 003A PID output Read with 1 10 decimal Maximum frequency corresponds to 100 Read with 00 3B 003B Output current Read with 1 A 10 decimal Read with 00 3C 003C Not used 00 3D 003D Communications error Refer to the following Communications Error content Content table 00 003E to OOFF Not used e Status Signals Register Number 0020 Hex Content During Run 1 During Run Forward reverse operation 1 reverse operation Inverter ready 1 ready Fault 1 fault Data setting error 1 error Multi function output 1 1 ON Multi function output 2 1 ON Multi function output 3 1 ON Not used e Fault Status Register Number 0021 Hex Content OC OV OL2 OH Not used Not used FBL EFL STP F QO CO NIA BR hy oO 10 32 Appendices Chapter 10 Bit Content 11 Not used UV1 UV2 CE OPR Note If an error is generated the relevant bit will become 1 e Data Link Status Register Number 0022 Hex During data write 1 during write Not used Upper lower limit error 1 error setting range exceeded Integration error 1 error same as OPE Not used SC GF PF LF Not used
197. cy reference for loss of fre quency reference 0 0 to 100 0 Number of auto restart attempts 0 to 10 Auto restart operation selection 0 1 Torque detection selection 1 0to8 Torque detection level 1 0 to 300 Torque detection time 1 0 0 to 10 0 Torque detection selection 2 0to8 Torque detection level 2 0 to 300 Torque detection time 2 0 0 to 10 0 Forward drive torque limit 0 to 300 Reverse drive torque limit 0 to 300 Forward regenerative torque limit 0 to 300 Reverse regenerative torque limit 0 to 300 Protect selection for internal DB resis tor 0 1 0 Overheat pre alarm level 50 to 130 Depends on capacity Operation selection after overheat pre alarm 0to 3 3 Input open phase protection selection 0 1 1 0 See note 4 Output open phase protection selec tion 0 1 0 10 62 Ground protection selection 0 1 1 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Cooling fan control selection 0 1 Cooling fan control delay time 0 to 300 Ambient temperature 45 to 60 OL2 characteristics selection at low 0 1 speeds Soft CLA selection 0 1 Note 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 If the setting is 0 the axis will acc
198. d the last string of parameter settings data that was received is enabled as operating data but it is not stored in EEPROM When the power is turned OFF the settings data is cleared and returned to the original values Supported by all Inverter software With the 3G3MV the settings data is enabled immediately after it is received so it is not necessary to send an ENTER com mand Note 1 In Inverters other than the 3G3MV the parameter data will not be enabled unless the EN TER command is sent In some cases it will not be possible to start the Inverter Note 2 The ENTER command is required for the parameters register numbers 0100 and higher Values such as the run command and frequency reference register numbers 0000 to 000F are stored in the RAM area only so that data is enabled without an ENTER command m Special Remote I O Responses When data is written and read using special remote I O the responses shown in the following table are returned Check that the input data and output data match when handling communications Fault code Normal comple tion response Content The function code and register number at the time of transmission are placed at the beginning and returned with the data amount when data is written or the read data when data is read attached Countermeasure Function code error A code other than 03 hex 08 hex 10 hex has been set as a function code Check and corr
199. d 3 output words e Control remote I O Allocated 4 or 5 input words and 4 output words e Unit status Allocated 1 input word e Multi function input monitor Allocated 1 input word Note 1 The user can select from among these six types of remote I O Note 2 Basic and standard remote I O are compatible with DeviceNet The other remote I O functions are applicable only to this product and are not defined in DeviceNet Specification Explicit messages A maximum of 32 bytes of data can be sent or received Note Explicit messages are applicable to the AC DC drive profile Communications power supply specifications 11 to 25 V DC 50 mA max 20 mA typical Internal circuit power supply Supplied from the 3G3RV 3G3FV Inverter Operating location Indoors with no corrosive gases oil mist metallic particles etc Operating ambient tempera ture 40 to 45 C Operating ambient humidity 90 RH max with no condensation Storage temperature 20 to 60 C Area 1 000 m max Weight 50 g max 10 3 Appendices Chapter 10 10 2 Objects 10 2 1 Identify Objects Identification Information Class 01 Hex Identify objects are objects that provide DeviceNet product information All of this information is read only Support Service Code Service code number hex Sem e OE Get attribute single 05 Reset return to initial status m Object Deta
200. d securely Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 N Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block Not doing so may result in fire injury or damage to the product N Caution Carefully handle the product because it uses semiconductor elements Careless handling may result in malfunction N Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations Not doing so may result in equipment damage Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity Locations close to power supplies 3 2 1 3G3MV DeviceNet Communications Unit Installation N Caution Before installing and wiring an Optional Unit always turn OFF the power to the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter and wait for the CHARGE indicator to turn OFF Mounting Procedure 1 Turn OFF the main circuit power supply for the Inverter wait for at least one minute from the time the LED indicator or the CHARGE indicator goes out and remove the front cover of the Inverter along with the Operator 22200000000 22200000000
201. der the DeviceNet protocol the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r min The number of motor poles 2 to 39 must be set in parameter n035 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units when using DeviceNet open network Note 3 If the setting in not within the proper range the previous data will be retained and the des ignated rotational speed will not be entered e Input Bit Details Fault 0 Normal 1 Fault During forward run 0 Stopped 1 Running forward e Input Data Details Word address Bit Signal name Rotational speed monitor data Content Communications data Rotational speed monitor x 2 a Speed scale value of Class 2A Instance 01 Attribute 16 Initial value 0 The speed scale is assigned to the message function For instructions on how to change it refer to Chapter 6 Message Communications The unit for the rotational speed monitor is set in n035 01 03 frequency reference set ting and display units Data conversion example When the speed scale value is 0 and the number of motor poles is set in n035 01 03 and the read data is 03E8 hex 03E8 hex 31 000 gt 1 000 2 1 000 r min 5 10 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 Note Under the DeviceNet protocol the unit for the speed reference is fixed as r min The number of motor poles 2 to 39 must be set in parameter n035 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units when using DeviceNet open network 5 11
202. during Frequency Agree 0 44 IV Warning Torque during Frequency Agree Close Details Reference Accel Decel Displays the current level during acceleration deceleration 7 2 3 Warning Torque Torque Current Note The value when the maintenance information was Detection refreshed is displayed Accel Decel Peak Displays the maximum current level during acceleration Torque deceleration Warning Torque Displays this item as selected when the current level during Accel Decel exceeds the threshold monitor value during acceleration deceleration Torque Current Displays the current level during frequency agreement Level during Fre Note The value when the maintenance information was quency Agree refreshed is displayed Peak Torque dur Displays the maximum current level during frequency agree ing Frequency ment Agree Warning Torque Displays this item as selected when the current level during Frequency exceeds the threshold monitor value during frequency Agree agreement 7 68 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 5 6 Current Trace Tab Page History Tab Page Maintenance Information x General OUT IN History Graph Time Curentfstatus fa Operation Time Warning Torque Current Trace Error History During Accel C Reverse Cmd 10ms 0 04 During Accel Decel SE 20ms 004 During Accel Dece 30ms 0 04 During ccel Dece Error 40ms 004 During Accel Decel
203. dy Reverse Forward From Net Run Run Rotational speed monitor rightmost data Rotational speed monitor leftmost data 9 2 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Timing Chart 000000 Frequency Reference Input Bit 000001 Forward Input Bit 000002 Reverse Input Bit Word m bit 2 During Forward Run Word m bit 3 During Reverse Run Rotational speed reference data word n 1 003000 Fault Flag 000003 Fault Reset Input Bit Operation 1 When the Frequency Reference Input Bit turns ON the rotational speed reference data specified in D00000 is moved to remote I O output word n 1 2 When the Forward Input Bit turns ON remote I O word n bit 0 Forward Stop will turn ON and forward operation will start During forward operation remote I O word m bit 2 During Forward Run will be ON 3 When the Forward Input Bit turns OFF remote I O word m bit 2 During Forward Run will turn OFF after operation will decelerate to a stop 4 When the Reverse Input Bit turns ON remote I O word n bit 1 Reverse Stop will turn ON and reverse operation will start During reverse operation remote I O word m bit 3 During Reverse Run will be ON 5 When the Reverse Input Bit turns OFF remote I O word m bit 3 During Reverse Run will turn OFF after operation decelerates to a stop 6 When the remote I O Fault Bit word m bit 0 turns ON the Faul
204. e ON Time Monitor 7 2 7 Contact Operations Monitor Warning Notifies that a warning or error has occurred in the Inverter the details are also displayed During Forward Run During Reverse Run Notifies that the Inverter is operating in forward reverse run mode Frequency Agree Notifies that the Inverter is agreement frequen cies Update Button Uploads all the maintenance information including information from other tab pages and refreshes the screen Save Maintenance Counter Button Writes the maintenance counter information operating time and maintenance counter for each terminal to the EEPROM of the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card Note The maintenance information is saved in the EEPROM approximately every six minutes Therefore depending on the power OFF timing up to six minutes worth of data is lost To mon itor more closely click the Save Maintenance Counter Button immediately before turning OFF the power The maintenance information will be written to the EEPROM 7 64 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 5 2 OUT Tab Page Maintenance Information x General OUT jin Operation Time Warning Torque Current Trace Error History No YO Comment Maintenance Counter 200 Out Point 1 216 Seconds 01 Out Point 2 216 Seconds 02 Out Point 3 216 Seconds Close Details Reference The settings in the No field are as follows 00 Multi function contact o
205. e allocated input words Inverter to PLC a Bit and Data Functions The functions of all allocated output bits and data PLC to Inverter as well as input bits and data Inverter to PLC in input words m through m 3 are the same as the regular control I O remote I O function Refer to 5 6 1 Control I O Remote I O Operation for details on these functions Only the functions of the inputs in input word m 4 are different so those functions are described here 5 27 Remote I O Functions e Input Bit Details Inputs 0 to 7 Function Chapter 5 Status of terminal S1 multi function input 1 3G3RV 3G3PV Status of terminal S1 Forward Stop Status of terminal 1 Forward Stop Status of terminal S2 multi function input 2 Status of terminal S2 Reverse Stop Status of terminal 2 Reverse Stop Status of terminal S3 multi function input 3 Status of terminal S3 multi function input 1 selection Status of terminal 3 multi function contact input 1 Status of terminal S4 multi function input 4 Status of terminal S4 multi function input 2 selection Status of terminal 4 multi function contact input 2 Status of terminal S5 multi function input 5 Status of terminal S5 multi function input 3 selection Status of terminal 5 multi function contact input 3 Status of terminal S6 multi function input 6 Status of terminal S6 multi function input 4 selection Sta
206. e covering can result in short circuits Approx 30 mm 2 Carefully peel back the weaving to reveal the signal lines power lines and the shielding wire The shielding wire will be loose on the outside of the other lines but it is harder than the weaving Shielding wire 3 Remove the exposed weaving and the aluminum tape from the signal and power lines Strip the covering from the signal and power lines to the proper length for the crimp terminals Twist together the wires of each of the signal and power lines 3 12 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 Strip to match the crimp terminals m DeviceNet Communications Card Terminal Block Wiring Procedure 1 Loosen the terminal screws using a thin flat blade screwdriver 2 Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block 3 Tighten the terminal screws securely to a torque of 0 22 to 0 25 N m Note 1 Separate the DeviceNet communications cables from the main circuit wiring and other pow er lines Note 2 Do not solder the ends of the electric wires Doing so may cause contact failure Note 3 If straight crimp terminals are not used strip the electrical wires to a length of 5 5 mm Note 4 Do not tighten the screws with a torque exceeding 0 5 N m Doing so may damage the ter minal block If the screws are too loose however malfunctions or short circuits may result o Thin flat blade screwdriver Terminal block TC Nr gt DDDDDO
207. e enter ears Chapter 10 Appendices cc ccc cece ccc c eres ccc cesees 10 1 10 1 Specifications s aseavevsir besvare ba eee ee oe ere eevee wie 10 2 QDI OCS satte repr adea Aas bed Seog 2 10 3 DeviceNet Communications Response Time 0 0 00 c eee eee eee 10 4 3G3MV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 00 10 5 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 0000 10 6 3G3PV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 0000 10 7 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 2 000005 Revision Fbistorvassssgessesstdtadesakla see weno eee eae Bete R 1 Chapter 1 Functions and System Configuration 1 1 Functions 1 2 Overview of Smart Slave Functions 1 3 Comparison to Earlier Models 1 4 DeviceNet Features 1 5 DeviceNet System Configuration Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 1 1 Functions The 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit is a DeviceNet communications interface Unit for the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Multi function Compact Inverters The 3G3RV PDRT2 DeviceNet Com munications Card is a DeviceNet communications interface card for the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and 3G3FV High function General purpose Inverters The DeviceNet Communications Unit and Card are dedicated communications interface devices that make it possible for the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV and 3G3FV In
208. e given above 10 93 Appendices Chapter 10 Note 3 The default setting of the Inverter will differ depending on its capacity The value for the 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given above Note 4 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to the setting range The open loop vector control setting range is given above Reference Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute d1 01 0280 01 43 Frequency reference 1 0 00to 0 01 Hz 6 00 Yes d1 02 0281 01 44 Frequency reference 2 gen ie ting o1 0 00 Yes d1 03 0282 01 45 Frequency reference 3 03 0 00 Yes d1 04 0283 01 46 Frequency reference 4 0 00 Yes d1 05 0284 01 47 Frequency reference 5 0 00 Yes d1 06 0285 01 48 Frequency reference 6 0 00 Yes d1 07 0286 01 49 Frequency reference 7 0 00 Yes d1 08 0287 01 4A Frequency reference 8 0 00 Yes d1 09 0288 01 4B Jog frequency reference 6 00 Yes d2 01 0289 01 4C Reference frequency upper limit oS 0 1 100 0 No d2 02 028A 01 4D Reference frequency lower limit KN 0 1 0 0 No d3 01 028B 01 4E Jump frequency 1 0 0 to 0 1 Hz 0 0 No d3 02 028C 01 4F Jump frequency 2 400 0 0 0 No d3 03 028D 01 50 Jump frequency 3 0 0 No d3 04 028E 01 51 Jump frequency width DO 0 1 Hz 1 0 No d4 01 028F 01 52 Reference frequency hold function 0 1 1 0 No selection d4 02 0290
209. e no torque output unless there is a torque reference torque limit from control I O remote I O Note 2 If F9 06 is set to 3 continues operating the Inverter will continue operating when a com munications fault occurs according to the contents of settings immediately before Be sure to take any steps necessary to ensure safety such as installing a limit switch or an emer gency stop switch 4 12 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 4 3 4 Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units e Perform the following settings to specify units for data related to frequencies speeds used in DeviceNet communications e The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r min so always set the number of motor poles Parameter Set value Contents Default No setting 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 01 units max frequency is 100 2 to 39 r min units Set the number of motor poles 40 to 39 999 Specifies the value used to set and display the maximum fre quency Set a 4 digit value without the decimal point Set the position of the digit where the decimal point is to be displayed starting from the rightmost digit Example To display the maximum frequency as 200 0 spec ify 12000 4 13 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings 4 14 Chapter 4 m Mi Chapter 5 Remote I O Functions 5 1 Overview of Remote I O Functions 5 2 Switching the Remote I O Function 5 3 Basic Remote I O 5
210. e same as 00 00 for unit status input Remote I O data Operation is the same as 00 for multi function input monitor input Note 1 The setting ranges are the same as the respective remote I O setting ranges Note 2 The remote I O functions are the same as the functions explained in Chapter 5 Remote I O Functions Note 3 Remote I O can be performed by means of message communications When a normal re mote I O communications connection is established however the message communica tions cannot be used for that purpose Even if an attempt is made to use message communications they will be overwritten by remote I O inputs 10 2 5 DeviceNet Connection Objects Class 05 Hex DeviceNet connection objects are objects related to information and operations involving DeviceNet communications connections The Master Unit uses the information and operations of these objects to execute the initial processing for communications The functions and data have no particular use for the user Use this object when switching the remote I O function 10 7 Appendices Support Service Code Service code number hex Service Reset reset to initial status Get attribute single m Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Set attribute single Content Indicates class 05 soft ware revisions The revi sion value is advanced whenev
211. ect the function code Register number error The specified register number has not been registered An attempt was made to read an ENTER command register Check and correct the reg ister number Data setting error An upper or lower limit for the write data setting range was exceeded Invalid data has been set that would cause an operation error OPE1 to OPE9 Check the display for the Digital Operator and cor rect the invalid data 5 17 Remote I O Functions Fault code Writing mode error Content during Inverter operations a write request message was received for a parameter that is read only during operation An ENTER command was received during Inverter operations Chapter 5 Countermeasure Perform write operations after stopping the Inverter read requested message was received during UV detection An ENTER command was received during UV detection Perform write operations after clearing the UV main circuit undervoltage error during F04 initial memory error detection a write request message other than con stant initialization was received After constant initialization has been performed turn the power supply OFF and ON again write request message was received for a read only register Check and correct the reg ister number Note When a communications error occurs the MSB most significant bit of the fu
212. ed Bit Frequency Agree 1 frequency agree Bit Warning minor fault 1 alarm Bit Frequency Detect 1 1 output frequency lt n095 Bit 9 13 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 002005 Frequency Detect 2 1 output frequency n095 Bit 002006 Inverter Ready 1 Inverter ready Bit 002007 UV 1 UV Bit 002008 Baseblock 1 baseblock Bit 002009 Frequency Reference Mode 1 not communi cations Bit 002010 Run Command Mode 1 not communications Bit 002011 een Detection 1 overtorque detected it 002012 Not used 002013 during Fault Retry 1 during fault retry Bit 002014 Fault 1 during fault Bit 002015 Communications Timeover CE 1 communica tions timeover detected Bit e Program related Bits Used Word Function Program Start Input Bit Program End Input Bit Program Execution Flag Communications Error Reset Input Bit Inverter Stop Command Flag Frequency Reference Write Flag Control Input Write Flag Output Frequency Read Flag Inverter Status Read Flag Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag Control Input Write Completed Flag Output Frequency Read Completed Flag Inverter Status Read Completed Flag Communications Error Flag e Inverter Control Input D01000 Reference frequency setting D02000 Output frequency monitor 9 14 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter
213. eference data in D01000 will be transferred to the Inverter When the Frequency Reference Write Completed Flag is turned ON the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be turned OFF and the Control Input Write Flag will be turned ON Bits are shifted to achieve this 2 When the Control Input Write Flag is turned ON the Inverter control input specified in word 0010 will be transferred to the Inverter When the Control Input Write Completed Flag is turned ON the Control Input Write Flag will be turned OFF and the Output Frequency Reference Read Flag will be turned ON Bits are shifted to achieve this 3 When the Output Frequency Read Flag is turned ON the output frequency of the Inverter will be read When the Output Frequency Read Completed Flag is turned ON the read output frequency will be stored in D02000 the Output Frequency Read Flag will be turned OFF and the Inverter Status Read Flag will be turned ON Bits are shifted to achieve this 4 When the Inverter Status Read Flag is turned ON the Inverter status will be read When the In verter Status Read Completed Flag is turned ON the read Inverter status will be transferred to word 0020 the Inverter Status Read Flag will be turned OFF and the Frequency Reference Write Flag will be turned ON Setting the Frequency Reference Write Flag to ON will repeat the above steps 1 to 4 5 When the Program End Input Bit is turned ON the Inverter stop command will be written in the Inverter When
214. elerate to the specified speed over the specified acceler ation time C1 01 to C1 08 Note 3 The initial value when C6 01 is set to 1 is given If C6 01 is set to 0 the initial value will be 150 Note 4 Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters Special Adjustment Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Hunting prevention function selection O 1 Hunting prevention gain 0 00 to 2 50 Speed feedback detection control 0 00 to AFR gain 10 00 Speed feedback detection control 0 to 2000 AFR time constant Speed feedback detection control 0 to 2000 AFR time constant 2 High slip braking deceleration fre 1 to 20 quency width High slip braking current limit 100 to 200 High slip braking stop dwell time 0 1 to 10 0 High slip braking OL time 30 to 1200 m Operator Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default Write In At range unit setting during opera stance tribute tion Monitor selection Monitor selection after power up Frequency units of reference setting and monitor LCD brightness LOCAL REMOTE key enable disable STOP key during control circuit termi nal operation 10 63 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Parameter initia
215. emote I O Functions Chapter 5 e Inputs Inverter to PLC Instance ID 153 Decimal 99 Hex Byte number Alarm Inverter Atrefer During During Zero During minor ready ence reset reverse speed run fault input run P Multi Multi Multi Local re Power Opera lock com function function function mote interrup tion fault pletion output 2 output 1 contact tion See output recovery note 4 Output frequency monitor rightmost byte Output frequency monitor leftmost byte Torque reference monitor rightmost byte Torque reference monitor leftmost byte Output current monitor rightmost byte Output current monitor leftmost byte Note 1 A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Note 2 Control remote I O inputs and outputs are paired When using control remote I O be sure to set them together Note 3 Control remote I O objects do not conform to the AC DC drive profile but are specially set for this product Note 4 The P lock function position lock or zero servo function is valid only for a 3G3FV Inverter operating with flux vector control This bit is not used with other Inverters or control modes Note 5 The output words PLC to Inverter allocated for the control I O remote I O multi function input monitor function are the same as the output words allocated for the regular control I O remote I O function Just one byte is added to th
216. ent Displays the ON OFF status for each input terminal Displays the present value of the maintenance counter for 7 2 6 Cumulative ON Time each input terminal Monitor Note Displays the cumulative ON time in seconds or the 7 2 7 Contact Operations contact operations count number of times Monitor Clear Value Button Clears the present value of the maintenance counter to zero Note Select the terminal to be cleared and click the Clear Button to clear the value to zero I O Comment ON OFF Maintenance Counter Note The following table shows the meanings of the values set in the No field Details 3G3RV 3G3PV Forward stop Reverse stop Multi function input 1 Multi function input 2 Forward stop Reverse stop Multi function input 3 Multi function input selection 1 Multi function contact input 1 Multi function input 4 Multi function input selection 2 Multi function contact input 2 Multi function input 5 Multi function input selection 3 Multi function contact input 3 Multi function input 6 Multi function input selection 4 Multi function contact input 4 Multi function input 7 Multi function input selection 5 Multi function contact input 5 7 58 Multi function contact input 6 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 4 4 Operation Time Tab Page Monitor Device x General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Erro
217. ent data unit selection can be set and read The current data unit value is calculated as follows Unit 0 1 A x 1 2 b Current scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement Setting range 45 to 15 F1 to OF hex Default Chapter 10 Power scale Power data unit selection can be set and read The power data unit value is cal culated as follows Unit 1 W x 1 2 c Power scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement 45 to 15 F1 to OF hex Voltage scale Voltage data unit selection can be set and read The voltage data unit value is calculated as follows Unit 1 V x 1 24 d Voltage scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement 45 to 15 F1 to OF hex Time scale Time data unit selection can be set and read The time data unit value is cal culated as follows Unit 1 ms x 1 2 e Voltage scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement 45 to 15 F1 to OF hex Reference From Net 00 Reference other than DeviceNet n004 b1 01 01 Operating with DeviceNet Electric power Average power value W Electric power time scale Power value measurement period T 00 10 minutes 01 30 minutes 02 60 minutes 00 to 02 Specific alarm Alarm code of the alarm or minor fault detected in the Inverter For more details refer to 8 5 Inverter Alarms Specific error Fa
218. ent that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly consult your OMRON representative Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the sys tems machines and equipment and be sure to provide the systems machines and equipment with double safety mechanisms m Transportation Installation Wiring and Maintenance Precautions N WARNING Do not touch the conductive parts such as internal PCBs or terminal blocks while power is being supplied Doing so may result in electrical shock N WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover terminal cov ers bottom cover Operator and optional items Leave them mounted in place while power is being supplied Not doing so may result in electrical shock mal function or damage to the product N WARNING Wiring maintenance or inspection must be performed by authorized personnel Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire N WARNING Wiring maintenance or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the power supply confirming that the CHARGE indicator or status indicators is OFF and after waiting for the time specified on the Inverter front cover Not doing so may result in electrical shock NWARNING Do not damage pull on apply stress to place heavy objects on or pinch the cables Doing so may result in electrical shock operation stoppage or burning N WARNING Insta
219. equency The Inverter s various control inputs are allocated to the registers shown in the following table For example to set the frequency reference and begin operation first set the reference value to the fre quency reference register 0002 and then write the run command to the Inverter s run command register 0001 Note 1 Set values are retained until changed by the next writing operation Note 2 The following registers are in RAM so they are all cleared to zero when the Inverter s power supply is turned OFF Note 3 When the remote I O function is being used the run command and frequency reference are overwritten at regular intervals Class 64 Register Function Content Instance Attribute Number hex Not used Run command Refer to the following Run Commands table Frequency reference Frequency reference value setting units as specified in n035 V f gain Make settings with 1000 decimal as 100 See note 1 Setting range 2 0 to 200 0 20 to 2000 decimal 0004 to 0008 Not used 0009 Inverter output Refer to following Inverter Outputs table 000A to 000F Not used Note 1 The V f gain is the setting for the percentage of the V f calculation result with respect to the output voltage A setting of 1000 decimal 03E8 hex corresponds to a multiplication factor of 1 Note 2 When these registers are read the values set in communications will be read For examp
220. er 6 6 6 AC DC Drive Objects Class 2A Hex AC DC drive objects are assigned to command related functions for drive devices such as Inverters and Servomotors Command related data reading and writing monitor data reading set data scale changes and so on are all enabled These functions are shared with similar functions used for remote I O so even if they have been set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote I O Support Service Code Service code number he Servise OE Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single m Object Details Instance Attribute Content Setting range Default Object Software Indicates class 2A soft Revision ware revisions The revi sion value is advanced whenever there is a change At Reference 00 Stopped accelerating or decelerating 01 At reference Net Reference 00 Operate with setting in 00 01 See note 1 n004 b1 01 01 Force DeviceNet oper ation not valid in 3G3FV Drive Mode Set to parameter n002 A1 00 to 03 02 Some Inverters do not support the setting 00 Open loop vector N002 A1 02 2 01 V f control N002 A1 02 0 02 V f control with PG A1 02 1 03 Flux vector control A1 02 3 After changing the set ting the power must be turned OFF and then ON again to enable the new setting 6 13 Message Communications Instance Attribute Speed Actual Rotational S
221. er Button The trace stops when 150 points have been sampled using the trigger sig nal selected in the Trigger field Note The trace will also stop if the Cancel Button is clicked during the trace Middle Trigger But ton Starts a trace that will stop when 75 points have been sampled using the trigger signal selected in the Trigger field Note 1 The 75 points from immediately before and after the trigger are sampled Note 2 The trace will also stop if the Cancel Button is clicked during the trace End Trigger Button Starts a trace that stops at the trigger signal selected in the Trigger field Note 1 The 150 points from immediately before the trigger are sampled Note 2 The trace will also stop if the Cancel Button is clicked during the trace Save Button Converts traced data into CSV format and saves in a file Reference 7 2 4 Current Trace 7 69 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Graph Tab Page This tab page is used to display a graph of current vertical axis and time horizontal axis displayed on the History Tab Page Note The other setting items and buttons in this tab page are the same as on the History Tab Page General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Current Trace Error History History Graph f Trigger Forward Cmd C Reverse Cmd C Frequency Aeree Error Current Trace Sampling Cycle coms 7 5 7 Error Histor
222. er Monitoring Functions Read Class 64 In At stance tribute Register No Hex Inverter status Contents Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation 1 Reverse operation 0 Forward opera tion or stopped Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1 Completed 2 Not completed Bit 3 Error 1 Error Bit 4 Data setting error 1 Error Bit 5 Multi function contact output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function contact output terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 7 to 15 Not used Error details Bit 0 Overcurrent OC ground fault GF Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage OV Bit 2 Inverter overload OL2 Bit 3 Inverter overheat OH1 Bit 4 Not used Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost FbL Bit 7 External error EF EFO Bit 8 Hardware error CPF Bit 9 Motor overload OL1 or overtorque 1 OL3 detected Bit 10 Not used Bit 11 Main circuit undervoltage UV detected Bit 12 Main circuit undervoltage UV1 control power supply error UV2 inrush prevention circuit error UV3 Bit 13 Not used Bit 14 RS 422A 485 communications error CE Bit 15 Operator disconnected OPR Data link status Bit 0 Writing data Bits 1 and 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors B
223. er number and name will be displayed in the Parameter Name field and the param eters set value is displayed in the Value field Double click the Value field of the parameter to be changed and change the set value Note 1 Use either of the following two methods to set the parameter s set value e Select the set value from the pull down menu Input the numerical value Note 2 The details of the selected parameter are displayed in the Help Area When setting the pa rameter refer to the default value of the selected parameter that is displayed in the Default Area For further details on the parameters refer to the operation manual of the Inverter be ing used 7 43 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Edit Device Parameters xj Inverter Parameters Tab General OUT IN l Operation Time Page In the Edit Device Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters Parameters Window Parameter Group All parameters bd 0001 n003 RUN command sel Digital operator 0002 n004 Frequency reference sel Control terminal to 10 V z 0003 n005 Stopping method sel 0004 n006 Reverse rotation prohibit sel 0005 n007 STOP Key function sel 0006 n008 Frequency reference sel in local 0007 n009 Operator freq setting method 0008 n010 Sel at Operator interruption 0009 n011 Max frequency Frequency reference T0024 VI Y Control terminalt4 to 20 m Control terminalf0 to 20 m Pulse train terminal
224. er settings Supported Supported See note Advanced Func tion 1 8 Functions and System Configuration Category Smart Slave functions Function Average Power Monitor Function New Unit Card PDRT2 Supported Advanced Func tion Chapter 1 Earlier Unit Card LJ PDRT1 SINL Not supported Warning Torque Detection Function Supported Advanced Func tion Not supported Current Trace Function Supported Advanced Func tion Not supported Operating Time Monitor Function Supported Advanced Func tion Not supported Cumulative ON Time Monitor Function Supported Advanced Func tion Not supported Contact Operations Monitor Function Supported Advanced Func tion Not supported Conduction Time Monitor Function Supported Advanced Func tion Not supported Network Power Supply Voltage Monitor Function Supported Not supported Unit Comment Function Supported Not supported Connected Device Comment Function Supported Not supported Communications Error Log Monitor Function Supported Not supported Last Maintenance Date Maintenance Function Supported Not supported Reference Chapter 7 Note Refer to 7 3 Edit Device Parameters Window for details on setting parameters with the Config urator refer to 5 5 Special
225. er stopped with fault detection Note 1 The following table shows the status of remote I O output signals and operation indicated by the content of Attribute 06 State i e Inverter status Setting Status Condition Vendor specific condition other than the ones below Startup Preparation not complete setting con Inverter Ready signal is OFF stants Not ready Stopped preparation complete Inverter Ready signal is ON and Dur ing Run signal is OFF Inverter ready Stopped preparation complete Inverter Ready signal is ON and Dur ing Run signal is OFF Enabled Operating During Run signal control I O is ON Stopping Decelerating Operating with both for Ctrl From Net is ON During Forward ward and reverse references equal to 0 Run is OFF During Reverse Run is OFF and During Run is ON Fault Stop Operating with fault detected Alarm signal is ON Faulted Fault detected Fault signal is ON Note 2 The Net Control and Control From Net functions cannot be changed during running Note 3 A DeviceNet Fault mode can be set from communications in the 3G3MV only it cannot be changed from communications in the 3G3RV or 3G3FV Set the fault mode in the Inverter s parameters e Fault Codes DeviceNet error code Operator display Meaning Inverter normal GF Ground fault SC Short circuit Inverter overload Motor overload Overtorque detection 1
226. er there is a change Setting range Default 01 Explicit message 10 8 Indicates the status of this object instance 00 Does not exist in net work or is not ready 01 In network state wait ing for connection event from Master Unit 02 Waiting for connection ID attribute writing 03 Connection com pleted 04 Timeout Must be 03 when communi cations are estab lished Instance type Indicates the type of object instance 00 Explicit message 01 Remote I O Transport class trigger Indicates the communica tions configuration for the DeviceNet Communica tions Unit Card Produced con nection ID Consumed con nection ID Indicates the label used for the communications header for the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card Note These are set when the commu nications connec tion is made Initial comm characteristics Indicates the communica tions configuration for the DeviceNet Communica tions Unit Card Produced con nection size Indicates the maximum number of bytes for trans mission Consumed con nection size Indicates the maximum number of bytes for recep tion Chapter 10 Appendices Instance 01 Explicit message Attribute Expected packet rate Content Indicates the length of the internal processing time out when a communica tions request is received Incremented by 1
227. eration manual for the Inverter being used Note 2 The calculations shown here are based on usage conditions with an ambient temperature of 40 C 80 load ratio and operation time of eight hours per day and installation stan dards in the manual When poorer conditions are used set a time that is shorter than the times in the above table For example if the ambient temperature is higher with the fan life of approximately 6 000 hours set an earlier inspection period If the environment is better than these conditions set the value to 8 000 hours Note 3 When the machine operating time is shorter than the Unit conduction time of the Inverter consider the operating time per day of conduction time when calculating Example When power is ON 24 hours per day but operating time is only six hours Fan conduction time 8 000 x 24 6 32 000 hr Monitoring Methods e Using the Monitor Device Window Click the General Tab in the Monitor Device Window e The present conduction times are displayed in the Unit Conduction Time Fan Conduction Time and Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time fields e The items in the unit status report area can be used to check whether the Conduction Time has reached or exceeded the monitor value When the monitor value is exceeded the corre sponding item is shown as selected bolt Rd General Tab Page in General Jour IN Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters
228. ernal fault Terminal 5 External fault Terminal 6 External fault Terminal 7 External fault Terminal 8 Cooling fan faulty Overspeed Speed deviation PG is disconnected Main circuit voltage error Output phase loss Motor overheat 1 Operator disconnection EEPROM write failure Motor overheat 2 RS 422A RS 485 communications error Communications error Control fault Zero servo error External fault PID feedback reference lost Undertorque detection 1 Undertorque detection 2 Overload during HSB Hardware error Note A Yes in the Applicable Inverters column indicates that the Inverter supports the correspond ing function a in the column indicates that the Inverter does not support the function 5 31 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 5 7 2 Control I O Remote I O Unit Status This remote I O setting is a default connection path setting which attaches the 16 bit Unit status data to the control I O remote I O function described in 5 6 1 Control I O Remote I O Operation This sec tion explains the I O format when the unit status is attached to the control I O remote I O For details on the function of specific input and output bits bytes refer to 5 6 1 Control I O Remote I O Operation or 5 7 1 Unit Status a I O Format Allocated Words e Outputs PLC to Inver
229. erter Parameters Edit Device Parameters x Instance No Attribute No 02 Value 0100 Result Jin Write Vv Refer to your manual for instance numbers attribute numbers and settings These depend on the Inverter being used areal ooa Details Reference Instance No Set the Instance Attribute and set value for the parameter to 7 2 14 Parameter Setting Attribute No and be changed Value Set the value in hexadecimal Result Displays the read result in hexadecimal Read Button Reads the set values of the specified parameter Instance Attribute from the Inverter Write Button Writes the set parameters to the Inverter Note An error message is displayed when a write error occurs Write to EEPROM To save the parameter set values in the Inverter even after a power interruption select this item before clicking the Write Button 7 52 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 3 6 Warning Torque Tab Page Use this tab page to make the settings for warning torque detection Edit Device Parameters x General OUT IN Operation Time Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters Current 1 during Accel Decel 255 ODA 655354 Current 2 during Frequency Agree fi 50 004 655354 Detection Filter Sensitivity 16 Low x Status Cane Details Reference Current 1 during Set the threshold used to monitor the current
230. erting two power supply wires Crimp terminal Cables We recommend the following Phoenix Contact crimp terminals and crimping tool Crimping Teal Model Al TWIN2x 0 5 8WH part number 3200933 Model UD06 part number1204436 3 17 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 2 6 Supplying Communications Power through T branch Tap When supplying the communications power supply through a T branch Tap attach the power supply cables V and V lines just like the communications lines When there is a communications power supply at just one point connect the shield wire and ground line 100 Q max at the same time as shown in the following diagram T branch Tap or Power Supply Tap CAN H te Shield Communications cable EO VA L BO Communications G power supply Stee Y gt HFG Ground to 100 Q max Ground to 100 Q max Ground to 100 Q max at one point only 3 2 7 Recommended Products e Recommended Crimp Terminals We recommend the following crimp terminals Phoenix Contact Al Series Al 0 5 8WH B part number 3201369 _ Insert cable and crimp Crimp terminal Cable 1 0 mm dia 14 2 6 mm dia We recommend the following crimp tool Phoenix Contact ZA3 3 18 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 e Screwdriver for Set Screws We recommend the following screwdriver for connectors with set screws OMRON XW4Z 00C Tip di
231. ervice Class ID Instance ID Service Data FINS command for PC node Code address Service data attribute No or attribute No and write data m Response Format e Normal Response ee o o TI I 1 vm Command code Completion code Number of bytes Destination Service Service data FINS command for PC transmitted pr Code read data address e Error Response msme Te me Command code Completion Number of bytes Destination Service Error Code FINS command for PC code transmitted node address Code e Failure or Timeout during Transmission mms 1 Command code Completion code FINS command for PC FINS error code 6 7 Message Communications Chapter 6 6 4 Motor Data Objects Class 28 Hex This section provides details on objects There are fourteen types of objects e Identify objects identification information Class 01 hex e Message router objects Class 02 hex e DeviceNet objects Class 03 hex Assembly objects Class 04 hex e DeviceNet connection objects Class 05 hex e Input terminal control objects Class 08 hex e Output terminal control objects Class 09 hex e Motor data objects Class 28 hex e Control supervisor objects Class 29 hex AC DC drive objects Class 2A hex Inverter parameter objects Class 64 hex e Unit parameter objects Class 94 hex e Unit manager objects Class 95 hex e Equipment manager objects Class 97 hex The three types of
232. et Master Unit is being used set the COS connection s OUT data to the same setting set for the poll connection s OUT data If the connection paths do not match it will not be possible to select both Use Poll Connection and Use COS Connection Reference The following connection path settings will be allocated automatically if you select the connection but leave the connection path settings blank Connection OUT PLC Inverter IN PLC lt dnverter Poll Slave s default connection path setting Slave s default connection path setting Bit strobe Not allocated Slave s default connection path setting COS Not allocated Unit Status 154 decimal 9A hex Cyclic Not allocated Unit Status 154 decimal 9A hex 8 Click the OK Button to close the Advanced Settings Window 5 7 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 9 Click the I O Allocation IN Tab and display the Edit I O Allocate Window In the Poll settings set Block 1 and Allocated 3300 user set In the COS settings set Block 2 and Allocated 3500 user set Edit I O Allocate Poll Block 1 z Start Word 3300 Allocated 3300 G Low C High Occupied 8 Byte cos Block 1 7 Start Word 3300 Allocated 3310 Low C High Occupied 2 Byte cave 10 Set the O Allocation OUT settings in the same way Set Block 1 and Allocated 3200 user set Edit LO Allocate Block im Start Word 3200 Allocated 9200 Low Hieh
233. etting unit Default setting Changes during opera tion Motor protection time con stant Alarm operation selection during motor overheating Motor overheating opera tion selection Motor temperature input fil ter time constant 10 79 Appendices Register Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute Momentary power loss detection Setting range 0to2 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting 0 Changes during opera tion Momentary power loss ride thru time 0 to 2 0 De pends on ca pacity Min baseblock time De pends on ca pacity Voltage recovery time De pends on ca pacity Undervoltage detection level 150 to 210 150 to 420 See note 190 380 See note Stall prevention selection during accel 0to2 Stall prevention level during accel 0 to 200 Stall prevention selection during decel 0to2 Stall prevention selection during running 0to2 Stall prevention level during running 30 to 200 Speed agreement detec tion level 0 0 to 400 0 Speed agreement detec tion width 0 0 to 20 0 Operation when frequency reference is lost Oor1 Frequency reference for loss of frequency reference 0 0 to 100 0 Number of auto restart attempts 0 to 10 Auto restart operation selection Oor1 Torque detection sele
234. evices connected to each of the I O terminals can be checked allowing the use of remote maintenance or other methods to identify errors in the connected devices 7 38 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Names can be set using up to 32 characters m Setting Methods Set the connected device comments in the following tab pages e Motor name General Tab Page of the Edit Device Parameters Window e Name of device connected to the output terminal I O comment OUT Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window e Name of device connected to the input terminal I O comment IN Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window e Setting the Motor Name 1 Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window 2 Set a user defined name such as the motor type or model in the Motor Name field Edit Device Parameters x General Tab Page in E j the Monitor Device arameter Iransmission arning Iorque verter Parameters H General OUT IN Operation Time Window gt Comment SYSTEM UNT Not Motor Name M12 Network Power Voltage 243 W 11 0 250V Unit Conduction Time 5555555 Hours 0 429496729 Hours gt Fan Conduction Time 4886888 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time 4888888 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Average Electric Power Calculation Cycle 10min x Default Connection Path Standard I O z Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 7 p Operatio
235. ffers 150 of with the rated capacity output current n037 Motor protection characteristics 0to2 n038 Motor protective time setting 1 to 60 n039 Cooling fan operation 0 1 n040 Motor rotation direction selection 0 1 n041 Acceleration time 3 0 0 to n042 Deceleration time 3 6000 n043 Acceleration time 4 n044 Deceleration time 4 n045 to Not used n049 Note values indicate those for 400 V class Inverters 10 36 Appendices Chapter 10 Function Group 2 n050 to n079 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Multi function input 1 terminal S1 1 to 27 Multi function input 2 terminal S2 1 to 27 Multi function input 3 terminal S3 0 to 27 Multi function input 4 terminal S4 1 to 27 Multi function input 5 terminal S5 1 to 27 Multi function input 6 terminal S6 1 to 27 Multi function input 7 terminal S7 1 to 27 34 35 Multi function input 1 MA MB MC 0 to 21 Multi function input 2 P1 PC 0 to 21 Multi function input 3 P2 PC 0 to 21 Frequency reference gain 0 to 255 Frequency reference bias 1400 to 100 Analog frequency reference filter time 0 00 to constant 2 00 Not used Frequency reference loss detection 0 1 selection
236. from the hourly average e The power value during output is sampled at fixed intervals and the average moving average is calculated from ten samples e The amount of power used by the system can be obtained without using special sensors or per forming any calculations In addition monitoring the power usage can help reduce energy usage and identify power consumption problems in the system e The sampling cycle can be selected from 10 min 30 min or 1 hour e The Configurator can be used to monitor the average power simply Note When applications with frequent starting and stopping are being used the output power varies widely according to the sampling timing Therefore the power usage cannot be monitored accurately This function is effective for applications that do not involve much starting and stop ping such as for conveyors and fans 7 10 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Application Example Programmable Controller DeviceNet Master Unit Average power data DeviceNet Inverter Power supply 0 Average power is calculated internally How much energy is being used m Setting Method 1 Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window 2 Select the desired calculation period from the pull down menu for the Average Electric Power Mon itor Calculation Cycle field Edit Device Parameters General i j t Device ers the Edit Device Par
237. gram a sequence to stop the program Special remote I O 3G3MV Read register 002C and check whether bit 14 fault output is ON serious fault If bit 14 is ON turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter and program a sequence to stop the program 3G3RV 3G3FV Read register 0010 and check whether bit 7 fault output is ON serious fault If bit 7 is ON turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter and program a sequence to stop the program Confirming Inverter Fault Status The fault information for the Inverter can be checked by using the following methods Identify the fault using the fault code table on page 10 and the troubleshooting information in the Inverter user s man ual and take the necessary corrective actions Function Meaning Operation indicators When there is an Inverter fault the details will be displayed on the Digital Operator of on Inverter the Inverter The fault log can be checked using the monitor function 3G3MV U 09 3G3RV 3G3FV U3 Unit status The fault code is stored in bits 8 to 14 Bit 15 Error flag is turned ON when a fault is detected When COS communications are used the remote I O error flag may be turned ON first Explicit messages An explicit message can be used to read the fault code of a detected fault Fault codes conforming to DeviceNet Class 29 Instance 1 Attribute OD Fault codes unique to this Unit Class 2A Instance 1 Attribute 70 Specia
238. h sign Torque refer ence Monitors U1 09 0 1 kW units 100 motor s rated torque with sign Input terminal status Monitors U1 10 1 ON Bits 0 to 6 correspond to ter minals S1 to S7 10 46 Output termi nal status Monitors U1 11 Bit 0 Terminals M1 and M2 1 ON Bit 1 Terminals P1 and PC 1 ON Bit 2 Terminals P2 and PC 1 ON Bit 3 to Not used 6 Bit 7 Terminals MA and MC 1 ON Bit 8 to 15 Not used Appendices Class 64 Instance Attribute Register number hex Operating sta tus Chapter 10 Content Monitors U1 12 Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating Bit 1 Zero speed 1 Zero speed Bit 2 Reverse operation 1 Reverse operation Bit 3 during fault reset input Bit 4 Frequency agree Bit 5 Operation ready Bit 6 Alarm Minor fault Bit 7 Fault Bit 8 to Not used 15 Cumulative operation time Monitors U1 13 1 hr units FLASH ID software No Monitors U1 14 Frequency ref erence volt age Terminal A1 input value Monitors U1 15 0 1 units 100 10 V with sign for voltage setting Multi function analog input Terminal A2 input value Monitors U1 16 0 1 units 100 10 V with sign for voltage setting Motor second ary current Monitors U1 18 0 1 units motor s rated secondary current 100 with sign Motor excita tion current
239. he Inverter operation per input operation formed when there is a communi EFO Fault Action cations external fault input from communications DeviceNet Com munications Card 0 Decelerates to a stop using C1 02 deceleration time fault detec tion Coats to a stop fault detection Decelerates to a stop using the C1 09 emergency stop time fault detection 3 Continues operating alarm detection Not used Do not set Trace Sample Tim Torque reference torque limit When operating in flux vector con selection from communications trol mode this setting enables or Torq Ref Lmt Sel disables torque reference and torque limit values input from com munications DeviceNet Communi cations Card See note 1 0 Torque reference torque limit from communications disabled 1 Torque reference torque limit from communications enabled Communications fault opera Select the Inverter operation per tion formed when a communications BUS Fault Sel fault is detected 0 Decelerates to a stop using C1 02 deceleration time fault detec tion Coats to a stop fault detection Decelerates to a stop using the C1 09 emergency stop time fault detection Continues operating alarm detection See note 2 Note 1 Be sure to set F9 05 to 0 when using flux vector control If used with the default setting 1 the torque reference torque limit will be interpreted as zero and there will b
240. he Unit DIP switch These pins have the following functions Pins 1 and 2 Baud rate Pins 3 Continue stop remote I O communications for error for Master functions Pin 4 Hold clear I O for communications error for Slave functions HOLD Communications connector This connector is connected to the Network communications cable Communications power is also supplied through this connector An XW4B 05C1 H1 D Parallel Connector with Screws is provided as the node connector 2 6 Example System Startup Chapter 2 m CJ1W DRM21 Indicators Unit No switch This rotary switch sets the single digit hexadecimal unit number of the Master on the DeviceNet network 23 ees 2 3 x 101 8817 Node address switches These rotary switches set the double digit decimal node address of the Unit DIP switches These pins have the following functions Pins 1 and 2 Baud rate Pins 3 Continue stop remote I O communications for error for Master functions Pin 4 Hold clear I O for communications error for Slave functions Communications connector This connector is connected to the Network communications cable Communications power is also supplied through this connector An XW4B 05C1 H1 D Parallel Connector with Screws is provided as the node connector
241. he information displayed in each tab page 7 6 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 3 Click the Close Button to close the Maintenance Information Window Note The setting methods used in each of the tab pages are described in the following pages 7 1 3 Network Connection Precautions When information is uploaded for the 3G3MV PDRT2 and 3G3RV PDRT2 Slaves and the DeviceNet Master Unit that are connected to the network a warning icon may be displayed under the Slave This icon indicates that the I O size of the Slave and DeviceNet Master Unit do not match If opera tion is continued without removing the cause of the warning icon it will not be possible to see other detected errors in the Unit status so always use the following method to match the I O sizes and can cel the warning icon m Operations Using the Configurator 1 Click the right mouse button over the icon of the corresponding Slave Inverter in the Network Configuration Window and select Property tor EDS File Tools Option Help i ew SS BAX 4 x 2 Maintenance Information Register to other Device Export Cut Ba Copy Property of Device OMRON 3G8F7 DRM21 ID 13 500K Bit s On line NUM 2 The Property Window for the 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit will be displayed the model name will depend on the type of Inverter used Click the I O Information Tab Click the Get the I O Size from the Scan List Button and
242. heating Motor overheating operation selection O to 2 Motor temperature input filter time con 0 00 to stant 10 00 Momentary power loss detection 0to2 0 Momentary power loss ridethru time 0 0 to 2 0 Depends on capacity Min baseblock time 0 1 to 5 0 0 Depends on capacity Voltage recovery time 0 0 to 5 0 0 Depends on capacity Undervoltage detection level 150 to 190 210 150 380 to 420 KEB deceleration time 0 0 to i 0 0 200 0 Momentary recovery time 0 0 to 25 5 Frequency reduction gain at KEB start 0 to 300 10 61 Appendices Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Stall prevention selection during accel Setting range 0to 2 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting 1 Stall prevention level during accel 0 to 200 120 See note 3 Stall prevention limit during accel 0 to 100 50 Stall prevention selection during decel 0to 3 1 Stall prevention selection during run ning 0to2 1 Stall prevention level during running 30 to 200 120 See note 3 Speed agreement detection level 0 0 to 400 0 0 0 Speed agreement detection width 0 0 to 20 0 2 0 Speed agreement detection level 3 400 0 to 400 0 0 0 Speed agreement detection width 3 0 0 to 20 0 2 0 Operation when frequency reference is lost 0 1 0 Frequen
243. ications Unit of the Inverter use DCA1 5C10 Thin Cables and branch them from the T branch Tap 1 12 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 1 5 DeviceNet System Configuration 1 5 1 System Configuration DeviceNet is a multi bit multi vendor network that combines controls and data on a machine line control level and that conforms to DeviceNet open field network specifications Two types of communications are supported 1 Remote I O communications that automatically transfer I O between Slaves and the CPU Unit of a PLC without any special programming in the CPU Unit and 2 Message communications are performed between a CPU Unit to which a DeviceNet Master Unit is mounted and Slaves by executing specific instructions such as CMND and IOWR depending on the model of PLC used from the program in the CPU Unit A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable following This allows the support of an even larger control system e I O area words can be flexibly allocated for remote I O communications e More than one DeviceNet Master Unit can be mounted to a single PLC e More than one DeviceNet Master Unit can be connected in a single Network m Fixed Allocation Configuration without a Configurator DeviceNet Master Unit CS1W DRM21 A CJ1W DRM21 C200HW DRM21 V1 CVM1 DRM21 V1 WU SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV or 3
244. ich performs no processing to disable the enter command Note 2 If the sent data is faulty word m bit 7 will be turned ON which will turn ON the Faulty Data Flag and the program will be stopped until the Faulty Data Reset Input Bit 000002 is turned ON 9 23 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Ladder Program 000000 Write Parameter Input Bit 003010 000100 DIFU 013 2 en 000001 000101 000001 000103 003010 JA O 003000 000102 003000 003001 000103 EN XFER 070 MOV 02 40002 40000 D00205 000001 0001 m MODEN MOVD 083 000 D00207 000100 0001 0010 BSET 071 gt or 003001 Use 5 CMP 020 Ser D00205 og Equals Flag P EQ m ANDW 034 i D00000 I 3 993005 FF00 ANDW 034 D00200 m 1 ORW 035 00FF D00200 D00208 0010 ANDW 034 D00205 D00206 ANDW 034 00FF D00000 D00209 00FF CMP 020 D00201 D00208 ANDW 034 Equals Flag P_EQ D00209 D00001 O 003003 FF00 003002 003003 D00202 C 003005 ORW
245. icit messages are sent and received as described below Basically explicit message communi cations are executed in 1 byte 8 bit units Explicit Message Communications Frame Header Node Service Class Instance Attribute Data Footer address code Item Content Header The header indicates the beginning of an explicit message and that the frame is an explicit message request response It is set automatically for DeviceNet so there is no particular need to be concerned with it Node address Request Set the node address of the Slave Master to be requested Response The node address of the responding Slave Master is set Service code Request Set the code of the requested service read write etc Response The MSB most significant bit of the requested service code is changed to 1 and returned Class Function classification major Indicates the classification of a function defined by classification DeviceNet To specify a function specify these three Instance Instance classification minor _ Codes classification Attribute Attribute Set values are assigned for each function Data Request Set the data to be written Response Read requested data or fault message are attached Footer This is the part that indicates the end of the explicit message and executes the CRC check It is set automatically for DeviceNet so there is no particular need to be con cerned with it 6 3 Message
246. ightmost digit Example To display the maxi mum frequency as 50 0 specify 1500 Note 1 Only the following parameters and monitor items will change for this setting Parameters n024 to n032 Frequency references 1 to 8 and inching frequency command n120 to n127 Frequency references 9 to 16 Monitor Items U 01 Referece frequency monitor U 02 Output frequency monitor Note 2 The settings are valid in either Local or Remote mode 4 5 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 4 2 SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and 3G3PV Settings In order to perform DeviceNet communications it is necessary to make settings for the Inverter according to the application Note The parameters set here are applied to the DeviceNet Communications Card when the power is turned ON Turn OFF the power after changing parameters and turn ON again to apply them 4 2 1 Frequency Reference Selection e Select the method for inputting frequency references to the Inverter Select the method suitable for the application Parameter Set value Contents Default setting Digital Operator Value set in d1 01 used Control circuit Set using analog input from control cir terminals cuit terminals RS 422 485 Set via RS 422 485 communications communications Optional Card Set using DeviceNet Communications Card Pulse input Set using pulse input from control circuit terminals e When frequency reference
247. ils Instance Attribute Content Setting range Default Vender ID Indicates the maker s code OMRON 47 2F hex Device Type Indicates the DeviceNet profile classification The Inverter corresponds to the AC DC Drive e Master Unit 0 AC DC Drive 2 Product Code Assigned to each series See note by each maker Revision Indicates overall software 02 01 revisions for the DeviceNet Communica tions Card Status Indicates the communica tions status of the DeviceNet Communica tions Card Serial Number Indicates the product Depends serial number of the on prod DeviceNet Communica uct tions Card 60000000 hex onwards Product Name _ Indicates product model See note number State Not supported Note The following table shows the contents of the Product Name and Product Code Communications Unit Card Model number Product Name Product Code 3G3MV PDRT2 3G3MV PDRT2 61 3D hex 3G3RV PDRT2 3G3PV PDRT2 3 3F hex 3G3RV PDRT2 4 40 hex 3G3FV PDRT2 2 3E hex 10 4 Appendices Chapter 10 10 2 2 Message Router Objects Class 02 Hex Message router objects have the function of distributing DeviceNet communications data Message router objects themselves are involved in internal processing only and do not have data to be exchanged externally Support Service Code Service code number hex Ser
248. imal 1770 hex Example 3 Finding the communications data for setting a one minute acceleration time with the fol lowing condition set Time scale attribute 1C 33 FD hex e Matching the acceleration time unit 1 minute 60 seconds 60 000 ms e Converting acceleration time to minimum unit Acceleration time unit 60 000 1 ms x 1 2 7 500 e Converting communications data to hexadecimal 7 500 decimal 1D4C hex e Communications Data Reference Example In this example the hexadecimal value OBB8 that has been read is converted to frequency with the following conditions set Number of poles set in n035 01 03 4 Speed scale attribute 16 1 e Converting communications data to decimal OBB8 hex 3 000 decimal e Converting from minimum unit to r min Communications data x unit 3 000 x 1 r min x 1 21 1 500 r min 10 2 11Unit Parameter Objects Class 94 Hex Support Service Code Service code number he Servise OE Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single 10 21 Appendices m Object Details Instance Attribute Default connec tion path Content Select one of the six con nection paths 00 Basic remote I O 01 Standard remote I O 02 Special remote I O 03 Control I O remote I O 04 Control I O remote I O Unit status 05 Control I O remote I O Multi function input monitor Setting range 00 to 05 10 2 12Unit Manager Object Class 95 Hex
249. in cables for which noise countermeasures have been implemented the following countermeasures may be effective e Communications Cable Shielding Suspend the communications cable shielding wire without grounding it This will filter the noise that flows from the ground to the communications cable and will filter the noise current that flows in the shielding wire e Communications Power Supply Suspend the communications power supply without grounding it This will also filter the noise that flows from the communications power supply ground to the communications cable or the noise cur rent that flows in the shielding wire The switching power supply is usually connected to the case and the capacitor as shown below The ground FG terminal must be suspended and the control panel for the power supply itself must be insulated 3 21 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 Switching Power Supply Configuration Switching power supply O Power AC power supply A AC input supply D circuit ii DC output Casing Suspending the Communications Power Supply S82J power supply DC power supply ja Insulating material such as baked board or acrylic board S82Y LILIN Mounting Tool When using S82J power supply When using other power supplies 3 3 4 Noise Prevention Wiring e To prevent inductive noise do not wire the communications line PLC
250. int Slaves Allocated 1 word e Slaves with more than 16 points Allocated multiple words For Slaves with an odd number of bytes the last byte will be the rightmost byte 63 4 remote I O words 63 4 words remote I O 20 6 remote I O words 50 6 words remote I O 13 8 remote I O words 37 8 remote I O words 10 Maximum Without number of explicit mes Inverters sages ve With explicit messages Master Unit 3 only 63 4 remote I O words 25 6 remote I O words 16 8 remote I O words 12 Maximum number of Inverters with more than one DeviceNet Master Unit Calculate from the number of words allocated in the data areas and the number of words allocated to the Inverters 4 or 6 words Note 1 The DM Area cannot be manipulated by bit so it cannot be allo cated for remote I O for Inverters Note 2 If the CPU Bus Link is used with a CVM1 CV series PLC the CPU Bus Link Area will be used for the CPU Bus Link Therefore the CPU Bus Link Area cannot be allocated to Inverters for use with DeviceNet if the CPU Bus Link is used 1 21 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 1 22 Chapter 2 Example System Startup 2 1 Basic Procedures and Configuration Examples 2 2 Preparations 2 3 Setting and Wiring Hardware 2 4 Starting Communications 2 5 Checking Operation Example System Startup Chapter 2 2 1 Basic Procedures and Configuration Examples The examples shown here provide the
251. ion Oor2 Multi function analog input terminal A2 function selec tion 0 to 1F Gain terminal A2 0 0 to 1 000 0 Bias terminal A2 100 0 to 100 0 10 78 Terminal A1 A2 switching Oor1 Appendices Register Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute Monitor selection terminal FM Setting range 1 to 40 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting Changes during opera tion Gain terminal FM 0 0 to 1 000 0 Bias terminal FM 410 0 to 110 0 Monitor selection terminal AM 1 to 40 Gain terminal AM 0 0 to 1 000 0 Bias terminal AM 4110 0 to 110 0 Analog output 1 signal level selection Oor2 Analog output 2 signal level selection Oor2 Slave address 0 to 20 See note 2 Communication speed selection O to 4 Communication parity selection 0to2 Stopping method after com munication error 0to 3 Communication error detec tion selection Oor1 Send wait time 5 to 65 RTS control ON OFF Oor1 Note 1 The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3 wire sequence Note 2 Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS 422A 485 communications m Protective Function Parameters Class 64 Hex Register In stance At tribute Motor protection selection Setting range S
252. ion input monitor Extended Control Command Unit status Unit Status Multi function input monitor Multi function Input Monitor Note It is possible to use remote I O communications combinations that do not exist in the Slave s default connection paths such as standard remote I O Unit status or special remote I O Unit status by selecting one more of the IN data elements and adding a COS connection Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 m Setting with an Explicit Message The remote I O function can also be switched by sending an explicit message If the DeviceNet Configurator is used the settings are easier to perform because of the customized settings windows but in some cases explicit messages may be preferred Refer to Chapter 6 Mes sage Communications and 10 2 Objects for details Example The default connection path can be changed by setting one of the following values for Class 94 hex Instance 01 hex Attribute 64 hex and then resetting the power supply Data Default connection path Basic I O Standard I O Special I O Extended Control I O Extended Control I O Unit status Extended Control I O Multi function Input Monitor Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 5 2 Switching the Remote I O Function To use remote I O operations other than the default setting standard remote I O it is necessary to switch the remote I O operation There are two ways to switch the remote I O fu
253. ions and data that is not allocated to remote I O can be used si multaneously with the remote I O functions 1 3 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Applicable to Various System Configurations Remote I O communications and message communications are available as communications func tions Normal control inputs are controlled by the remote I O communications function When neces sary the message communications function is used to monitor each Inverter It is possible to control the selection of either the communications control input or local control input Note When connecting the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card of the Inverter use DCA1 5C10 Thin Cables and branch them from the T branch Tap m System Overview Master Unit CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 C200HW DRM21 V1 Message communications function CVM1 DRM21 V1 CMND 490 Reading Inverter output current 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV or 3G3FV Inverter Remote I O function Output PC to Inverter Bit7 Bite BS Bit4 BRS Bit2 Bi Bito Net Ref Net Ctrl Reset Beerse Bpypard n RE Left frest net RE Lett h 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet isse reset Bis Communications Unit For 3G3MV Inverters nput Inverter to PC 3G3RV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card F
254. is input from the control terminal block or the input is being received from DeviceNet communications the corresponding multi function input terminal is considered as ON and the ON time is added m Contact Operations Monitor Function This function counts the number of times that one of the Inverter s control I O terminals goes ON OFF The number of ON OFF operations can be useful in maintenance e g it can indicate when a connected device needs to be replaced Note The input from the Inverter s control terminal block is ORed with the input from DeviceNet com munications just as it is in the Cumulative ON Time Monitor Function Conduction Time Monitor Function Totals and records the time that power is supplied to the Slave s internal circuit power supply The Slave can report through the Unit status flags when the cumulative ON time reaches the SV set in the Slave The DeviceNet Communications Unit Card has three set values that can be set indepen dently for the following three time monitoring functions e Main Unit operating time e Fan operating time e Electrolytic capacitor operating time Since the fan operating time and electrolytic capacitor operating time are used to indicate when those parts need to be replaced these monitoring times can be reset to zero with an operation in the Configurator s Device Monitor Window Baud Rate Auto detection In earlier Slaves it was necessary to set the baud rate with a DIP switch
255. it 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 to 15 Not used Frequency reference Monitors U1 01 Unit set with 01 03 Output fre quency Monitors U1 02 Unit set with 01 03 10 66 Output volt age refer ence Monitors U1 06 0 1 V units Appendices Class 64 stance In At tribute Register No Hex 0026 Output cur rent Chapter 10 Contents Monitors U1 03 Inverters of 7 5 KW or less 0 01 A units Inverters of 11 kW or more 0 1 A units 0027 Output power Monitors U1 08 0 1 kW units 0028 to 002A Not used 002B Sequence input status Bit 0 Multi function input terminal S1 1 Bit 1 Multi function input terminal S2 1 Bit 2 Multi function input terminal S3 1 Bit 3 Multi function input terminal S4 1 Bit 4 Multi function input terminal S5 1 Bit 5 Multi function input terminal S6 1 Bit 6 Multi function input terminal S7 1 Bits 7 to F Not used Inverter status Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating Bit 1 Zero speed 1 Zero speed Bit 2 Frequency matching 1 Matched Bit 3 User defined speed matching 1 Matched Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 1 Output frequency gt L4 01 Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1 Startup completed Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1 Detected
256. itor rightmost byte Output frequency monitor leftmost byte Torque reference monitor rightmost byte Torque reference monitor leftmost byte Output current monitor rightmost byte Output current monitor leftmost byte Note 1 A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Note 2 Control remote I O inputs and outputs are paired When using control remote I O be sure to set them together Note 3 Control remote I O objects do not conform to the AC DC drive profile but are specially set for this product Note 4 The P lock function position lock or zero servo function is valid only for a 3G3FV Inverter operating with flux vector control This bit is not used with other Inverters or control modes 5 21 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 ms Bit and Data Functions e Output Bit Details Forward stop Stop 1 Forward Reverse stop Stop 1 Reverse External fault input Fault reset Multi function contact output 1 External fault EFO See note 1 1 Reset Turn OFF open multi function contact output 0 0 Multi function input 0 1 Function set for multi function input LI 0 0 0 1 Turn ON close multi function contact output See note 2 Multi function output 0 Turn OFF open multi function output 1 Turn ON close multi function output See note 2
257. k Power Voltage drop IT pirme Forward Rar ee oF IV During Reverse Run Co ane Go ert ent Maintenance IV Frequency Agree Unit status report area e Using the Maintenance Information Window Click the General Tab in the Maintenance Information Window Note The differences from the Monitor Device Window are as follows e The voltage values shown in the Maintenance Information Window are when the maintenance information was refreshed and not the present values e The Clear Buttons for the peak and bottom values are not included in the Maintenance Infor mation Window 7 2 10 Unit Comment Function A user defined name can be set for each Unit up to 32 characters and the names can be stored in the Slaves m Setting Methods 1 Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window 2 Set the user defined name name of the device driving the Inverter etc in the Comment field 7 37 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 The General Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time Parameters Window gt Comment SYSTEM UNIT No1 gt Motor Name M12 Network Power Voltage 243 W 11 0 250 Unit Conduction Time 5555555 Hours 0 429496729 Hours gt Fan Conduction Time 888888 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time 4888888 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Average Electric Power Calcul
258. l Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window 2 Set the corresponding monitoring times in the Unit Conduction Time Fan Conduction Time and Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time fields General Tab Page in Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters n Edit pe General OUT IN RER arameters Window Comment SYSTEM UNIT No 1 Motor Name M12 gt Network Power Voltage 243 Vv 110 250 gt Unit Conduction Time 299998 Hours 0 429496729 Hours gt cy Fan Conduction Time 4888888 Hours 0 429496729 Hours gt Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time 4998888 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Average Electric Power Calculation Cycle 10min E Default Connection Path Standard I O Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 7 Operation for Communication Error Stop C Continue Default Setting Upload Download Compare Cancel The following table shows a guide to the settings Setting guide Remarks Unit Conduction 30 000 hr or higher 30 000 hr 8 hr per day for approximately 10 years Time Fan Conduction 6 000 to 8 000 hr 6 000 hr 8 hr per day for approximately 2 years Time Electrolytic Capaci 15 000 to 20 000 hr 15 000 8 hr per day for approximately 5 years tor Conduction Time 7 34 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Note 1 Set the values above using the guide for Inverter maintenance Refer to the inspection and maintenance information in the op
259. l remote I O 3G3MV Read registers 0021 Check the fault status from the bit signals that are output for an Inverter fault 3G3RV 3G3FV Read registers 0014 to 0018 Check the fault status from the bit signals that are out put for an Inverter fault The fault log can be checked using the monitor function U3 in registers 0090 to 0093 8 8 Communications Errors Chapter 8 Note Check the Digital Operator display see the following table to identify faults when DeviceNet communications are disabled e Faults when DeviceNet Communications are Disabled Inverter 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Content EEPROM fault There was an inconsis tency in the stored data or there is a hardware fault EEPROM write fault Countermeasure e Store the parameters again Turn the power supply OFF and then ON again e Replace the Inverter if the steps above do not elimi nate the fault Note This fault may occur if the number of overwrite operations exceeds 100 000 EEPROM is over written when a parameter change operation is executed from a Parameter Unit or an ENTER command is sent Overwrite the data in EEPROM as little as possible Option Unit Card self test error e Install the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card cor rectly e Align the case with the connector of the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card so that it is fully installed Option Unit Card self test error Install the DeviceNet Com
260. l value 0 KVA selection Depends on capacity Frequency reference setting method 0 selection Operation selection when digital opera tor is disconnected Cumulative operation time setting Cumulative operation time selection Initialize mode Do not change Fan operation time setting Fault trace fault history initialization See note 2 Note Values in parentheses are for Asian model Inverters s Motor Autotuning Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Motor 1 2 selection Autotuning mode selection Motor output power Motor rated voltage 200 0 400 0 Motor rated current Depends on capacity Motor base frequency 60 00 Number of motor poles 1 Motor base speed 1 r min Note 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 Set T1 02 and T1 04 when T1 01 is set to 2 This setting 2 is only possible for V f control or V f control with PG Note 3 The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given Note 4 The upper setting limit will be 150 0 Hz when C6 01 is set to 0 10 64 Appendices Chapter 10 10 6 3G3PV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 10 6 1 Inputting Control Frequency Read Write Class 64 In st
261. lative to motor rated torque Output current monitor Gives the value of the current being output by the Inverter 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV e 3G3MV Monitoring units SGSFV 0 01 A when the content of n179 is 0027 or higher 0 1 A when the content of n179 is 0026 or lower e 3G3RV 3G3FV Monitoring units 0 01 A for Inverters with maximum motor capacity of 7 5 kW max 0 1 A for Inverters with maximum motor capacity of 11 KW min Example Output current for 0 4 kW 3G3RV Inverter with monitor value of C8 hex C8 hex 200 decimal x 0 01 A 2 00 A Note 1 The data setting units can be changed in parameter n35 01 03 frequency reference set ting display unit Note 2 The torque reference monitor is valid only if open loop vector control sensor less vector control or flux vector control is set 5 6 2 Control I O Remote I O Multi function Input Monitor This remote I O setting attaches the 8 bit multi function input monitor data to the control I O remote I O function described in 5 6 1 Control I O Remote I O Operation The multi function input monitor allows the ON OFF status of the Inverter s control input terminals to be monitored at the Master For example if a particular multi function input terminal is set to Not used in the parameters a sensor or other input device can be connected to that terminal and the signal can be used in the PLC s ladder program Note The bits in the multi function input monitor will be
262. lave s default connection path setting any remote I O function can be selected from a pull down menu see the following table Use this method to set the remote I O function when the Master is a CVM1 CV series DeviceNet Master Unit C200HX HG HE or C200HS DeviceNet Mas ter Unit or another company s DeviceNet Master Unit Default Connection Path List Basic remote I O Standard remote I O Special remote I O Control I O remote I O Control I O remote I O Unit status Control I O remote I O Multi function input monitor m Selecting with the Connection Path The remote I O function can be switched with the Master s connection path setting The data allocated to a POLL or COS connection can be selected from a pull down list see the fol lowing table In a POLL connection input data and output data must be allocated in pairs Connection Path List Remote I O function IN OUT Basic remote I O Basic Speed Control Status Basic Speed Control Command Standard remote I O Standard Speed Control Status Standard Speed Control Command Special remote I O Special I O Response Special I O Command Control I O remote I O Extended Control Status Extended Control Command Control I O remote I O Extended Control Status Unit Status Unit status Extended Control Command Control I O remote I O Extended Control Status Multi function Input Monitor Multi funct
263. ld indicate the following output terminals 00 Multi function contact output 01 Multi function output 1 02 Multi function output 2 2 Double click the fields to be set or select the field to be set and click the Edit Button to display the setting window 7 28 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Edit Device Parameters Parameter Transmission Warning Torque General OUT IN Inverter Parameters Operation Time No 1O Comment Detection M Value Fault Action 01 Out Point 2 Time 10000 Clear 02 Out Point 3 Time 0 Clear gt a Parameter Transmission Warning Torque General OUT IN Edit Device Parameters Inverter Parameters Operation Time No 170 Comment SS Ta Clear Oh Out Praag rm BB Edit Terminal 02 Out Pc VO Comment r Detection Mode Time f Count PT 0 4294967296 Times Value 144 0 4294967295 Seconds Fault Action Clear Hold oros e IN Tab Page Settings OUT Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window Double click the fields to be set or click the Edit Button Set the name of the connected device Refer to 7 2 11Connected Device Comment Select either Time or Count as the detection mode Set the monitor time in seconds if using the cumulative ON time function Set whether to clear OFF or hold the output status when a communications error occurs 1 Click the IN Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window The
264. le when an operation command register number 0001 is read the control input previously set in communications will be returned It is not a monitor for the actual terminal block input sig nals e Run Commands Register Number 0001 Hex Content Forward stop 1 forward operation Reverse stop 1 reverse operation Multi function input 3 set with n052 Multi function input 4 set with n053 Multi function input 5 set with n054 Multi function input 6 set with n055 Multi function input 7 set with n056 10 30 Appendices Not used Content External fault input 1 EFO Fault reset 1 reset Not used Content Multi function contact output 1 ON Multi function output 1 1 ON Multi function output 2 1 ON Not used Chapter 10 Note Valid when 18 communications output is set for multiple function outputs 1 to 3 n057 to n059 By performing this setting the relevant output terminal can be turned ON and OFF through communications 10 4 2 Inverter Monitoring Functions All Inverter monitoring can be accessed To read Inverter status fault monitoring alarm monitoring I O status monitoring error log etc specify the register number from the following table and read the data Class 64 Instance Attribute Register number hex 0020 Function Status signal Content Refer to the following Status Signals table
265. leared to zero by clicking the Clear Button at the right of the item 7 2 8 Conduction Time Monitor Average Electric Power Displays the calculated value of the average power 7 2 2 Average Power Moni tor Function 7 55 Configurator Settings Details Chapter 7 Reference Network Power Voltage Displays the present value for the network power voltage Network Power Voltage Peak Displays the maximum value for the network power voltage Note This setting can be cleared to zero by clicking the Clear Button at the right of the item Network Power Voltage Bot tom Displays the minimum value for the network power voltage Note This setting can be cleared to zero by clicking the Clear Button at the right of the item 7 2 9 Network Power Sup ply Voltage Monitor Error Clear Button Clears the error at the Inverter Unit Sta tus Report Area 7 56 Unit Maintenance Notifies that the Inverter s operation time has exceeded the monitor value Fan Maintenance Notifies that the fan s operation time has exceeded the monitor value Electrolytic Capac itor Maintenance Notifies that the electrolytic capacitor s opera tion time has exceeded the monitor value 7 2 8 Conduction Time Monitor Network Power Voltage Drop Notifies that the network power voltage has dropped below the monitor value 7 2 9 Network Power Sup ply Voltage Monitor
266. lected Status is maintained when a warning torque is detected Not selected The status is refreshed every time Note 1 When Current 1 is set to 0 0 A the warning torque during acceleration deceleration is not detected Note 2 When Current 2 is set to 0 0 A the warning torque during frequency agreement is not de tected Note 3 A detection sensitivity level of 1 disables the filter A detection sensitivity level of 5 uses the average of 5 sampled current levels moving average as the detection value 7 14 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Monitoring Methods e Using the Monitor Device Window e Click the Warning Torque Tab in the Monitor Device Window e The following information will be displayed Monitor Device x General OUT IN Accel Decel Torque Current Accel Decel Peak Torque IV Warning Torque during Accel Decel Torque Current during Frequency Agree Peak Torque during Frequency Agree IV Warning Torque during Frequency Agree Clear Error Flag Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters 01A 044 014 044 Warning Torque Tab Page in the Monitor Device Window Clear Close Item Details Accel Decel Torque Cur rent Displays the current level during acceleration deceleration Note The present value is displayed during acceleration deceleration and the most recent value is displayed during frequency agreement
267. lectrical shock or fire Wiring maintenance or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the power supply confirming that the CHARGE indicator or status indicators is OFF and after waiting for the time specified on the Inverter front cover Not doing so may result in electrical shock Do not damage pull on apply stress to place heavy objects on or pinch the cables Doing so may result in electrical shock operation stoppage or burning Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the Unit Doing either of these may result in electrical shock injury or damage to the product Do not store install or operate the product in the following places Doing so may result in electrical shock fire or damage to the product e Locations subject to direct sunlight e Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifi cations e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases Locations subject to exposure to combustibles e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts e Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product Doing so may result in fire or malfunction Do not apply any strong impact Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction Be sure to wire correctly an
268. les 2 to 48 Motor phase to phase resistance 0 000 to 65 000 Motor leakage inductance Motor iron core saturation coefficient 1 Motor iron core saturation coefficient 2 10 95 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Mechanical loss 0 0 Torque compensation motor iron loss 14 See note 3 Select control method of motor 2 2 Motor 2 maximum frequency 60 0 Motor 2 maximum voltage y 200 0 400 0 Motor 2 maximum voltage frequency 60 0 Motor 2 intermediate frequency 3 0 See note 2 Motor 2 intermediate voltage 11 0 22 0 See note 2 Motor 2 minimum frequency 0 5 See note 2 Motor 2 minimum voltage 2 0 4 0 See note 2 Motor 2 rated current 1 90 See note 3 Motor 2 rated slip oe ee note 3 Motor 2 no load current 1 20 See note 3 Motor 2 number of motor poles 4 Motor 2 phase to phase resistance See Motor 2 leakage inductance Note 1 Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters Note 2 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The open loop vector control default settings are given above Note 3 The default setting depends upon the type of Inverter The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given above Note 4 The setting range i
269. letion output 2 output 1 contact See output note 4 Output frequency monitor rightmost byte Output frequency monitor leftmost byte Torque reference monitor rightmost byte Torque reference monitor leftmost byte Output current monitor rightmost byte Output current monitor leftmost byte Con Opera Warning Cooling Inverter Network nected tion time torque fan elec unit power compo over flag detected trolytic mainte voltage nent flag capaci nance drop flag mainte tor main flag nance tenance flag flag Error flag Inverter detected fault code Note 1 A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Note 2 Control remote I O inputs and outputs are paired When using control remote I O be sure to set them together Note 3 Control remote I O objects do not conform to the AC DC drive profile but are specially set for this product 5 33 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 Note 4 The P lock function position lock or zero servo function is valid only for a 3G3FV Inverter operating with flux vector control This bit is not used with other Inverters or control modes Note 5 The output words PLC to Inverter allocated for the control I O remote I O Unit status function are the same as the output words allocated for the regular control I O remote I O function Just one word is added to the allocated input words
270. levant function Attached data for writing e D Beginning Response Storage Word Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing responses to messages Message Communications Chapter 6 e C Beginning Control Code Word Specify the beginning word address of the area for storing the required control codes for message communications The control codes shown in the following table are required by DeviceNet Master Units Preset the data in consecutive words Word address Number of command data bytes 0000 to OOAO hex 0 to 160 bytes Set the amount of data from the beginning S word Number of response data bytes 0000 to 00A0 hex 0 to 160 bytes Set the size of the data storage area from the beginning D word Network address 0000 to 007F hex 0 to 127 A setting of 0000 hex indicates the local network When using CMND 490 with the CS CJ Series a network address must be set for each DeviceNet Master Unit The network address is edited using the routing table edit function of a Peripheral Device except for the Programming Console Command destination node address 00 to 3F hex Command destination Unit address 0 to 63 Set Master Unit FE or Master Unit s Node address of the Master Unit unit number 10 to 1F hex 0 to 15 The local node is specified if C 2 is set to 0000 hex and this byte is set to 00 hex Response Communications port number 0 to 7 Number of retries 00 to OF hex 0 to Set the c
271. level during 7 2 3 Warning Torque Accel Decel acceleration or deceleration Detection Note When this value is set to 0 0 A the current is not monitored during acceleration or deceleration Current 2 during Set the threshold used to monitor the current level during Frequency Agree frequency agreement while operating at constant speed Note When this value is set to 0 0 A the current is not monitored during frequency agreement Detection Filter Select the level of detection sensitivity from Sensitivity 1 Low to Sensitivity 5 High in the pull down menu Status Set whether to maintain the ON status in the Unit s Status Area Warning Torque Detection Flag when the current exceeds either of the thresholds set for Current 1 and Cur rent 2 7 53 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 3 7 Inverter Parameters Tab Page Use this tab page to set the main parameters for the Inverter being used Edit Device Parameters x General OUT IN Operation Time l Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters Parameter Group All parameters z 0001 n003 RUN command sel Digital operator 0002 n004 Frequency reference sel Control terminal to 10 V z 0003 n005 Stopping method sel Frequency reference 1 n024 0004 n006 Reverse rotation prohibit sel 0005 n007 STOP Key function sel 0006 n008 Frequency reference sel in local 0007 n009 Operator freq setting method
272. linder Watch 1 Cylinder Watch 2 Edit I Hold Status Edit Device Parameters Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time Cylinder Watch 2 480 ms 0 ms 0 ms Edit Terminal x 0 ms 0 ms Equipment Name Operation Watch1 Operation Time foo ms 0 65535ms cn Edit I Hold Status Setting range Details Equipment Name User set name Set any name for each device Note The name set here is displayed in the Equipment Name field Operation Time 0 to 65 535 ms Set the monitor value Note The name set here is displayed in the Operation Time field Hold Status Button Hold or do not hold Selected When an operation time monitoring error is detected this status is held Not selected The status is refreshed every time 7 25 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 s Monitoring Methods e Using the Monitor Device Window e Click the Operation Time Tab in the Monitor Device Window e The following information will be displayed Operation Time Tab Page in the General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters Monitor Device Window No Equipment Name Response Time Peak Value mn Operation Watch1 15 ms 20 ms Operation Watch2 15 ms 20 ms Operation Watch3 0 ms 0 ms Operation Watch4 0 ms 0 ms Operation Watch5 26230 ms 65535 ms Operation Watch6 26230 ms 65535 ms Clear Error Clear
273. line to line resistance Values in parentheses are for 400 V class Inverters The settings of E1 11 and E1 12 are ignored if set to 0 0 E1 13 will be the same value as E1 05 after autotuning The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The values for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter are given above 0 000 o 65 000 De pends on ca pacity 10 77 Appendices Chapter 10 Option Parameters Register Class 64 Hex In At stance tribute DeviceNet fault operation selection Setting range Setting unit Default setting Changes during opera tion Communications external fault input detection method selection Communications external fault input operation selec tion Class 64 Hex In At stance tribute Display unit selection for current monitor Terminal S3 function selec tion Setting range 0 to 6A Setting unit Default setting Changes during opera tion Terminal S4 function selec tion 0 to 6A Terminal S5 function selec tion 0 to 6A Terminal S6 function selec tion 0 to 6A Terminal S7 function selec tion 0 to 6A Terminal M1 M2 Select 0 to 38 Terminal M3 M4 select 0 to 38 Gain terminal A1 0 0 to 1 000 0 Bias terminal A1 00 0 to 100 0 Multi function analog input terminal A2 signal level select
274. ll devices to stop operation as required to ensure safety Equipment damage may result This is particulaly important when operation is set to continue for com munications errors because the Inverter will continue operation N WARNING Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the Unit Doing either of these may result in electrical shock injury or damage to the product N Caution Do not store install or operate the product in the following places Doing so may result in electrical shock fire or damage to the product Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifi cations A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution A Caution e Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature e Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases e Locations subject to exposure to combustibles e Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals e Locations subject to shock or vibration Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product Doing so may result in fire or malfunction Do not apply any strong impact Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction Be sure to wire correctly and securely Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block No
275. lue Button is not included in this window e The maintenance counter can be saved written to the EEPROM by clicking the Save Main tenance Counter Button 7 2 7 Contact Operations Monitor m Functions e This function counts the number of times that one of the Inverter s control I O terminals goes ON The number of contact operations can be useful in maintenance e g it can indicate when a con nected device needs to be replaced e The contact operations can be counted for each I O terminal and a monitor value set for each termi nal e When the number of contact operations of the terminal reaches or exceeds the monitor value the Connected Component Maintenance Flag will turn ON in the Unit s Status Area Note 1 The terminal is considered ON when the ON time reaches or exceeds 20 ms Note 2 The input from the Inverter s control terminal block is ORed with the input from DeviceNet communications Therefore for example when either the RUN STOP signal is input from the control terminal block or the input is being received from DeviceNet communications the corresponding multi function input terminal is considered as ON and the contact operation is counted Note 3 Either the cumulative ON time monitor refer to the previous function or the contact opera tions monitor can be set for each I O terminal Both functions cannot be set for the same terminal Note 4 The number of contact operations is written to the EEPROM in the
276. m ber of contact operations Service code number hex Service Reset return to initial status Get attribute single 10 12 Set attribute single 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF Chapter 10 Appendices Chapter 10 m Object Details Instance Attribute Content Setting range Default Object Software Indicates the software revi Revision sion of Class 08 The revision value increases when changes have been made Max Instance Indicates the number of out put terminals Depends on the Inverter being used 01 to 03 Value Terminal status One per 00 OFF 01 ON terminal Fault Action Hold clear output after fault 00 Hold 01 Clear Lifetime mode Maintenance count method selection 00 Conduction time 01 Number of ON operations Lifetime present Present value of the mainte value nance count Lifetime monitor Maintenance count compari flag son result ON when PV threshold 00 OFF 01 ON Lifetime thresh Lifetime monitor value 0000 0000 to old setting Set the cumulative time that FFFF FFFF the output is ON s or the number of contact opera tions 10 2 8 Motor Data Objects Class 28 Hex Motor data objects are data and functions related to motors connected to Inverters The motors that can be connected to Inverters are squirrel cage inductive motors so the Motor Type is always 7 The motor s rated current
277. mensions Side view Front view 0 6 mm 3 5mm 3 19 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 3 Communications Line Noise Prevention 3 3 1 Communications Line Noise The communications line sends and receives high speed pulse signals and checks whether the data is correct by checking the sequence of the signals If the amount of noise on the communications line is too great the interference will alter the communications signal data and communications will be impossible Communications lines are more sensitive and require higher speeds than normal I O lines so be sure that noise does not interfere with communications Use the preventative noise coun termeasures described here when configuring the system to ensure smooth system start up 3 3 2 Grounding the Network Grounding the Network The DeviceNet Network must be grounded at only one location so that a ground loop is not created The ground should also be connected as close as possible to the center of the Network Connect the cable shield to the ground terminal on the communications power supply and then connect to a ground of 100 Q max as shown in the following diagram Power Supply Tap V i V CAN H CAN H Shield Shield ie Communications cable CAN L CAN L v v Ground terminal Ground 100 Q max If more than one communications power supply is connected to the same Network ground only the one nearest the center of the Network Do not
278. mitted in hexa decimal e Convert to hexadecimal values with the function parameter minimum setting unit taken as 1 Example To set a frequency reference of 60 Hz when the minimum setting unit is 0 01 Hz 60 0 01 6000 1770 hex e Negative numbers are expressed as two s complements A 3G3MV is used in this example Example To set a frequency reference bias n061 of 100 when the minimum setting unit is 1 100 1 100 decimal 0064 hex 400 FF9C hex 0064 Hex FF9B Hex FF9C Hex e If the original data is already in hexadecimal it is transmitted as is Note All parameters in the 3G3MV Series are in decimal so convert them to hexadecimal e Set bits that are not used to 0 Do not set data for unused registers 6 18 Message Communications Chapter 6 m Using the ENTER Command e Storing Parameter Data in a 3G3MV Using the ENTER Command To store the parameter data received in EEPROM send an ENTER command as shown in the fol lowing table To store a series of data for more than one parameter send an ENTER command after completing all the settings Data type ENTER command to write to EEPROM Transmission Class 100 decimal 64 hex Instance 255 decimal FF hex Attribute 253 hex FD hex Inverter Operation Previously received param eter setting data is stored in EEPROM Note The maximum num ber of write opera tions that can be performed to EEPROM is 100 000
279. mote I O function is more limited than the standard remote I O function Standard remote I O This remote I O function is the factory setting in the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card General Inverter control can be performed with this remote I O function Special remote I O This remote I O function is a proprietary OMRON format not the remote I O format specified by DeviceNet The special remote I O function can be used to read set all of a 3G3MV 3G3RV or 3G3FV Inverter s parameters and take advantage of all of the Inverter s functions Control I O remote I O This remote I O function is a proprietary OMRON format not the remote I O format specified by DeviceNet The control I O remote I O function s features and arrangement match the Inverter s control terminal I O signals so it can be used for communications with the Inverter s multi function inputs There are also default settings in which the Unit status 16 bits or multi function input monitor data 8 bits is attached to this remote I O function for allocation in the Master data connection path setting 5 2 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 5 1 2 Selecting the Remote I O Function Select the desired remote I O function with the DeviceNet Configurator or an Explicit message Refer to 5 2 Switching the Remote I O Function for details on switching the remote I O function from the Configurator m Selecting with the Default Connection Path With the S
280. munications Unit Card cor rectly Turn the power supply OFF and then ON again e Replace the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card if the steps above do not eliminate the fault Option Unit Card model code error e Install the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card cor rectly e Turn the power supply OFF and then ON again e Replace the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card if the steps above do not eliminate the fault Option Unit Card mutual test error A communications error occurred between the DeviceNet Communica tions Unit Card and Inverter e Install the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card cor rectly e Align the case with the connector of the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card so that it is fully installed e Check whether the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card s FG wire is properly connected to the Inverter Take steps to reduce noise in the DeviceNet commu nications lines See 3 3 Communications Line Noise Prevention for details e Replace the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card if the steps above do not eliminate the fault 8 9 Communications Errors Chapter 8 Fault Codes The DeviceNet Unit Card has two kinds of fault codes DeviceNet fault codes and DeviceNet Com munications Unit Card fault codes e DeviceNet fault codes Fault code outputs unified in DeviceNet Class 29 Instance 01 Attribute OD e DeviceNet Communications Unit Card fault codes Fault codes for Inverter ma
281. n Connector terminal block TC Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 e 3G3RV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card O fe j2 C1 Green l bgt STEEN MS indicator Terminal block TC LIG Geer indi lop i 11 Red NS indicator Ol O I ER A A 4 le o j o C lt T T Node address setting switches x10 x1 Osn Shield grounding wire 3 1 2 Terminal Block The following table provides details of the terminal block which connects to the communications line Sticker color Cable color Details Black Communications power supply ground Blue Communications data low side Shield Shield connection White Communications data high side Red Communications power supply 24 V DC 3G3MV PDRT2 Terminal Block 3G3RV PDRT2 Terminal Block Black Blue White Red Black Blue White Red fe A o 0 Y l i a iy 666600 bm mlm 3 3 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 1 3 Operation Indicators The DeviceNet Communications Unit Card has 2 operation indicators that show the status of the power and communications as described in the following table Indicator Display Meaning Color Status Lit Power is being supplied and the Unit Card is operating normally Flashing Initial settings or necessary preparations for
282. n 00 No Inverter output or operating in reverse 01 Forward operation or DC braking Turns ON even for DC braking during reverse operation During reverse run 00 No Inverter output or operating in forward 01 Operating in reverse reverse operation output status Becomes 00 with DC braking Inverter Ready 00 Preparing Initial processing not drive mode fault 01 Inverter ready Inverter can receive run command Fault 00 Normal 01 Fault Alarm minor fault 00 Normal 01 Alarm minor fault Fault Reset 00 Normal status 01 Fault reset Fault code Indicates the contents of fault that occur See the fault code list on the fol lowing page Control From Net Run signal input status See note 2 00 Operating by a method other than DeviceNet that is set in n003 b1 02 01 Operating by DeviceNet DeviceNet Fault mode See note 3 00 Stop operation 01 Continue operation 02 Maker s specifications 3G3MV 00 01 3G3RV 3G3FV 3G3MV 00 3G3RV 02 3G3FV 02 Chapter 10 Appendices Chapter 10 Instance Attribute Content Setting range Default Force Fault Trip 00 Normal operation Communica 01 Communications tions external external fault input fault input Force Status 00 Normal status Communica 01 Communications tions external external fault detected fault input status Invert
283. n Window History Graph r Trigger Time Curent status La Forward Cmd During Accel Decel C Reverse Cmd 10ms 0 04 During Accel Dece Pene 20ms 004 During Accel Decel 30ms 004 During Accel Dece Error 4O0ms 0 04 During Accel Decel 50ms 004 During Accel Dece Current Trace 60ms 004 During Accel Dece eenigen 70ms 004 During Accel Dece 10ms 80ms 0 04 During Accel Dece 90ms 004 During Accel Decel 100ms 0 14 During Accel Dece 110ms 014 During Accel Decel 120ms 01A During Accel Dece 130ms 01A During Accel Decel During Acce Item Details Time Displays the time determined from the current trace sampling cycle Current Displays all current levels traced in every sampling cycle Status Displays whether the sampling timing is during acceleration deceleration or fre quency agreement Save Button Converts the traced data into CSV format and saves as a file Note When this button is clicked the Save File Window is displayed 7 20 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 e Graph Tab Page The graph shown in this tab page consists of a vertical axis representing the current level shown in the History Tab Page and a horizontal axis representing the time Note Other setting items and button functions in this tab page are the same as in the History Tab Page Maintenance Information x Current Trace Tab Page and General OUT IN Operation Time War
284. n Chapter 15 Troubleshooting and Maintenance of DeviceNet Operation Manual W267 8 3 Communications Errors Chapter 8 8 2 Message Communications Errors m Explicit Message Errors If an explicit message is sent but communications do not end normally one of the following error codes will be returned with service code 94 Check the meaning of the error message and either correct the message or adjust the timing of the message Meaning Countermeasures Normal end response The requested service does not exist Correct the service code and send the data again An invalid attribute was detected Check and correct the attribute values and send the data again The requested service cannot be executed in the Stop the Inverter and send the data again current object mode or status A request has been sent to change an attribute Check and correct the service code and attribute that cannot be changed values and send the data again There is insufficient data to execute the service Correct the data size and send the data again The attribute for the service does not exist Check and correct the service code and attribute values and send the data again These is too much data to execute the service Correct the data size and send the data again The specified object does not exist Check and correct the class and instance values and send the data again The parameters are invalid or the data is outside Check and
285. n for Communication Error Stop C Continue Default Setting Upload Download Compare e Setting the I O Device Names 1 Click the OUT Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window 2 Set a user defined name output device name in the O Comment field 3 Click the IN Tab 4 Set a user defined name input device name in the O Comment field Note For details on the setting window refer to Setting Methods under 7 2 6 Cumulative ON Time Monitor m Checking Methods Check the set connected device comments in the following tab pages e Motor name Motor Name field on the General Tab Page of the Monitor Device Window or Maintenance Information Window 7 39 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 e Output device name O Comment field on the OUT Tab Page of the Monitor Device Window or Maintenance Information Window e Input device name I O Comment field on the IN Tab Page of the Monitor Device Window or Maintenance Information Window 7 2 12 Communications Error Log Monitor Function e The error status for the last four communications errors can be monitored e The communications error details network power supply voltage at the time of the error and Unit ON time are displayed The communications error log can be cleared s Monitoring Methods e Using the Monitor Device Window Click the Error History Tab in the Monitor Device Window e The details are displayed in the Content Network Power Voltage and
286. n the mechanical system Such as a loose chain low bearing oil or worn out equipment so preventative maintenance can be per formed Note This function generates a warning alarm so operation will continue m Current Trace Function This function traces samples and records the output current waveform to the motor Troubleshoot ing can be performed easily without connecting measuring equipment The Configurator can be used to set the current trace s trigger setting set the sampling cycle and display the current wave form Operating Time Monitor Function This function can perform a high speed calculation in the Slave independent of the ladder program to determine the time required for an input to go ON after a particular signal or reference goes ON The Slave can report through the Unit status flags when the operating time exceeds the SV set in the Slave Cumulative ON Time Monitor Function This function totals the time that one of the Inverter s control I O terminals is ON For example if the RUN output s ON time is totaled it is possible to calculate the Inverter s operating time and monitor equipment operating time without using the ladder program Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Note The input from the Inverter s control terminal block is ORed with the input from DeviceNet com munications so the input is considered ON when either input source is ON For example when either the RUN STOP signal
287. nagement Class 2A Instance 01 Attribute 70 Fault code stored in unit status bits 8 to 14 Error flag in bit 15 DeviceNet Unit Card Fault detection supported Operator Content fault code fault code 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3FV display 3G3PV Inverter normal Fuse open Undervoltage main Control power supply fault Undervoltage 3G3RV MC fault Short circuit Ground fault Overcurrent Main circuit overvoltage Overheat 3G3MV RV Inverter overheat Overheat 3G3RV Inverter overheat Motor overload Inverter overload Overtorque detection 1 Overtorque detection 2 Braking transistor failure Braking resistor overheating External fault Terminal 3 External fault Terminal 4 External fault Terminal 5 External fault Terminal 7 External fault Terminal 6 External fault Terminal 8 Cooling fan fault Overspeed Speed deviation PG is disconnected Input phase loss 3G3MV RV input phase loss Output phase loss Motor overheat 1 Operator disconnection EEPROM write failure Motor overheat 2 MEMOBUS transfer error 8 10 Communications Errors Chapter 8 DeviceNet Unit Card Fault detection supported Operator Content fault code fault code 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3FV display hex 3G3PV Communications error Communic
288. nal lines and then connect them to the termi nal block a Wiring the Inverter Connect the power supply 200 VAC to the Inverter When required connect an I O power supply for I O devices and the I O signal lines to the Inverter Note Refer to the Inverter s operation manual for details on wiring the terminal block Example System Startup Chapter 2 2 4 Starting Communications After setting and wiring the hardware turn ON the communications power supply the internal power supply of each node and the I O power supply and then start communications using the following procedure 2 4 1 Creating I O Tables for the DeviceNet Master Unit I O tables must be created in the CPU Unit to distinguish between the different Slaves mounted to the PLC Turn ON the PLC to which the DeviceNet Master Unit is mounted connect the Peripheral Devices to the PLC and create the I O tables After the I O tables have been created turn OFF the power to the PLC The following example shows the procedure for creating I O tables using a Programming Console For details on creating I O tables refer to the operation manual for the Peripheral Device being used Turn ON the power to the Master Unit PROGRAM Switch the CPU Unit of the Master Unit to PROGRAM mode csi 000000 CTO0 w WRITE 2 10 Example System Startup Chapter 2 2 4 2 Starting the System Turn ON the comm
289. nction code will be set to 1 in the response 5 5 2 Special Remote I O Communications Timing With special remote I O communications it is possible to use all of the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3FV functions such as frequency setting control input setting error monitoring output frequency monitoring and so on These functions are utilized by setting the register numbers and connecting to the various Inverter functions To use these functions properly be sure to use the following method to handle the data and provide a program for switching the communications pro cessing s Matching Function Codes and Register Numbers e In the remote I O outputs PLC to Inverter set the function code register number and set data for the function to be executed e Compare CMP the function codes and register numbers of the set remote I O outputs and the remote I O inputs Inverter to PLC If they agree proceed to the next process Note If data is repeatedly written to the same register number it cannot be handled Be sure to keep performing processes with different function codes or register numbers If it is necessary to write repeatedly to the same register number then alternately write to and read from that regis ter Handling data is made possible by changing function codes 5 18 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 m Handling Illustration Function code register number 10 Hex 10 Hex 03 Hex 03 Hex 0002 Hex 0001 He
290. nction with the DeviceNet Configurator e Open the Slave s Edit Device Parameters Window in the Configurator select the desired remote I O function from the pull down list default connection path setting and download the settings e Open the Master s Edit Device Parameters Window in the Configurator and set the connection path in the Advanced setting Window 5 2 1 Switching with the Default Connection Path Slave Use the following procedure to switch the Slave s remote I O function with the Configurator m Procedure 1 Select the desired Slave s icon in the Configurator right click and select Parameters Edit from the popup menu to open the Edit Device Parameters Window 2 Click the General Tab and execute the Upload operation to read the Slave s parameters 3 On the General Tab Page select the desired remote I O function pattern from the Default Connec tion Path List Edit Device Parameters Parameter Transmission General OUT Comment Motor Name Network Power Voltage Unit Conduction Time Fan Gonduction Time Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time Average Electric Power Calculation Cycle Default Connection Path Last Maintenance Date Warning Torque Inverter Parameters IN Operation Time SYSTEM UNIT No 1 M12 243 v 110 250v 5955955 Hours 0 429496729 Hours 4888888 Hours 0 429496729 Hours gt 4888888 Hours 0 429496729 Hours gt 10min h Standard I 0
291. nctions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Connect Multiple PLCs to the Same Network A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable connection of more than one Master to the Network allowing message communications between PLCs and between multiple groups of PLCs and Slaves This allows the DeviceNet Network to be used as a common bus to unify controls while reducing wiring s Handle Multi point Control and Line Expansions with Multi layer Networks A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable mounting more than one DeviceNet Master Unit to a single PLC allowing control of many more points This feature can easily handle line expan sions and other applications m Free Remote I O Allocation A Configurator sold separately can be used to enable flexible allocation of I O i e in any area and in any order This allows I O allocations that suit the application to simplify programming and enable effective usage of PLC memory areas m Handle Slaves with Different Response Speeds A Configurator sold separately can be used to set the communications cycle time enabling usage of Slaves with slow response times u Easily Expand or Change Lines with Various Connection Methods Use a multi drop trunk line T branch multi drop lines or daisy chain drop lines All three connection methods can be combined to flexibly construct a Network that meets the needs of the application Note For connecting the DeviceNet Commun
292. ncy units of refer ence setting and monitor 0 to 39 999 LCD brightness 0to 5 LOCAL REMOTE key enable disable Oor1 10 81 Appendices Register Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute STOP key during control circuit terminal operation Setting range Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting Changes during opera tion Parameter initial value 0 KVA selection De pends on ca pacity Frequency reference setting method selection 0 Operation selection when digital operator is discon nected 0 Cumulative operation time setting Cumulative operation time selection Initialize mode Fan operation time setting 10 82 Fault history initialization Appendices Chapter 10 10 7 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 10 7 1 Inputting Control Frequency The Inverter s various control inputs are allocated to the registers shown in the following table For example to set the frequency reference and begin operation first set the reference value to the fre quency reference register 0001 and then write the run command to the Inverter s run command register 0000 Note 1 Set values are retained until changed by the next writing operation Note 2 The following registers are in RAM so they are all cleared to zero when the Inverter s power supply is tu
293. ngle branch and the other makes three branches but the cable connections are the same for both The connectors indicated by asterisks in the following diagrams have the least resistance and these connectors should be used for the trunk line connections When using a T branch Tap on a drop line connect the longest drop line to these connectors e DCN1 1C T branch Tap Use for trunk line of longest drop line e DCN1 3C T branch Tap Use for trunk line of longest drop line e T branch Tap Connectors The required number of connectors on cable side for T branch Taps are supplied with the product Name Plug with Screw Flange Model XW4B 05C1 H1 D Manufacturer OMRON Specifications One per terminal opening with set screws 3 15 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 Align the cable connector with the socket on the T branch Tap as shown in the following diagram and fully insert the connector into the socket Tighten the set screws to secure the connection Tighten the screws to a torque of 0 3 N m ee ae Note To avoid damaging the cable or breaking wires do not pull on the cable or bend it too sharply when connecting it to the T branch Tap Also never place heavy objects on top of the cable 3 2 4 Connecting Terminating Resistors Terminating resistors must be connected at each end of the
294. ning Torque Current Trace Error History Graph Tab Page In the Maintenance Information Window History Graph Trigger Forward Cmd Reverse Cmd Frequency Agree Error Current Trace Sampling Cycle 50ms z 7 2 5 Operating Time Monitor Function m Functions e This function can perform a high speed calculation in the Slave independent of the ladder pro gram to determine the time required for an input to go ON after a particular signal or reference goes ON e By setting the monitor value the operating time of the devices connected to the Inverter motor and peripheral devices can be monitored e The Operation Time Over Flag in the Unit s Status Area turns ON when the operating time exceeds the monitor value 7 21 Chapter 7 e The combination of start signal and command and completion signal for operating time measure ment are determined as shown in the following table Configurator Settings Operating time measurement trigger Remarks Measurement start condition Measurement completion condition Input 4 ON Input 5 ON Input 3 ON Input 5 ON Input 4 ON Output to input Output to input Input to input Input to input Forward reverse run com mand to input Forward reverse run com mand to input Multi function contact output ON Multi function output 1 ON Input 2 ON Input 4 ON Input 0 is ON input 1 is ON or a forward reverse run command is sent from the network
295. nly when 1 is set for C6 01 and F is set for C6 02 10 54 Appendices Chapter 10 m Reference Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Frequency reference 1 Oto max 0 01 Hz Frequency reference 2 fa GEN Frequency reference 3 quency See note Frequency reference 4 Frequency reference 5 Frequency reference 6 Frequency reference 7 Frequency reference 8 Frequency reference 9 Frequency reference 10 Frequency reference 11 Frequency reference 12 Frequency reference 13 Frequency reference 14 Frequency reference 15 Frequency reference 16 Jog frequency reference Frequency reference upper limit oo o RO 0 0 0 Oo 00 00 00 00 Frequency reference lower limit oO Master speed reference lower limit Oo Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency 3 Jump frequency width Oo oO O Oo o ne ua O Frequency reference hold function selection Speed limits Field weakening level Field frequency Note Values exceeding the max output frequency E1 04 and E3 02 cannot be set Set the motor constant parameters first 10 55 Appendices Chapter 10 Motor Constant Parameters Class 64 hex In stance At tribute Input voltage
296. ns the corresponding multi function input ter minal is considered as ON and the ON time is added Note 2 Either the cumulative ON time monitor or the contact operations monitor refer to the follow ing function can be set in each I O terminal Both functions cannot be set for the same ter minal Note 3 The total ON time is written to the EEPROM in the DeviceNet Communications Unit or Card approximately every six minutes Therefore depending on the power OFF timing up to six minutes worth of data may be lost To monitor more closely click the Save Mainte nance Counter Button located on the General Tab Page of the Maintenance Information Window immediately before turning OFF the power The maintenance information including the total ON time will be written to the EEPROM 7 27 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 a Application Example Programmable Controller T T Notifies replacement time DeviceNet Inverter SEN y Rotate command 10 gt is ON time is totaled internally l Motor ow long has the device been operating Output device Input device Setting Methods Make the settings for the output terminal or input terminal on the OUT Tab Page or IN Tab Page of the Edit Device Parameters Window e OUT Tab Page Settings 1 Click the OUT Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window The numerals 00 to 02 in the No fie
297. ns start according to the scan list For details refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual W267 and the DeviceNet Configurator Opera tion Manual W328 e Fixed I O Allocations Slave I O is allocated in the DeviceNet I O area IN Area OUT Area in the DeviceNet Master Unit in the same order as the Slave node addresses When fixed allocations are used the scan lists are automatically created and registered using the DeviceNet Master Unit s software switches The scan list is enabled as soon as it is registered and remote I O communications start according to the scan list When scan list is enabled the mode is called the scan list enabled mode The registered scan lists can be cleared using the software switches When scan lists are cleared disabled the mode is called the scan list disabled mode 2 11 Example System Startup Chapter 2 m Creating and Registering Fixed Allocation Scan Lists The method of creating and registering scan lists for fixed allocation using Programming Console and a CS CJ series DeviceNet Master Unit is explained here For details on operating Peripheral Devices refer to the operation manual for the Peripheral Device being used with the PLC For details on creating scan lists refer to the operation manual for the DeviceNet Master Unit e Creating and Registering Scan Lists Use the following procedure to create register and enable the scan lists In the following example n 1500 25 x unit
298. nt value can be reset to zero operating time e When the Main Unit operating time reaches or exceeds the monitor value the Unit Maintenance Flag will turn ON in the Unit s Status Area e When the fan operating time or electrolytic capacitor operating time reaches or exceeds the monitor value the Unit Maintenance Flag fan or electrolytic capacitor will turn ON in the Unit s Status Area e Since the fan operating time and electrolytic capacitor operating time are used to indicate when those parts need to be replaced these monitoring times can be reset to zero Note The Conduction Time is written to the EEPROM in the DeviceNet Communications Unit or Card approximately every six minutes Therefore depending on the power OFF timing up to six minutes worth of data may be lost To monitor more closely click the Save Maintenance Counter Button located on the General Tab Page of the Maintenance Information Window immediately before turning OFF the power The maintenance information including the Con duction Time will be written to the EEPROM 7 33 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 m Application Example Programmable Controller Unit Notifies replacement time DeviceNet Inverter How long has the device been operating he conduction time is totaled internally Motor m Setting Methods 1 Click the Genera
299. numerals in the No field indicate the following input terminals Details Terminal S1 multi function input 1 3G3RV 3G3PV Terminal S1 forward run stop Terminal 1 forward run stop Terminal S2 multi function input 2 Terminal S2 reverse run stop Terminal 2 reverse run stop Terminal S3 multi function input 3 Terminal S3 multi function input selection 1 Terminal 3 multi function con tact input 1 7 29 Configurator Settings Details Chapter 7 Terminal S4 multi function input 4 3G3RV 3G3PV Terminal 54 multi function input selection 2 Terminal 4 multi function con tact input 2 Terminal S5 multi function input 5 Terminal S5 multi function input selection 3 Terminal 5 tact input 3 multi function con Terminal S6 multi function input 6 Terminal S6 multi function input selection 4 Terminal 6 tact input 4 multi function con Terminal S7 multi function input 7 Terminal S7 multi function input selection 5 Terminal 7 multi function con tact input 5 Terminal 8 multi function con tact input 6 I HY oe pm PS OE Se 2 Double click the field to be set or select the field to be set and click the Edit Button to display the setting window Edit Device Parameters IN Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window Inverter Parameters Operation Time Parameter Transmission
300. nverter 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit Occupies 2 input words 32 input bits 2 output words 32 output bits Node 03 Example System Startup Chapter 2 2 2 Preparations 2 2 1 Selecting Units Select the following Units as shown in 2 1 2 System Configuration Example DeviceNet Master Unit CS1W DRM21 Slave Units DRT2 ID16 DRT2 OD16 3G3MV PDRT2 3G3MV A2001 DRT2 OD16 XWT OD08 There is a complete line of OMRON DeviceNet Master Units and Slave Units available that are compatible with DeviceNet Select Units that suit the needs of the system 2 2 2 Wiring Either Thick Cables or Thin Cables can be used to wire a DeviceNet Network Flexible branching of cables is possible by using either T branch Taps or multi drop connections Restrictions on the maximum network length and total branch line length depend on the baud rate and type of cable used For details on network configurations and specifications refer to the DeviceNet Operation Manual W267 Here Thin Cables are used and T branch connection are used to connect Slaves to the trunk line as shown in 2 1 2 System Configuration Example Example System Startup Chapter 2 2 2 3 Communications Power Supply Each node Master or Slave must be supplied with a 24 V DC power supply for proper DeviceNet communications The communications power however can be supplied by communications cables and does not require separate wiring For systems th
301. nverting communications data to decimal OBB8 hex 3 000 decimal e Converting from minimum unit to r min Communications data x unit 3 000 x 1 r min x 1 21 1 500 r min 6 17 Message Communications Chapter 6 6 7 Reading and Writing Parameters Class 64 Hex Inverter parameters can be read and written using explicit messages Class 100 decimal 64 hex has been provided with instances and attributes corresponding to each parameter in the Inverter Send an explicit message to the class instance or attribute of the parameter to be set as described below Parameter Database All parameters in the parameter database have been unified to 1 word 16 bit data Even settings of 0 and 1 will be treated as 1 word 16 bit data in explicit messages Note When sending or receiving 1 word 16 bit data in an explicit message the leftmost and right most bytes will be reversed Accordingly when reading or writing data the attribute value will be in the upper byte the lower byte will contain the lower byte of the data and the upper byte of the data will be in the upper byte of the next word e Communications line data is sent and received in the order of lower byte then upper byte PLC internal processing data such as when sending commands are sent and received in the order of upper byte then lower byte Parameter Read and Write Data Read data and write data for parameters is calculated as shown below and then trans
302. o when the Inverter s power supply is turned OFF Note 3 When the remote I O function is being used the run command and frequency reference are overwritten at regular intervals Class 64 Register Content Instance Attribute Number hex Reserved Frequency reference Bit 0 Run stop command 1 Run 0 Stop Bit 1 Reverse stop command 1 Reverse 0 Stop Bit 2 Multi function input command 3 Bit 3 Multi function input command 4 Bit 4 Multi function input command 5 Bit 5 Multi function input command 6 Bit 6 Multi function input command 7 Bit 7 Not used Bit 8 External error 1 Error EFO Bit 9 Error reset 1 Reset command Bit 10 to 15 Not used 0002 Frequency reference Set units using parameter 01 03 0003 to 0005 Not used 0006 PID target value 0007 Analog output 1 setting 41 V 726 decimal to 11 V 726 decimal 0008 Analog output 2 setting 41 V 726 decimal to 11 V 726 decimal 0009 Multi function contact output setting Bit 0 Contact output terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 PHC1 terminals P1 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 PHC2 terminals P2 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 3 to 5 Not used Bit 6 Set error contact terminal MA MC output using bit 7 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Error contact terminal MA MC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 8 to 15 Not used 10 42 Appendices Class 64 Instance Attribute Register number hex 000A to 000E No
303. objects related to Inverters are the motor data control supervisor and AC DC drive objects These are explained below and in subsequent sections For details on the other types of objects refer to 10 2 Objects Motor data objects are data and functions related to motors connected to Inverters The motors that can be connected to Inverters are squirrel cage inductive motors so the Motor Type is always 7 The motor s rated current and rated voltage can be set and read Support Service Code Service code number her Serice OE Get attribute single 10 Set attribute single Message Communications m Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Content Indicates class 28 soft ware revisions The revi sion value is advanced whenever there is a change Setting range Default Note 1 The default setting for the motor s rated current depends on the Inverter model Refer to the Motor Type Indicates the type of motor to be used The setting for a squirrel cage inductive motor is 7 Motor Rated Current The motor s rated current can be set and read The setting unit is 0 1 A The setting unit can be changed using the cur rent scale in Class 2A Instance 1 Attribute 17 Inverter rated output current 10 to 150 See note 3 See note Motor Rated Voltage The motor s rated voltage can be set and read The setting unit is 1 V The set
304. oefficient K2 0 0 to 6550 Differs with capacity Energy saving voltage lower limit at 60 Hz output 0 to 120 50 Energy saving voltage lower limit at 6 Hz output 0 to 25 12 Power averaging time 1 to 200 1 Probe operation voltage limit 0 to 100 Probe operation control voltage step at 100 0 1 to 10 0 Probe operation control voltage step at 5 0 1 to 10 0 Not used Pulse train input scale 100 to 3300 1 10 Hz Multi function analog output pulse train frequency selection 0 1 6 12 24 36 40 to 45 1 RS 422 485 communications time over detection selection 0 to 4 RS 422 485 communications fre quency reference monitor unit selection 0to 3 RS 422 485 communications slave address read only 00 to 32 RS 422 485 baud rate selection read only 0to 3 RS 422 485 parity selection read only 0to2 0 RS 422 485 send wait time read only 10 to 65 10 RS 422 485 RTS control selection 0 1 0 Motor code 0 to 70 Differs with capacity Energy saving voltage upper limit at 60 Hz output 0 to 120 120 Energy saving upper limit voltage at 6 Hz output 0 to 25 16 Power detection width for probe opera tion switching 0 to 100 Power detection filter constant 0 to 255 PID output gain 0 0 to 25 0 PID feedback input block selection 0to5
305. ol panel to increase shielding Do not mount any wireless or other devices designed to generate electromagnetic waves e Use reinforced insulation or double insulation for the DC power supply for communications e The Inverter s control terminals have only basic insulation Further insulation must be provided if the terminals are wired to a device that will ultimately come in contact with people Grounding the Shield Ground plate Cable clamp conductive Shield mesh 3 27 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 e 3G3RV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card Mount the DeviceNet Communications Card as shown in the diagram Detailed precautions are given below Remove any coating on the grounding faces Inverter Wiring length 40 cm max Metal Plate Remove any coating on the grounding faces Wiring length 20 m max e Remove any coating on the footprints of EMC filter Inverter and metal mounting plate in order to ensure a metal contact between grounding faces Attach Option Units to the Inverter e Use a shielded cable for the Inverter s power supply line and connect via the EMC compliant input noise filter with the shortest cable length possible Ground the shield at both ends of the cable e Use the shortest ground wire possible For 400 V Inverters ground the neutral point on the power supply e Use a shielded cable for the cable between the Inverter and motor as well Keep the cable as short
306. ommunications port used for 15 DeviceNet Set the number of times to resend for error response Response monitor time 0000 hex 32 s 0001 to FFFF hex 00 1 to 6553 5 s unit 0 1 s Set at least 2 seconds for explicit messages Note Set 0 in word C 4 bit 15 to require a response or 1 to not require a response Responses are required for explicit messages so set O m Message Timing When executing CMND 490 an AND condition must be set that requires both the PLC s Network Communications Enabled Flag and the Master Unit s Message Communications Enabled Flag to be ON Network i Execution Communications Online status ar condition Enabled Flag or Message Communications Enabled Flag 7 CMND 490 S D C m Message Response Read Timing Have messages read with the rising edge of the Network Communications Enabled Flag for each communications port 6 5 Message Communications Chapter 6 Network Communications Enabled Flag Read response processing i s Communications Flags Network Communications Enabled Flag Address Word Bit Port 7 Port 6 Port 5 Port 4 Port 3 Port 2 Port 1 Port 0 Content 0 Execution disabled executing 1 Execution enabled not executing Network Communications Error Flag 15 Port 7 14 Port 6 13 Port 5 12 Port 4 11 Port 3 10 Port 2 9 Port 1 8
307. on code 02 hex Register number The set register number has not been registered Check and correct error An attempt to read an enter command register was the register number made 21 hex Data setting error An upper or lower limit for the write data setting range Check the display for was exceeded the Digital Operator Data that would give rise to an operation error OPE1 and correct the error to OPE9 or OPEO1 to OPEO9 has been set data 22 hex Writing mode error during Inverter operations a write requested mes Perform write opera sage was received for a parameter that is read only during operation An enter command was received during Inverter oper ations tions after stopping the Inverter A read requested message was received during UV An enter command was received during UV Perform write opera tions after clearing the UV main circuit undervoltage error 3G3MV only during F04 initial memory error detection a write requested message other than constant initialization N001 8 or 9 was received After constant initial ization n001 8 or 9 has been per formed turn the power supply OFF and ON again A write requested message was received for a read only register s ENTER Command Not Sent 3G3RV and 3G3FV Only When entering data in the parameter constant register No 0100 or higher always send an ENTER command If the ENTER command is not
308. on field 7 49 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 3 3 IN Tab Page Use the IN Tab Page to make settings for input terminals Edit Device Parameters Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time 01 In Point 2 Time 14455 02 Time o 03 Time 0 04 Time 0 06 Time o 06 Time 0 Edit Coreei E Double click the selected field or click the Edit Button Parameter Transmission Warning Torque I General OUT IN No VO Comment Detection M Value Inverter Parameters Operation Time 00 In Point 1 Time 12584 mina 06 1 0 Comment 06 Detection Mode G Time C Count fri O 4204967296 Times Value 14455 CO 4294967295 Seconds oros Edit Item Reference No Refer to the following tables I 0 Comment Set a user defined name for each terminal Note When the setting is made in the setting window the setting will be dis played in the I O Comment field 7 2 11 Connected Device Com ment Detection Mode Set the detection mode to either Cumulative ON Time or Contact Operations Counter Note When the setting is made in the setting window the setting will be dis played in the Detection Mode field Set the monitor value time or count Note When the setting is made in the setting window the setting will be dis played in the Value field
309. onitor U 11 U1 08 minimum unit as 1W Setting the attribute 1A power scale enables a multiplication factor to be set Message Communications Instance Attribute Input Voltage Content Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the input voltage setting 200 or 400 E1 01 minimum unit as 1 V Setting the attribute 1B voltage scale enables a multiplication factor to be set Setting range Default Chapter 6 Output Voltage Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the out put voltage monitor U 04 U1 06 minimum unit as 1 V Setting the attribute 1B voltage scale enables a multiplication factor to be set Accel Time Decel Time Can be set and read in hexadecimal with the acceleration time 1 n019 C1 01 and deceleration time 1 n020 C1 02 mini mum unit as 1 ms Depending on the acceler ation deceleration time unit n019 C1 10 setting numbers below 100 ms or 10 ms are truncated Setting the attribute 1C time scale enables a multi plication factor to be set 0 0 to 6 000 0 s 0 00 to 600 00 s 2710 hex 10 0 s 2710 hex 10 0 s Low Speed Limit See note 2 and 3 High Speed Limit See note 2 and 3 Can be set and read in hexadecimal with the fre quency reference lower limit n034 d2 02 and the frequency reference upper limit n033 d2 01 minimum unit as 1 ms The minimum unit can be set by the frequency refer ence setting and dis
310. ons Tp The baud rate factor 500 kbps Tp 2 250 kbps Tp 4 125 kbps Tp 8 n The number of nodes for which COS cyclic connections occur within 1 cycle of the CPU Unit e More than One Master in Network Calculate the communications cycle time according to the above equation for the Slaves of each Master Unit The communications cycle time for the entire network is the sum of communications cycle times for each Master Unit 10 28 Appendices m I O Response Time of Inverter The following shows processing time between the Inverter and the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card Chapter 10 e DP RAM processing time between the Inverter and DeviceNet Communications Unit Card 8 ms in the 3G3MV and 5ms in the 3G3RV 3G3FV Inverter input scanning 5 ms read twice Inverter output scanning 5 ms Inverter parameters scanning 20 ms e Inverter I O Response Time Ladder program cycle time Communications cycle time DP RAM processing time 8 ms or 5 ms Inverter I O scanning Inverter internal processing Note 1 The internal processing time varies depending on the controls to be executed Log EE E Maximum input response 1 f L_ gr Maximum output response gt Note 2 Input scanning for parameter reading or writing requires 20 ms 10 29 Appendices Chapter 10 10 4 3G3MV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 10 4 1 Inputting Control Fr
311. or 3G3RV 3G3PV and 3G3FV Inverters Note T branch wiring using Thin Cables w mf o Switch Run Reverse Forward Stop Selection of either the communications control input or local control input is possible using Net Ctrl Net Ref 1 4 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 1 2 Overview of Smart Slave Functions As a Smart Slave the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card 3G3MV PDRT2 or 3G3RV PDRT2 is equipped with new Smart Slave functions This chapter introduces the Smart Slave functions Refer to 7 2 Smart Slave Functions for more details and setting monitoring procedures m Average Power Monitor Function This function monitors the power that the Inverter supplies each hour and determines the cumulative power usage from the hourly average The amount of power used by the system can be obtained without using special sensors or performing any calculations In addition monitoring the power usage can help reduce energy usage and identify power consumption problems in the system The average power can be easily monitored from a Configurator Programmable Terminal PT or other operator interface m Warning Torque Detection Function This function can detect equipment errors by monitoring the output current Problems in the load can be detected in the Inverter s current torque level The function provides advanced warning of an increased load caused by deterioration i
312. or Conduction Time 0 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Average Electric Power Calculation Cycle 10min pe Default Connection Path Standard I O x Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 v Operation for Communication Error Stop C Continue Default Setting Upload Download Compare Reset Cancel Click the Upload Button 7 9 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 3 Set the Smart Slave functions Refer to the details on Smart Slave functions provided in the following pages click each of the Tabs and set or change the settings as required 4 Downloading the Set Values to the Inverter Click the General Tab and click the Download Button All the set values will be sent to the Invert er 5 Resetting the Inverter and Enabling the Set Values Click the Reset Button to reset the Inverter and enable the set values 6 Completing the Operation Click the OK Button The Edit Device Parameters Window will close Note Details on Smart Slave functions and which windows are used to set or monitor these func tions are provided in the following pages The operating procedure explained here i e dis playing the Edit Device Parameters Window clicking the Upload Button making the settings and clicking the Download Button Reset Button and OK Button is not explained again 7 2 2 Average Power Monitor Function m Functions e This function monitors the power kW that the Inverter supplies each hour and determines the cumulative power usage
313. or the corresponding Instance equals 01 Writing performed once every six minutes is taken care by the EM 10 2 13Equipment Manager Object Class 97 Hex Support Service Code Service code number hex Service Reset Returns the Attribute s data to initial values Get attribute single 10 24 Set attribute single Appendices Chapter 10 m Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Content Indicates the class 97 software revision The revision value is increased whenever there is a change Setting range Default OUTPUT Response Time Output response time ms Response Time exceed Reports the result of the comparison between the monitor value and the measured value ON when output response time gt monitor value 00 OFF 01 ON OUT response monitor setting Sets the output response time monitor value ms 0000 to FFFF Response peak Peak value of the output value response time ms e Operating Time Measurements Measurement Patterns of Instances 01 to 06 Instance Operating time measurement triggers Remarks Measurement start condition Measurement stop condition Input 4 ON Input 5 ON Input 3 ON Input 5 ON Input 4 ON Instance 01 Instance 02 Instance 03 Instance 04 Instance 05 Multi function contact output ON Multi function output 1 ON Input 2
314. orque Tab Page in the Monitor Device Window and that in the Maintenance Information Window are as follows e The Accel Decel Torque Current and Torque Current during Frequency Agree fields in the Maintenance Information Window do not show the present values but the values when the maintenance information was last refreshed e The Clear Buttons for peak values and Clear Error Flag Button are not included in the Mainte nance Information Window 7 2 4 Current Trace m Functions e This function traces samples and records the output current waveform to the motor Troubleshooting can be performed easily without connecting measuring equipment e The Configurator can be used to set the current trace s trigger setting set the sampling cycle and display the current waveform The forward command reverse command frequency agree or error signal can be used as the trig ger or the trigger can be activated manually using button operations By selecting an appropriate trigger the data required for example from immediately before an error occurs can be traced e The sampling cycle can be set to 10 ms 20 ms 50 ms 100 ms or a value up to 100 s Up to 150 samples can be taken Trace data can be converted into CSV format and saved in a file allowing use of spreadsheet soft ware such as Microsoft Excel 7 16 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 Application Example Sets the current r Configurator Programmable Con
315. ote I O and messages Maximum number of Slaves 63 per DeviceNet Master Unit 1 18 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Applicable PLC OS Series Maximum number of controlled points per DeviceNet Master Unit Using Settings in Words Allocated in DM Area 16 000 points IN 500 words x 1 block OUT 500 words x 1 block Using Configurator 32 000 points IN 500 words x 2 blocks OUT 500 words x 2 blocks Allocation areas CIO 0000 to CIO 6143 WR W000 to W511 HR HOOO to H511 DM D00000 to D32767 EM E00000 to E32767 Allocation method Words are allocated to each node in the above data areas in any order The following limitations apply e Using Settings in Words Allocated to DeviceNet Master Unit in DM Area The following limitations apply when allocating words using settings in the DM Area e Words are allocated in 2 blocks OUT 1 IN 1 Each block consists of sequential words e Words for each slave are allocated inside the allocated words in order of node number It is not necessary to allocate words to unused node num bers e The leftmost byte of a word cannot be allocated to an 8 point Slave e Using the Configurator Using the Configurator allows much wider allocation than using settings in the DM Area e Words are allocated in 4 blocks OUT 1 OUT 2 IN 1 IN 2 Each block consists of sequential words e Words for each slave can be allocated inside the allocated words in
316. ownload Compare Note The Register Unregister Button can be clicked at this point to allocate data with the remote I O function selected in the Slave The following steps explain how to allocate data freely so steps 3 to 10 are not required if data will be allocated automatically Proceed to step 11 Down load if using automatic allocation 3 Select the desired Inverter from the General Tab Page and click the Advanced Setup Button 5 6 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 Advanced setting Device Information Connection Auto Connection User Setup IV Use Poll Connection OUT Sie B Byte N Sie BO Byte Con Path 65Hex Extended Coni Con Path 97Hex Extended Coni w Use Bit Strobe Connection OUT Sze P byte IN Size Con Path EEE Con Path OUT Size Byte IN Size Byte Gon Path 65Hex Extended Cont Gon Path 94Hex Unit Status I Use Cyclic Connection OUT Size 0 Byte INSize Byte Con Path w Con Path COS Cyclic Heart Beat Timer 1000 ms F E 4 Click the Connection Tab of the Advanced Setting Window and select User Setup 5 Select Use Poll Connection and Use COS connection 6 Set Extended Control Status Control I O remote I O for the IN data and Extended Control Com mand Control I O remote I O for the OUT data as the poll connection s connection paths 7 Set Unit Status for the IN data as the COS connection s connection path Note When a CS CJ series DeviceN
317. pacitor Conduction Time 14 Hours Clear Average Electric Power Average of 10min 30 w Network Power Voltage 204 W Ger Network Power Voltage Peak 205 V Network Power Voltage Bottom 202 V Clear IV Unit Maintenance FT Warning IV Fan Maintenance IT Error IV Electrolytic Capacitor Maintenance IV Network Power Voltage drop F Dore Formvera RON IT Operation Time Over IV During Reverse Run IT Come ed Gamponent Mantenance IV Frequency Agree 7 2 14 Parameter Setting m Function e The Inverters user parameters can be set with the Configurator e There are two ways to set the parameters as follows e Several of the major parameters can be displayed and set Inverter Parameters Tab Page An individual parameter s Instance Attribute can be specified and set Individual Parameters Tab Page Note 1 Some parameters cannot be set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page settings To change these parameters set them separately on the Individual Parameters Tab Page Note 2 When the 3G3FV is used some parameters cannot be set from the Configurator parame ters that cannot be changed using Class 64 Change these parameters using a Digital Op erator 7 42 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 m Setting Method 1 Inverter Parameters Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window 1 Click the Inverter Parameters Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window 2 Select the parameter group to be displayed from the pull do
318. peed Monitor See note 2 Content The output frequency monitor U 02 U1 02 can be monitored in hexadeci mal with the minimum unit as 1 hex The frequency monitor s minimum unit can be set by the frequency refer ence setting and display units in n035 01 03 n035 01 03 0 0 01 Hz n035 01 03 1 0 01 100 Max frequency n035 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min n035 01 03 40 to 3 999 Follow individual set val ues When r min units are being used a multiplier can be set in attribute 16 the Speed Scale setting Setting range Default Chapter 6 Speed Refer ence Rotational Speed Refer ence See note 2 Can be set and read in hexadecimal with the fre quency reference mini mum unit as 1 hex The frequency reference minimum unit can be set by the frequency refer ence setting and display units in n035 01 03 n035 01 03 0 0 01 Hz n035 01 03 1 0 01 100 Max frequency n035 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min n035 01 03 40 to 3 999 Follow individual set val ues When r min units are being used a multipler can be set in attribute 16 the Speed Scale setting 0 to max fre quency Current Actual Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the out put current monitor U 03 U1 03 minimum unit as 0 1 A Setting the attribute 17 current scale enables a multiplication factor to be set 6 14 Power Actual Can be referenced in hexadecimal with the out put power m
319. play units in n035 01 03 n035 01 03 0 0 01 Hz n035 01 03 1 0 01 100 Max frequency n035 01 03 2 to 39 1 r min n035 01 03 40 to 3 999 Follow individual set val ues When r min units are being used a multipler can be set in attribute 16 the Speed Scale setting 0 to 109 of maximum fre quency 0000 0 to 110 of maximum fre quency 0708 hex 1 800 r min 6 15 Message Communications Instance 6 16 Attribute Speed scale Content Speed data unit selection can be set and read The speed data unit value is calculated as follows Unit 1 r min x 1 22 a Speed scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement Setting range 45 to 15 F1 to OF hex Default Chapter 6 Current scale Current data unit selection can be set and read The current data unit value is calculated as follows Unit 0 1 A x 1 2 b Current scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement 45 to 15 F1 to OF hex Power scale Power data unit selection can be set and read The power data unit value is calculated as follows Unit 1 W x 1 2 c Power scale set value Set a negative value as its 2 s complement 45 to 15 F1 to OF hex Voltage scale Voltage data unit selection can be set and read The voltage data unit value is calculated as follows Unit 1 V x 1 29 d Voltage scale set value Set a
320. pter 1 1 4 DeviceNet Features m System Configuration Example Master by other OMRON Master Unit company OMRON Master Unit OMRON Configurator DeviceNet Network OMRON Configurator OMRON Slaves OMRON Slaves Slaves by other company DeviceNet Network Slaves by other company Slaves by other company OMRON Slaves as Multi vendor Network The DeviceNet conforms to the DeviceNet open field network specification which means that devices Masters and Slaves produced by other manufacturers can also be connected to the Net work Therefore a wide range of field level applications can be supported by combining valve devices sensors and other devices Simultaneous Remote I O and Message Services Remote I O communications to constantly exchange I O data between the PLC and Slaves can be executed simultaneously with message communications to send receive DeviceNet Master Unit data as required by the application Therefore a DeviceNet Network can be installed to flexibly han dle applications that require both bit data and message data Message communications can be achieved either by using OMRON s FINS commands or by using DeviceNet explicit messages 1 11 Fu
321. r s functions 5 5 1 Overview of Special Remote I O Special remote I O operations utilize DeviceNet remote I O and can directly write to and read from internal Inverter registers Basically the register numbers for the various functions shown on this and subsequent pages are specified for writing or reading Once data has been written it is retained until it is changed by the next write operation m I O Format Allocated Words e Outputs PLC to Inverter Instance ID 100 Decimal 64 Hex Bytenumber Bit7 Bit Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Bit1 Bito Function code write read code Register number leftmost byte register number allocated to each parameter etc Register number rightmost byte register number allocated to each parameter etc Register data leftmost byte data to write to specified register Register data rightmost byte data to write to specified register e Inputs Inverter to PLC Instance ID 150 Decimal 96 Hex Function code returns transmitted code Register number leftmost byte returns transmitted register number Register number rightmost byte returns transmitted register number Register data leftmost byte returns transmitted data amount or reads data Register data rightmost byte returns transmitted data amount or reads data Note 1 Special remote I O outputs and inputs are paired When using special remote I O be sure to set
322. r 9 m Timing Chart Word m bit 0 Fault Bit A A 000000 AN Fault Read Flag P 003003 IN Sending Message Flag VA 003002 7 Message Sent Flag j T i CMND instruction execution 000001 CMND Write Completed Flag i i i T 000002 i 1 TL Response Flag r i A20200 Message r Communications Enabled Flag 003000 Fault Flag 000100 Reset Input Bit EE Er TE ie a D00200 Fault code storage lt lt aroe 1 2 3 Operation 1 When the Inverter has a fault bit 0 of word m Fault Bit will be turned ON Until the fault is cleared the Fault Flag will be ON and this will cause the Fault Read Flag to be turned ON and the com mand specified in the DM Area will be sent using the CMND instruction 2 When the Message Communications Enabled Flag is turned ON the completion code D03001 will be examined If an error is found the error code will be stored in D00100 and the command will be re executed If normally completed the fault code will be stored in D00200 and the Mes sage Sent Flag will be turned ON and the Sending Message Flag will be turned OFF 3 When the Reset Input Bit is turned ON bit 2 of word n Fault Reset Input Bit will turn ON When the fault is cleared the Fault Flag will turn OFF Network Configuration This program is based on the following conditions Master unit number 0 Master node address 63 Fixed allocation area setting 1 Netwo
323. r Data Objects Class 28 Hex 1 2 ce cece eee 6 8 6 5 Control Supervisor Objects Class 29 Hex 2 0 2 ee cee eee 6 10 6 6 AC DC Drive Objects Class 2A Hex 0 0 ne i cece eens 6 13 6 7 Reading and Writing Parameters Class 64 Hex 0 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee 6 18 Chapter 7 Configurator SettingS cccccccceceeeeee 7 1 7 1 Basic Configurator Operations 1 0 2 0 0 0 ec cee eee eee eee 7 2 722 Smart Slave PUNCUOMS 3 60 20 skies eta anor aah PAE we ats eens rear te wd Ste Ake 7 9 7 3 Edit Device Parameters Window 00 0000 ccc ccc eee eee eens 7 48 Table of Contents 7 4 Monitor Device Window vvvuaauavvvvv verv vnr rv rv vnr 7 5 Maintenance Information Window 0 00 cece ee eee eee eens 7 55 7 63 Chapter 8 Communications Errors ccc cececesees 8 1 8 1 Communications Line Errors 0 0 eee nee arr ran 8 2 Message Communications Errors 2 0 eee eens 8 3 Special Remote I O Errors 0 0 cent nee b ene e eens 24 Mnverter Faults svartner rar De 8 5 Inverter Alarmssaestudss blest GM s Ge Sok s heter heart aes ac eaa 8 2 8 4 8 6 8 8 8 12 Chapter 9 Communications Programs CS series PLCs 9 1 9 1 Standard Remote I O Programming 0 0 0 rv ra verv cee eens 9 2 Message Communications Programming 00 0 ra eee cee eee 9 3 Special Remote I O Programs 0 0 cece eee eee ee
324. r History Inverter Parameters No Equipment Name Response Time Peak Value mm Operation Watch1 15 ms 20 ms Operation Watch2 15 ms 20 ms Operation Watch3 0 ms 0 ms Operation Watch4 0 ms 0 ms Operation Watch5 26230 ms 65535 ms Operation Watch 26230 ms 65535 ms Clear Error Clear Peak Value Close Details Reference Refer to the following table for meanings in the No field For details refer 7 2 5 Operating Time to 7 2 5 Operating Time Monitor Function Monitor Function Note When the operating time exceeds the monitor value an error icon is displayed to the left of the corresponding setting in the No field Equipment Name Displays the name of each device Response Time Displays the operating time of each device Peak Value Displays the maximum value of the operating time of each device Clear Error Button Clears the Operation Time Over Flag in the Units Status Area Note 1 This button is enabled when Status Hold is selected on the Oper ation Time Tab Page of the Edit Device Parameters Window Note 2 Select the device to be cleared and then click the Clear Error But ton to set the Flag to OFF Clear Peak Value Clears the peak operating time value to zero Button Note Select the device to be cleared and then click the Clear Peak But ton to clear the setting to zero Note The following table shows the meanings of the values set in the No field Operating time measurement trigger
325. rameters Window This window is used to set the default connection path and each of the set values for the Smart Slave func tions After setting the set values are shown in the Inverter by clicking the Download and Reset Buttons e Monitor Device Window This window displays the online information that is always obtained from the Configurator The present value can be displayed online or reset from this window e Maintenance Information Window This window displays information specifically related to maintenance The maintenance information is refreshed when this window is displayed or when the Update Button is clicked Note The methods used to operate each window are described here but the network configuration must be created in the Configurator according to the system being used Refer to the DeviceNet Configurator Ver 2 0 Operation Manual W382 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 m Configurator Window Example of Main Window Icon for switching to the Main Window Inverter icon Icon for switching to Maintenance Mode Window Hardware list i 200 3 63 pi SG3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet CS1W DRM21 l 63 1 z x Inverters described in this manual mounted with DeviceNet Communications Unit Card Network Configuration 4 Window i Ready OMRON 3G8F7 DRM21 ID313 500K Bit s On line NUM Note 1 For details on the standard Main Window white background and the Maintenance Mode Window blue
326. rating the Edit Device Parameters Window N Caution To set or change the settings in the Inverter s Edit Device Parameters Window first click the Upload Button and read the present set values for the Inverter If the Download Button is clicked without first clicking the Upload Button the parameter constants for the Inverter will be overwritten m Setting and Changing Device Parameters 1 Displaying the Edit Device Parameters Window for the Inverter Display the Edit Device Parameters Window for the Inverter settings that are to be set or changed using the method shown in 7 1 2 Displaying Windows 2 Reading the Inverter s Present Set Values Click the Upload Button to read the Inverter s present set values Note lf the settings are made without performing this operation all set values including the pa rameter constants for the Inverter will be overwritten Particularly if the parameter constants have already been set using a Digital Operator or oth er device all the parameter constants will be initialized and set to the default values set in the Configurator Edit Device Parameters Edit Device Parameters Window Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time Comment RESTS Uae Motor Name Network Power Voltage 11 0 y 11 0 250 Unit Conduction Time 0 Hours 0 429496729 Hours Fan Conduction Time Hours 0 429496729 Hours Electrolytic Capacit
327. rk Communications Enabled Flag A20200 Online Flag 151100 Network Communications Error Flag A21900 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Ladder Program Fault Wd m bit 00 Fault Wd m bit 0 003001 DIFU 013 003001 003001 003000 000100 003001 Fault reset Wd n bit 02 MOV 021 0000 D00300 MOVD 083 D00000 0210 D00300 Sets the node address of the Slave for reading 003001 ORW 035 D00300 000E D00400 BSET 071 0000 D03000 D03009 Clears the storage area and sets 1 in word 0000 used for shift register MOV 021 0001 0000 MOV 021 No of send data bytes 0009 D01000 MOV 021 No of received bytes 000A D01001 MOV 021 Network address 0000 D01002 MOV 021 Send destination node address 00 Local network e00EE local node Send destination D01003 unit number FE a aa MOV 021 esponse require Communications port No 0 0000 Number of resends 0 D01004 MOV 021 Response monitor time 10 s 0064 D01005 MOV 021 Explicit message command 2801 D02000 MOV 021 Slave node address and service code OE Hex D00400
328. rned OFF Class 64 Register Function Content Instance Attribute Number hex 0000 Inverter run command Refer to table below 0001 Frequency reference Sets frequency reference value See note 1 0002 to 0006 Not used 0007 Multi function analog 11 V 02D6 hex output 1 See note 2 0008 Multi function analog 11 V 02D6 hex output 2 See note 2 0009 Inverter output See Refer to table below note 3 000A to OOOF Not used e Inverter Run Commands Register Number 0000 Hex Content Forward stop 1 Forward operation Reverse stop 1 Reverse operation Multi function input 1 Multi function input 2 Multi function input 3 Multi function input 4 Multi function input 5 Multi function input 6 Not used e Inverter Outputs Register Number 0009 Hex Content Multi function contact output 1 ON Multi function output 1 1 ON Multi function output 2 1 ON Not used 10 83 Appendices Chapter 10 Note 1 The setting unit of the frequency reference can be changed in 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units The default setting is 0 01 Hz Note 2 The multi function analog output 1 and 2 registers can be used to set the Inverter s analog outputs by means of communications To do that set 31 1F hex for H4 01 multi function analog output terminal 21 monitor selection and H4 04 multi function an
329. rogramming 9 3 Special Remote I O Programs Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 Note In this chapter the bits words and data memory used in the example ladder programs were selected arbitrarily When creating actual programs modify the contents so that they do not overlap with other areas 9 1 Standard Remote I O Programming When the following standard remote I O programming is executed the rotational speed reference data specified in the DM Data Memory Area of the PLC is written to the 3G3MV Inverter and for ward or reverse operation is performed at the specified frequency when the Frequency Reference Input Bit is turned ON and the Forward Input Bit or Reverse Input Bit is turned ON Allocations Bit 000000 lt Frequency Reference Input Bit Bit 000001 lt Forward Input Bit Bit 000002 lt Reverse Input Bit Input Bit 000003 lt Fault Reset Input Bit Bit 001000 lt Local Network selection Bit Bit 003000 lt Fault Flag Flag D00000 lt Rotational speed reference data e Remote I O Outputs from PLC to 3G3MV Inverter Words n andn 1 Net Ref Reverse erence Stop Rotational speed reference rightmost data Rotational speed reference leftmost data e Remote I O Inputs from 3G3MV Inverter to PLC Words m and m 1 At Fre Refer Control Inverter During During quency ence From Net Rea
330. s sages Remote I O and mes sages Remote I O Maximum number of Slaves per DeviceNet Master Unit 63 50 32 Maximum number of controlled points per DeviceNet Master Unit 2 048 1 600 1 024 Allocation areas OUT CIO 1900 to ClO 1963 IN CIO 2000 to CIO 2063 OUT IR 050 to IR 099 IN IR 350 to IR 399 OUT IR 50 to IR 81 IN IR 350 to IR 381 Allocation method Words are allocated for each node to the above data areas in node address order only e 8 point Slaves Allocated 1 word e 16 point Slaves Allocated 1 word e Slaves with more than 16 points Allocated multiple words Without explicit mes sages Maximum number of Inverters 4 words remote I O 32 6 words remote I O 21 8 words remote I O 16 4 words remote I O 25 6 words remote I O 16 8 words remote I O 12 4 words remote I O 16 6 words remote I O 10 8 words remote I O 8 With explicit messages 4 words remote I O 32 6 words remote I O 21 8 words remote I O 16 4 words remote I O 25 6 words remote I O 16 8 words remote I O 12 e Communications with Configurator Free Allocation Applicable PLC DeviceNet Master Unit CVM1 CV Series CVM1 DRM21 V1 CS Series and C200HX HG HE C200HW DRM21 V1 C200HS Supported communications Remote I O and mes sages Remote I O and mes sages Remote I O Maximum number of Slaves per DeviceNet Master
331. s T branch Taps and T branch Taps and T branch Taps and Slaves using Thin DeviceNet Communications Cables as shown in the following diagram When a Terminating Resistor is installed in the T branch Tap connect it to the last T branch Tap in the Network The T branch Tap must be no further than 6 m from the final node CS Rack 24 V DC power supply Communications T power supply T branch Tap T branch Tap T branch Tap i Remote I O Terminal T Remote I O Terminal Remote I O Terminal SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter DeviceNet Communications Unit Terminating Resistor If a Terminal block Terminating Resistor is required connect it to the end of an extension cable 1 m max that is connected to the final node Use the following procedure to connect the cables Refer to the DRT2 DeviceNet Slaves Operation Manual for details 1 Prepare the communications cables and attach the connectors to the cables 2 Connect the communications cable connectors to the node connectors on the DeviceNet Master Unit T branch Taps and Slaves 2 8 Example System Startup Chapter 2 m Wiring the Remote I O Terminal Connect the I O power supply for I O devices and the I O signal lines to the Remote I O Terminals Attach M3 crimp terminals to the power lines and I O sig
332. s 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The values for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter are given above Note 5 The setting range is 0 00 to motor s rated current 0 1 A The value for a 200 V class 0 4 kW Inverter is given above 10 96 Appendices Chapter 10 Option Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute F1 01 0380 01 70 Number of PG pulses 0 to 1 p r 1000 No 60000 F1 02 0381 01 71 PG disconnection stopping method 0to 3 1 1 No PGO F1 03 0382 01 72 PG overspeed stopping method 0to 3 1 1 No F1 04 0383 01 73 PG speed deviation stopping method 0to 3 1 3 No F1 05 0384 01 74 PG rotation setting 0 1 1 0 No F1 06 0385 01 75 PG output ratio Oto 132 1 1 No F1 07 0386 01 76 Selecting integral control during accel O 1 1 0 No decel F1 08 0387 01 77 Overspeed OS detection level 0to120 1 115 No F1 09 0388 01 78 Overspeed OS detection time 0 0 to 2 0 0 1s 0 0 See No note 1 F1 10 0389 01 79 PG speed deviation detection level Oto50 1 10 No DEV F1 11 038A 01 7A PG speed deviation detection time 0 0 to 0 1s 0 5 No DEV 10 0 F1 12 038B 01 7B Number of PG gear teeth 1 0 to 1000 1 0 No F1 13 038C 01 7C Number of PG gear teeth 2 0 to 1000 1 0 No F1 14 0397 01 7D PG disconnection detection time 0 0 to 0 185 2 0 No 10 0 F2 01 038D
333. s as U2 01 See note 10th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 15 1 hr units See note operation time since 5th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 16 1 hr units See note operation time since 6th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 17 1 hr units See note operation time since 7th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 18 1 hr units See note operation time since 8th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 19 1 hr units See note operation time since 9th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 20 1 hr units See note operation time since 10th prior fault 10 6 3 Parameter Reading and Writing The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3PV Inverter parameter and the corresponding register numbers Write and read the various parameters with 1 as the minimum setting unit Negative num bers are expressed as two s complement If the setting unit is in hexadecimal there is no need to convert it When writing data in parameters be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data Unless the enter command is transmitted the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start 10 72 Appendices Chapter 10 Parameters for Initialize Mode Register Class 64 Hex Setting Setting Default Changes In At range unit setting during stance tribute opera tion Parameter access level Initialize Password Password setting
334. s from the DeviceNet communications are to be always used set to 3 If this setting is performed frequency reference 1 can only be set through DeviceNet communica tions However parameter values set from DeviceNet communications or the Digital Operator are used for 3G3RV Inverters frequency references 2 to 16 and inching frequency reference d1 02 to d1 17 regardless of the setting of b1 01 Switching of Frequency References from DeviceNet Communications There is a switching signal Net Ref for frequency references speed references from the stan dard remote I O of the DeviceNet Communications Card The input method for frequency references can be changed in the following ways using the Net Ref signal Net Ref 1 ON Enables frequency references from DeviceNet communications remote I O frequency references become valid regardless of the setting in b1 01 Net Ref 0 OFF Enables the frequency reference setting in b1 01 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 4 2 2 Inverter Operation Command Selection e Select the method for inputting Run and Stop Commands to the Inverter Select the method suit able for the application Parameter Set value Contents Default No setting b1 02 0 Digital Operator RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital 1 Operator 1 Control circuit Operation command input from control terminals circuit terminals 2 RS 422 485 Operation commands received via RS communi
335. s of fault that occur See the fault code list on the fol lowing page Control From Net Run signal input status See note 2 00 Operating with an n003 b1 02 setting other than DeviceNet 01 Operating by DeviceNet DeviceNet Fault mode See note 3 00 Stop operation 01 Continue operation 02 Maker s specifications 3G3MV 00 1 3G3RV 3G3FV Force Fault Trip Communica tions external fault input 00 Normal operation 01 Communications external fault input 00 01 Force Status Communica tions external fault input status 00 Normal status 01 Communications external fault detected Inverter stopped with fault detection Note 1 The following table shows the status of remote I O output signals and operation indicated by the content of Attribute 06 State i e Inverter status Setting Vendor specific Condition A condition other than the ones below stants Startup Preparation not complete setting con Inverter Ready signal is OFF Not ready Stopped preparation complete Inverter Ready signal is ON and Dur ing Run signal is OFF Inverter ready Stopped preparation complete Inverter Ready signal is ON and Dur ing Run signal is OFF Enabled Operating During Run signal control I O is ON Stopping Decelerating Operating with both for ward and reverse references equal to 0 Ctrl
336. se timeout The response monitoring time in the CMND instruction s control data is too short Set a longer response monitoring time The message frame was corrupted by noise Check for noise from sources such as the communications power SUP ply and switching devices and take steps to reduce noise Consider increasing the number of retries Undefined command The DeviceNet Unit received an unrecognizable command Check the CMND instruction s FINS command number 2801 The DeviceNet Unit received a FINS command intended for another Unit Check the FINS address specified in the CMND instruction s control data 8 5 Communications Errors Chapter 8 8 3 Special Remote I O Errors Special Remote I O Errors If each function is not set properly using the special remote I O the MSB of the function code will be changed to 1 and one of the following error codes will be returned Check the meaning of the error message and either correct the message or adjust the timing of the message Content Countermeasure Normal completion response The function code and register number at the time of transmission are placed at the beginning and returned with the data amount when data is written or the read data when data is read attached 01 hex Function code A code other than 03 hex 08 hex 10 hex has been set Check and correct error as a function code the functi
337. signal Net Ref for frequency references speed references from the stan dard remote I O of the DeviceNet Communications Unit The input method for frequency references can be changed in the following ways using the Net Ref signal Net Ref 1 ON Enables frequency references from DeviceNet communications remote I O frequency references become valid regardless of the setting in n004 Net Ref 0 OFF Enables the frequency reference setting in n004 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings Chapter 4 4 1 3 Frequency Reference Settings and Display Units Perform the following settings to specify units for data related to frequencies speeds used in DeviceNet communications The standard unit used with DeviceNet is r min so always set the num ber of motor poles Register Content Setting Setting Default Write number range unit setting during hex operation Frequency Sets the units for the frequency reference set reference and frequency moni ting and dis tor that are set and referred to play units by the Digital Operator 0 Hz units 1 0 1 units max frequency is 100 2 to 39 r min units Set the number of motor poles 40 to 3999 Optional Unit set tings Specifies the value used to set and display the maxi mum frequency L Set a value without the decimal point Set the position of the digit where the decimal point is to be displayed starting from the r
338. ss setting x 10 Set the 10s digit with the left switch and the 1s digit with the right switch up to node address 63 When the node address is set to a value between 64 and 99 the node address can be set from the Configurator See Configurator setting procedure below Note The Unit Card reads the node address setting on the rotary switches when the power is turned ON Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 m Setting the Node Address from the Configurator 1 Double click the icon of the corresponding Slave Inverter in the Network Configuration Window or click the right mouse button over the icon and select Change Node Address E Untitled DeviceNet Configurator Network Edit View Device EDS File Tools Option Help D Er ws gS lbe olx aa ay ix 3 Hardware 43 Vendor OMRON Corporation Sy DeviceType um AC Drives Communications Adapter 3G8F7 DRM21 C200Hw DRM21 V1 C200HW DRT21 CJIW DRM21 3 CPM2B S001M DRT CPM2C S100C DRT s CPM2C S110C DRT mM i 33 CS1W DAM21 CVM1 DRM21 1 3 DRT1 4RM21 DRT1 COM ml EX lt DRT21 fa Monitor Reset A Maintenance Information Register to other Device H Export gt I Importa 87 Edit 1 0 Comment Product Name DRT1 MD32ML DRT1 MD32ML T Property
339. supplies the communications power cables can be grounded by simply connecting a single Power Supply Tap near the center of the communi cations cable Do not ground shielding wire at more than one place 3 23 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 When there is only one power supply F Tap or Power Supply Tap Master When there are two or more power supplies Power Supply Tap Power Supply Tap Power Supply Tap ae Er 3 24 Setup and Wiring Chapter 3 3 4 Conformity to EC Directives This section explains the concepts relating to and methods for complying with EC Directives for DeviceNet Communications Units and DeviceNet Communications Cards The applicable directives are the EMC Directive and Low Voltage Directive m Concepts e EMC Directive OMRON products that comply with EC Directives are electrical components that are built into and used in manufacturing equipment They also conform to related EMC standards see the following note so that the devices or machines into which they are built can more easily conform to the EMC standards The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC standards It is the respon sibilities of the customer however to confirm whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer EMC related performance of the OMRON products that comply with EC Directives will vary depend ing on the
340. t Flag will turn ON 7 When the Fault Reset Input Bit turns ON remote I O word n bit 2 Fault Reset Input Bit will turn ON and the fault will be cleared When the fault is reset the Fault Flag will turn OFF simultaneous ly Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 m Ladder Program 001000 DIFU 013 001001 See note DIFD 014 During forward run During reverse run 001002 001001 word m bit 2 word m bit 3 fp fp O 001003 001003 001002 JA 001004 001004 001004 C Net control word n bit 5 CO Net reference word n bit 6 000000 MOV 021 Speed reference setting D00000 Fault Bit ad 000001 word m bit 3 003000 Forward Stop Bit word n bit 0 During forward run 000002 word m bit 2 003000 Reverse Stop Bit Fault Bit word n bit 1 word m bit 0 000003 Fault Flag IA O 003000 003000 000003 Fault Reset Input Bit word n bit 2 END 001 Note This program is used to switch the input method for operation commands and frequency refer ences It is not required if the n004 Frequency Reference Selection is set to 9 and n003 Inverter Run Command Selection is set to 3 9 4 Communications Programs CS series PLCs Chapter 9 9 2 Message Communications Programming 9 2 1 Inverter Fault Processing The message communications progr
341. t doing so may result in fire injury or damage to the product Carefully handle the product because it uses semiconductor elements Careless handling may result in malfunction Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations Not doing so may result in equipment damage e Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise e Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields e Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity e Locations close to power supplies m Operation and Adjustment Precautions A Caution A Caution A Caution Do not carelessly change Inverter s settings Doing so may result in injury or dam age to the product Install devices to stop operation as required to ensure safety Equipment damage may result This is particularly important when operation is set to continue for communications errors because the Inverter will continue operation Be sure to perform the setting switch settings correctly and confirm the settings before starting operation Not doing so may result in malfunction or damage to the product m Reference Manuals Information on connected devices is required to operate the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card Refer to the following manuals for information on related products Inverter Manuals Name Cat No SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Multi function Compact Inverters 1527 User s Manual SYSDRIVE
342. t frequency reference Set in 01 03 Fault output reference Set in 01 03 10 88 Fault output current 8192 decimal Inverter rated current Appendices Class 64 Instance Attribute Monitor Monitored item number Register number Fault motor speed Chapter 10 Output unit Set in 01 03 Fault output voltage refer ence 0 1V Fault main circuit DC voltage 1V Fault output power 0 1 kW Fault torque reference 0 1 Fault input terminal status Bits 0 to 7 terminals 1 to 8 Fault output terminal status Same as for U1 11 on previ ous page Fault operating status Same as for U1 12 on previ ous page Fault elapsed time 1 hour Content of last fault Refer to table below Content of 2nd prior fault Refer to table below Content of 3rd prior fault Refer to table below Content of 4th prior fault Refer to table below Elapsed time since last fault 1 hour Elapsed time since 2nd prior fault 1 hour Elapsed time since 3rd prior fault 1 hour Display Elapsed time since 4th prior fault Content Fuse open Undervoltage main Undervoltage CTL Undervoltage MC Short circuit Ground fault Overcurrent Overvoltage Overheat See note 1 Overheat See note 2 Motor overload Inverter
343. t is output compared with load OOC gt Comparison with internally set monitor value A warning torque is detected when this value is exceeded The filter Has an error can be set so that occurred in the load unrelated statuses system increased are not detected load 7 13 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 m Setting Method Click the Warning Torque Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window and set each setting item Edit Device Parameters x Warning Torque Tab General OUT IN Operation Time Page in the Edit Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters Device Parameters Window Current 1 during Accel Decel 25 004 655354 Current 2 during Frequency Agree fi 50 OOA 655354 Detection Filter Sensitivity 16 Low x Status IV Hold Carcel Setting range Details Current 1 during 0 0 to 6 553 5 A Sets the monitor value threshold of the output current Accel Decel See note 1 during acceleration or deceleration Current 2 during Fre 0 0 to 6 553 5 A Sets the monitor value threshold of the output current quency Agree See note 2 during frequency agreement while operating at con stant speed Detection Filter Detection sensitivity level Sets the level of sensitivity to prevent detection of val 1 lowest to level 5 high ues that temporarily exceed the threshold value est See note 3 Hold or do not hold Se
344. t level during frequency agreement Note The present value or most recent value is displayed Peak Torque dur ing Frequency Agree Displays the maximum current level during frequency agree ment Note The setting can be cleared to zero by clicking the Clear Button to the right of the setting Warning Torque during Frequency Agree Displays this item as selected when the current level exceeds the threshold monitor value during frequency agreement Clear Error Flag Button 7 60 Clears the Warning Torque Detection Flag in the Unit s Sta tus Area Note 1 This button is enabled when the Status Hold field is selected on the Warning Torque Tab Page of the Edit Device Parameters Window Reference 7 2 3 Warning Torque Detection Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 4 6 Error History Tab Page This tab page is used to display the error history for the last four communications errors communica tions Monitor Device x General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters Q Network Power Voltage OFF 85 Hours Q Network Power Voltage OFF 87 Hours Q Network Power Voltage OFF 87 Hours O Network Power Voltage OFF 87 Hours Update Clear Close Details Reference Displays the details of the errors that have occurred 7 2 12 Communications Note The most recent error is displayed at the bottom of the Error Log Monitor list Network Power Displays
345. t used Chapter 10 Content 000F Reference selection settings Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 PID target value register 0006H 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Bit 2 to 15 Not used 10 5 2 Inverter Monitoring Functions Read Class 64 Instance Attribute Register number hex Inverter status Content Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation 1 Reverse operation 0 Forward operation or stopped Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1 Completed 0 Not com pleted Bit 3 Error 1 Error Bit 4 Data setting error 1 Error Bit 5 Multi function contact output terminals M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function PHC output 1 terminals P1 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Multi function PHC output 2 terminals P2 PC 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 8 to 15 Not used Error details Bit 0 Overcurrent OG ground fault GF Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage OV Bit 2 Inverter overload OL2 Bit 3 Inverter overheat OH1 OH2 Bit 4 Injection brake transistor resistance overheat rr rH Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost FbL Bit 7 External error EF EFO Bit 8 Hardware error CPF Bit 9 Motor overload OL1 or overtorque 1 OL3 detected Bit 10 PG broken wire detected PGO overspeed OS speed deviation DEV Bit 1
346. tact output terminal MA 1 ON Multi function photocoupler output 1 terminal P1 1 ON Multi function photocoupler output 2 terminal P2 1 ON Not used e Inverter Status 2 Register Number 002E Hex Bit Content 4 0 Frequency reference loss 1 loss 1to 15 Not used 10 34 Appendices Chapter 10 e Communications Error Content Register Number 003D Hex Content CRC error 1 error Incorrect data length 1 error Not used Parity error 1 error Overrun error 1 error Framing error 1 error Communications timeover 1 error Not used 10 4 3 Parameter Reading and Writing The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter parameter classes instances and attributes and the corresponding register numbers Write and read the various parameters with 1 as the minimum setting unit Negative numbers are expressed as two s complements When param eters are written the settings for parameters that can be written during operation become valid after the being set in RAM whereas the settings for parameters that cannot be written during operation become valid from the next operation Send an enter command to save the set data in EEPROM Note The 2 register numbers which are different from RS 422 485 communications are indicated with a m Function Group 1 n001 to n049 Regis Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default ter num in At range unit set
347. tection 1 OL4 flashing Overtorque detection 2 EF flashing Simultaneous forward and reverse inputs BB flashing Baseblock input EF3 flashing External fault Terminal 3 EF4 flashing External fault Terminal 4 EF5 flashing External fault Terminal 5 EF7 flashing External fault Terminal 7 EF6 flashing EF8 flashing External fault Terminal 6 External fault Terminal 8 OS flashing Overspeed DEV flashing Speed deviation PGO flashing PG is disconnected OPR flashing Operator connection fault CE flashing Memobus transfer error BUS flashing Option Card transfer error CALL flashing Communications standby OL1 flashing Motor overload OL2 flashing Inverter overload E 15 flashing SI FG transfer error EFO flashing Option Card external error Motor switch during operation FBL flashing PID control feedback reference loss error CALL flashing Communications standby UL3 flashing Undertorque detection 1 UL4 flashing Undertorque detection 2 SE flashing Sequence error OHS flashing Motor overheating Communications Errors Chapter 8 M dl Mm Chapter 9 Communications Programs CS series PLCs 9 1 Standard Remote I O Programming 9 2 Message Communications P
348. ter Instance ID 101 Decimal 65 Hex SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Byte number Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Reverse For function function function function function stop ward sto input 7 Jinput6 linput5 input4 input 3 p Multi Multi Multi Fault External function function function reset fault output 2 output 1 contact input output Frequency reference rightmost byte Frequency reference leftmost byte SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Byte number Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Reverse For function function function function function function stop ward sto input 6 input5 input4 input3 input2 input1 p Multi Multi Multi Fault External function function function reset fault output 2 output 1 contact input output 5 32 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 Frequency reference rightmost byte Frequency reference leftmost byte Torque reference torque limit rightmost byte Torque reference torque limit leftmost byte Torque compensation bias rightmost byte Torque compensation bias leftmost byte e Inputs Inverter to PLC Instance ID 152 Decimal 98 Hex Alarm Inverter Atrefer During During Zero During minor ready ence reset reverse speed run fault input run P Multi Multi Multi Local re UV Opera lock com function function function mote detected tion fault p
349. ter Command X 00 Function Word m to m 2 Receive Data Send Data Write K Enter Command 00 Function Operation 1 Set the register number of the parameter and the data to be written in D00000 and D00001 re spectively When the Write Parameter Input Bit is turned ON the Data Write Flag will be turned ON and parameter writing processing will be executed 2 If the data is properly written the written parameter register number and the function code will be returned from the Inverter When the sent register number and the function code agree with the received data contents the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON to send the enter command 3 If the enter command is normally received the register number and function code that agree with the enter command will be returned from the Inverter When the sent register number and function code agree with the received contents the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON to send the function code 00 both the register number and function code are 0000 4 In the same manner if the function code 00 is normally received the Data Agree Flag will be turned ON and the Data Write Completed Flag will be turned ON When the Data Write Completed Flag turns ON the Data Write Flag will turn OFF and the program will stop Note 1 If the enter command remains set data will be repeatedly written to EEPROM Therefore set the function code to 00 both the register number and function code are 0000 wh
350. terminal 14 Oto 1F Frequency reference current gain ter minal 14 0 0 to 1000 0 Frequency reference current bias ter minal 14 100 0 to 100 0 10 98 Analog input filter time constant 0 00 to 2 00 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Multi function analog output 1 selec tion terminal 21 Multi function analog output 1 gain ter minal 21 Multi function analog output 1 bias ter minal 21 Multi function analog output 2 selec tion terminal 23 Multi function analog output 2 gain ter minal 23 Multi function analog output 2 bias ter minal 23 Multi function analog output signal level selection Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Note 1 The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3 wire sequence Note 2 Within the setting range 1 to 38 4 10 11 12 13 14 25 28 34 and 35 cannot be set and 29 to 31 are not used m Protective Function Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Motor protection selection 0 1 1 Motor protection time constant 0 1 to 5 0 1 0 Momentary power loss selection 0to2 0 Momentary power loss ridethru 0 0 to 2 0 0 7 See note 2 Minimum baseblock time BB 0 1 to 5 0 0 0 5 See
351. the maintenance information was refreshed and not the present value 7 26 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 e The Clear Buttons for peak values and Clear Error Button are not included in the Maintenance Information Window 7 2 6 Cumulative ON Time Monitor E Functions e This function totals the time that one of the Inverter s control I O terminals is ON by the second e For example if the RUN output s ON time is totaled it is possible to calculate the Inverter s operat ing time and monitor equipment operating time without using the ladder program By measuring the total ON time of the input device connected to the input terminal the re placement time of the input device can be determined By measuring the total ON time of the output device connected to the output terminal the re placement time of the output device can be determined e The total ON time for every I O terminal can be measured and a monitor value can be set for each terminal e When the total ON time of the terminal reaches the monitor value or higher the Connected Compo nent Maintenance Flag will turn ON in the Unit s Status Area Note 1 The input from the Inverter s control terminal block is ORed with the input from DeviceNet communications so the input is considered ON when either input source is ON For exam ple when either the RUN STOP signal is input from the control terminal block or the input is being received from DeviceNet communicatio
352. the Monitor Device Window Inverter 3G3MV PDRT2 Comment SYSTEM UNIT No 1 Motor Name M12 Last Maintenance Date 2003 01 03 a at Ale PiS The present values for the fan operating time an Conduction Time lours i F Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time 14 Hours Clear and electrolytic capacitor operating time can be Average Electric Power Average of 10min 30 w cleared to zero Clear the values when the fan Network Power Voltage 204 V and electrolytic capacitor are replaced Network Power Voltage Peak 205 V _ Network Power Voltage Bottom 202 V Clear L M Unit Maintenance Fv IV Fan Maintenance I Era IV Electrolytic Capacitor Maintenance IV Network Power Voltage drop IT Dorme Forward Rur IT Gper tior Jye IV During Reverse Run p IT Gomected Gomponent Maintenance IV Frequency Agree Unit status report area e Using the Maintenance Information Window Click the General Tab in the Maintenance Information Window Note The differences from the Monitor Device Window are as follows e The Conduction Time Fields in the Maintenance Information Window show the values when the maintenance information was last refreshed and not the present value e The Clear Buttons for present values are not included in the Maintenance Information Window 7 35 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 e The conduction time can be saved written to the EEPROM by clicking the Save Maintenance Counter Button 7 2 9 Network Power S
353. the OMRON homepage and apply as specified 7 1 Basic Configurator Operations 7 1 1 System Configuration for Smart Slave Functions The operating methods described in this section are based on a system configuration using a Config urator connected and online as shown in the following diagram m Configurator Connected to DeviceNet Network DeviceNet Master Unit DeviceNet Configurator 3G8F5 DRM21 E ISA Board or 3G8E2 DRM21 EV1 PC Card SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV or 3G3FV Inverter Slave Slave Slave 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit for 3G3MV Inverter 3G3RV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card for 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverter Configurator Settings Chapter 7 m Configurator Connected to RS 232C Port of the CPU Unit DeviceNet Master Unit DeviceNet Configurator WS02 CFDC1 E Software SYSDRIVE 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV or 3G3FV Inverter Slave Slave Slave 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit for 3G3MV 3G3RV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card for 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV 7 1 2 Displaying Windows The methods for operating the window displays used for setting and accessing the Inverters Smart Slave functions are described here e Edit Device Pa
354. the network power supply voltage from when the Voltage error occurred Unit Conduction Displays the Unit ON time from when the error occurred Time Update Button Displays the most recent error log Note If a new error occurs while the error log is being dis played the error will not be displayed on the Error History Tab Page in real time Click the Update Button to display the most recent error log Clear Button Clears the error log 7 61 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 4 7 Inverter Parameters Tab Page Use this tab page to monitor the following four types of information in the Inverter Monitor Device x General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Error History Inverter Parameters 0137 Speed Reference 4000 r min for x0 01 H2 n035 0138 Speed Actual 4000 r min or x0 01H20035 0139 Current Actual 04 9 0140 Output Voltage 138 V Details Reference Speed Reference Displays the frequency reference value in r min See note Speed Actual Displays the output frequency in r min See note Current Actual Displays the output current level Output Voltage Displays the output voltage level Inverter s internal output voltage reference value Note The unit for the frequency reference value and output frequency are determined according to the set values for the N035 01 03 parameter frequency reference setting and display units When the number of motor poles
355. them together Note 2 Special remote I O objects do not conform to the AC DC drive profile but are specially set for this product 5 15 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 Note 3 The 16 bit data register number and register data is set in two words for each setting Note 4 Be careful of the order of the leftmost and rightmost bytes of the 16 bit data The order is reversed from that of basic and standard remote I O Function Codes The special remote I O function codes are shown in the following table Note that they are different from the explicit message service codes Function code hex Content Data writing Data reading No execution data wrapping only no internal processing takes place Setting Data for Operations and Parameters Read data and write data to be set for operations and parameters are calculated as shown below and then transmitted in hexadecimal e Convert to hexadecimal values with the operation parameter minimum setting value as 1 e Negative numbers are expressed as two s complements e If the original data is already displayed in hexadecimal it is transmitted as is e Set bits that are not used to 0 Do not perform data settings for unused registers Example 1 Setting a frequency reference of 60 Hz when the minimum setting unit is 0 01 Hz 60 0 01 6000 1770 hex Example 2 for 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverters Setting a frequency reference bias voltage ter minal 13 of
356. ting hex stance tribute Parameter write prohibit selection parameter initialization Control mode selection Run command selection Frequency reference selection Stopping method selection Reverse rotation prohibit selection STOP Key function selection Frequency reference selection in local mode Operator frequency setting method selection Operation selection at Digital Operator interruption Maximum frequency FMAX Maximum voltage VMAX Maximum voltage frequency FA 10 35 Appendices Chapter 10 Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute Middle output frequency FB Middle output frequency voltage VC Minimum output frequency FMIN Minimum output frequency voltage VMIN Acceleration Deceleration time setting 1 unit Acceleration time 1 0 1 s set F with Deceleration time 1 n018 Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2 S shape acceleration deceleration 1 characteristic Frequency reference 1 0 01 Hz Frequency reference 2 a Frequency reference 3 Frequency reference 4 Frequency reference 5 Frequency reference 6 Frequency reference 7 Frequency reference 8 Inching frequency command Upper frequency reference limit Oto 110 Lower frequency reference limit 0 to 110 0 Frequency reference setting display 0 to 3999 0 unit selection Rated motor current 0 to Di
357. ting unit can be changed using the voltage scale in Class 2A Instance 1 Attribute 1B Inverter s operation manual for details Example 1 90A 0013 hex for 200 V class 0 4 kW 0 to 255 V 0 to 510 V See note 2 00C8 0190 See note 2 Chapter 6 Note 2 The figures enclosed in parentheses in the Setting range and Default columns are the values for 400 V class Inverters The setting range for the Motor Rated Current is the setting range for the 3G3MV With the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV the setting range is 10 to 120 of the Inverter rated output cur rent Note 3 6 9 Message Communications Chapter 6 6 5 Control Supervisor Objects Class 29 Hex Control supervisor objects are objects that have Inverter control O related functions They are assigned according to their particular control I O functions such as forward operation reverse oper ation error detection and so on Be careful when setting up a remote I O communications connec tion These functions are shared with similar functions used for remote I O so even if they have been set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote I O Support Service Codes Service code number hex Service Get attribute single Set attribute single Reset attribute Can be sent to Class 29 Instance 01 Turns OFF the Forward Operation and Reverse Operation inputs and turns ON the Fault Reset Then turns OFF the
358. tion Chapter 1 1 3 Comparison to Earlier Models The following table shows the functions that have been added to the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card 3G3MV PDRT2 and 3G3RV PDRT2 which are not available in the earlier DeviceNet Communications Unit Card 3G3MV PDRT1 SINU and 3G3FV PDRT1 SINC Refer to the Chapter in the Reference column for more details on each function s Function Comparison Table Category Function New Unit Card Earlier Unit Card Reference PDRT2 PDRT1 SINL Remote I O 1 0 allocation Basic I O Supported Supported Chapter 5 Standard I O Supported Supported Advanced I O Supported Supported Control I O Supported Supported Advanced Func tion Unit Status Supported Not supported Advanced Func tionl Multi function Supported Not supported Input Monitor Advanced Func tion DeviceNet Connection type Poll Supported Supported Chapter 5 Master con Bit strobe Supported Not supported tivit Heen Change of state Supported Not supported Advanced Func tion Cyclic Supported Not supported Connection path switching Supported Supported Selecting I O allocation in Master s parameters Default connection path switching Supported Supported Selecting the I O allocation in the Advanced Func Slave when power goes ON tion Baud rate auto detect Supported Not supported Chapter 7 Baud rate set automatically Paramet
359. tions for trunk and drop lines Baud rate 500 Kbps 250 Kbps or 125 Kbps switchable Communications media Special 5 wire cables 2 signal lines 2 power lines and 1 shield line e Thick Cable DCA2 5C10 100 m e Thin Cable DCA1 5C10 100 m 1 16 Functions and System Configuration Item Specifications Drop line length Communications distances Baud rate Network length Chapter 1 Total drop line length 500 Kbps 100 m max 6 m max 39 m max 250 Kbps 250 m max 6 m max 78 m max 125 Kbps 500 m max 6 m max 156 m max 24 V DC 1 supplied externally Slave power supply 11 to 25 V DC Recommended power supply OMRON S82H Series or 582J Series 64 nodes Without Configurator 1 With Configurator 63 Without Configurator 63 With Configurator 63 CRC check Communications power supply Maximum number of nodes Maximum number of Masters Maximum number of Slaves Error control 1 5 4 Inverters The maximum number of Inverters that can be connected to one Network depends on the PLC model that is used the remote I O functions of the Inverter and whether message communications are used or not Use the message communications function for setting some parameters and for monitoring the output current The differences between models are provided in the following tables m CS1W DRM21 or CJ1W DRM21 DeviceNet Master Uni
360. transmitted after writing data the following situation will occur e Written data will not be enabled Written data will be enabled only after an enter command is sent 8 6 Check and correct the register number Communications Errors Chapter 8 e Inverter will not start The Inverter will determine the state as being under programming until it receives an ENTER com mand and will ignore the start or run command After sending an ENTER command input the start or run command again Communications Errors Chapter 8 8 4 Inverter Faults m Detecting Inverter Faults When a fault is detected in the Inverter itself the status will change as shown in the following table Function Meaning Unit status When an fault is detected bit 15 of the Unit Status Error flag is turned ON and the fault code is stored in bits 8 to 14 For details on the fault check the fault code in the fault code table on page 10 When COS communications are used the remote I O error flag may be turned ON first Remote I O The fault output allocated in the remote I O will turn ON If the fault output is ON turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter and pro gram a sequence to stop the program Explicit messages Read the fault output for Class 29 Instance 1 Attribute OA using message communi cations If there is a fault in the Inverter the fault output will be ON so turn OFF all related inputs controlling the Inverter and pro
361. tribute Umber hex Connect of 9th Monitors U3 13 same codes as U2 01 See note prior fault Connect of Monitors U3 14 same codes as U2 01 See note 10th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 15 1 hr units See note operation time since 5th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 16 1 hr units See note operation time since 6th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 17 1 hr units See note operation time since 7th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 18 1 hr units See note operation time since 8th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 19 1 hr units See note operation time since 9th prior fault Cumulative Monitors U3 20 1 hr units See note operation time since 10th prior fault Note U3 09 to U3 20 are not supported for Asian models Register No 0800 Hex to 0813 Hex are not supported for Asian models 10 5 3 Parameter Reading and Writing The following tables show the SYSDRIVE 3G3RV Inverter parameters and the corresponding regis ter numbers Write and read the various parameters with 1 as the minimum setting unit Negative numbers are expressed as two s complement If the setting unit is in hexadecimal there is no need to convert it When writing data in parameters be sure to send an enter command to enable the written data Unless the enter command is transmitted the data will not be enabled and the Inverter may not start 10 50 Appendices Chapter 1
362. troller trace conditions L mr BE nr dd i instruction in the PLC i to be used for placing triggers and collecting Trigger condition Waveform data DeviceNet Wavetorr data Master Unit DeviceNet Inverter g Current is output pi gt Current level is internally traced and saved Motor Output current The motor torque Inverter s output current fluctuates due to deterioration of the equipment such as loose chain or wear on the machine A current Time waveform can be used to check the fluctuation 7 17 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 m Setting Method Click the Current Trace Tab in the Maintenance Information Window and set each item Current Trace Tab General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Current Trace Error History Page in the Maintenance Saw r Trieser Information Window Time Gurent status af Forward Cmd During Accel Decel C Reverse Cmd During Accel Dece During Accel Decel aaka et C Error During Accel Dece During Accel Decel During Accel Dece During Accel Dece During Accel Dece During Accel Dece During Accel During Accel Dece During Acce During Accel Dece During Acce During Accel Dece Current Trace Sampling Cycle 10ms p Save Trace Trace Buffer full gt Gence Middle Trigger End Trigger
363. ts e Communications without Configurator Fixed Allocations Applicable PLC OS Series DeviceNet Master Unit CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 Remote I O and messages Supported communications Maximum number of Slaves 63 per DeviceNet Master Unit 1 17 Functions and System Configuration Chapter 1 Maximum number of controlled 2 048 points per DeviceNet Master Unit Allocation areas Select one of the following settings using the software switch Fixed Area Setting 1 2 or 3 Switch in the words allocated to the DeviceNet Master Unit in the CIO Area 1 OUT CIO 3200 to CIO 3263 IN CIO 3300 to CIO 3363 default 2 OUT CIO 3400 to CIO 3463 IN CIO 3500 to CIO 3563 3 OUT CIO 3600 to CIO 3663 IN CIO 3700 to CIO 3763 Allocation method Words are allocated for each node to the above data areas in node address order only e 8 point Slaves Allocated 1 word 1 node address e 16 point Slaves Allocated 1 word 1 node address e Slaves with more than 16 points Allocated multiple words multiple node addresses Maximum Without 4 words remote I O 32 number of explicit mes 6 words remote I O 21 Inveniors eats 8 words remote I O 16 With explicit 4 words remote I O 32 messages 6 words remote I O 21 8 words remote I O 16 e Communications with Configurator Free Allocations Applicable PLC OS Series DeviceNet Master Unit CS1W DRM21 CJ1W DRM21 Supported communications Rem
364. turned ON not only when the terminal s sig nal is ON but also when the corresponding bit is turned ON from remote I O The terminal s ON OFF status is logically ORed with the status of the bit sent through remote I O 5 25 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 a I O Format Allocated Words e Outputs PLC to Inverter Instance ID 101 Decimal 65 Hex SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Byte number Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Reverse For function function function function function stop ward sto input 7 input 6 input 5 input 4 input 3 p Multi Multi Multi Fault External function function function reset fault output 2 output 1 contact input output Frequency reference rightmost byte Frequency reference leftmost byte SYSDRIVE 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Byte number Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi Reverse For function function function function function function stop ward sto input 6 input5 input4 input3 input2 input1 p Multi Multi Multi Fault External function function function reset fault output 2 output 1 contact input output Frequency reference rightmost byte Frequency reference leftmost byte Torque reference torque limit rightmost byte Torque reference torque limit leftmost byte Torque compensation bias rightmost byte Torque compensation bias leftmost byte 5 26 R
365. tus of terminal 6 multi function contact input 4 Status of terminal S7 multi function input 7 Status of terminal S7 multi function input 5 selection Status of terminal 7 multi function contact input 5 Status of terminal 8 multi function contact input 6 Note 1 A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Note 2 The bits in the multi function input monitor will be turned ON not only when the terminal s signal is ON but also when the corresponding bit is turned ON from remote I O The termi nal s ON OFF status is logically ORed with the status of the bit sent through remote I O Reference The multi function input monitor can be set together with the control I O remote I O function as a default connection path in the Slave Instance ID 153 decimal 99 hex In addition when a CS1 CJ1 DeviceNet Master Unit is being used the multi function input monitor can be used with other remote I O functions by allocating the following Instance to a COS connection Instance ID 155 Decimal 9B Hex Bytenumber Bit7 Bit6 Bits Bit4 Bits Bit2 Biti Bito ENE most 5 28 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 5 7 Unit Status This section explains the Unit status information which is allocated in the Master when remote I O communications are used and can be used to easily monitor the Unit s status Refer to 5 2 Switching the Remote I O Function for details on allocating unit
366. twa ds leaves dad 2 13 Chapter 3 Setup and Wiring ccc ecw ceccecceeseee 3 1 3 1 Nomenclature and Settings 0 0 0 ee cee eee nee 3 2 3 2 Installation and Wiring 0 0 cece eee eens 3 6 3 3 Communications Line Noise Prevention 0 0 c cece eee nee 3 20 3 4 Conformity to EC Directives 0 2 cece eens 3 25 Chapter 4 SYSDRIVE Inverter Settings 4 1 4 1 SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Settings seks cuss kag ete eee so SSS Seek bbe babs aaa as 4 2 4 2 SYSDRIVE 3G3RV and 3G3PV Settings 00 0 eee eee eee eee 4 6 4 3 SYSDRIVE 3G3FV Settings sax e020 sede a eh ee ee dee ne 4 10 Chapter 5 Remote I O Functions cceeeeeeeeee Sel 5 1 Overview of Remote I O Functions 0 ens 5 2 5 2 Switching the Remote I O Function 0 0 00 ee ce cee eee 5 5 5 3 Basic Remote IO 5 esi dea ee Te TT ae Aa ee wad ee es 5 9 5 4 Standard Remote I O srsti arve never rear rare ene eens 5 12 5 5 Special Remote I O Operation secarse apia ien a KE E cece eee 5 15 5 6 Control Remote I O Operation 00 0 cee eens 5 20 571 IMIG StAtUs ane dorer sk ee re Be 5 29 Chapter 6 Message Communications eceeceeeeeee 6 1 6 1 Overview of Message Communications 00 ccc ee eee 6 2 6 2 Sending Messages from an OMRON PLC 0 00 eee 6 4 6 3 Overview of Messages and Responses 0 0 0 cece eee eee eae 6 7 6 4 Moto
367. ty Carrier frequency upper limit 2 0 to 15 0 See notes 2 and 3 De pends on ca pacity Carrier frequency lower limit 0 4 to 15 0 See notes 2 and 3 De pends on ca pacity Carrier frequency propor tional gain 00 to 99 See note 3 00 Note 1 When the control mode is changed the Inverter will revert to default settings The V f control default setting is given above Note 2 The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter Note 3 These parameters can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6 02 m Reference Parameters Register Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute Frequency reference 1 Frequency reference 2 Frequency reference 3 Frequency reference 4 Jog frequency reference Setting range 0 to max output fre quency Setting unit 0 01 Hz Set with o1 03 Default setting Changes during opera tion Frequency reference upper limit 0 0 to 110 0 Frequency reference lower limit 0 0 to 110 0 Master speed reference lower limit 0 0 to 110 0 10 75 Appendices Register Class 64 Hex In stance At tribute Jump frequency 1 Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency 3 Setting range 0 0 to 400 0 Setting unit Chapter 10 Default setting Changes during opera tion
368. ult code of the fault detected in the Inverter For more details refer to 8 4 Inverter Faults Note 1 The Net Reference and Reference From Net functions cannot be changed during running Note 2 Under the DeviceNet protocol the unit for the speed reference is always r min The number of motor poles 2 to 39 must be set in parameter n035 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units when using DeviceNet open network After changing the unit setting turn the power OFF and then ON again Note 3 Cannot be changed during running 10 20 Appendices Chapter 10 e Communications Data Setting Examples Example 1 Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following conditions set Number of poles set in n035 01 03 4 Speed scale attribute 16 0 e Converting frequency to rotational speed Frequency x 120 number of poles 60 x 120 4 1 800 r min e Converting rotational speed to minimum unit Rotational speed unit 1 800 1 r min x 1 2 1 800 e Converting communications data to hexadecimal 1 800 decimal 0708 hex Example 2 Finding the communications data for outputting a frequency of 60 Hz with the following condition set Frequency setting in n035 01 03 0 Cannot be set with DeviceNet protocol e Converting frequency to minimum setting unit Frequency minimum unit 60 0 01 6 000 e Converting communications data to hexadecimal 6 000 dec
369. umber of PG gear teeth 2 0 to 1000 PG open circuit detection time 0 0 to 10 0 Channel 1 monitor selection 1 to 40 Channel 1 gain 0 00 to 2 50 Channel 2 monitor selection 1 to 40 Channel 2 gain 0 00 to 2 50 Channel 1 output monitor bias 410 0 to 10 0 Channel 2 output monitor bias 10 0 to 10 0 Analog output signal level for channel 1 0 1 Analog output signal level for channel 2 0 1 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used DeviceNet fault operation selection Communications external fault input detection method selection Communications external fault input operation selection Not used Note Values in parentheses are Asian model Inverters m External Terminal Function Parameters Class 64 hex Setting Setting Default In At range unit setting stance tribute H1 01 0400 04 00 Terminal S3 function selection Oto68 1 24 No H1 02 0401 04 01 Terminal S4 function selection 0 to 68 1 14 No H1 03 0402 04 02 Terminal S5 function selection 0 to 68 1 3 0 No H1 04 0403 04 03 Terminal S6 function selection 0 to 68 1 4 3 No H1 05 0404 04 04 Terminal S7 function selection 01068 1 6 4 No H2 01 040B 04 0B Terminal M1 M2 Select 0 to 37 1 0 No H2 02 040C 04 OG Terminal P1 function select open col Oto37 1 1 No lector H2 03 040D
370. unications power supply and the power to other nodes in the following order 1 Turn ON the communications power supply 2 Turn ON the power to each Slave 3 Turn ON the power to the DeviceNet Master Unit Note The power supplies listed above can all be turned ON simultaneously The external I O power supply can be turned ON at any time 2 4 3 Creating and Registering Scan Lists Scan lists are lists that register the information that is transferred between DeviceNet Master Units and Slaves The DeviceNet Master Unit compares the scan list with the status of the Slave currently being communicated with so communications with the Slave are always being checked For details on scan lists and remote I O communications refer to the operation manual for the DeviceNet Master Unit Note When a scan list is disabled communications are possible with all Slaves on the DeviceNet Network with fixed allocations Without scan lists however the DeviceNet Master Unit cannot check if there is an error in a Slave For normal operations always enable the scan lists m Precautions e User I O Allocations The user can allocate any words for Slave I O for the DeviceNet I O Areas IN Area OUT Area in the DeviceNet Master Unit When user allocations are used scan lists must be created with a DeviceNet Configurator and regis tered in the DeviceNet Master Unit The scan list is enabled as soon as it is registered and remote I O communicatio
371. unit can be changed with n35 01 03 frequency reference setting display unit Data that exceeds the upper or lower setting range limits will be considered faulty and ig nored by the Inverter and the previous data will be maintained This function is only available with 3G3FV Inverters which are equipped with flux vector con trol mode It cannot be used with the 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV Inverters When not using either the torque limit of the torque reference set F9 05 torque refer ence torque limit selection from communications to 0 disabled If this setting is not dis abled and 0 is sent as data the torque limit torque reference will be set to 0 and there will be no torque output i e the motor will not operate Although the setting range for torque reference torque limit is 300 0 to 300 0 the torque actually output depends on the motor characteristics For a general purpose motor take the range to be 200 0 to 200 0 5 23 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 e Input Bit Details During run During run Zero speed Zero speed During reverse run During reverse run During reset input During reset input At reference At reference Inverter ready Inverter ready Alarm minor fault Alarm minor fault Fault Fault Operation fault Operation fault Power interruption Recovered from a momentary power interruption recovery Local remote Remote mode Multi function contact Function spe
372. upply Voltage Monitor m Functions e The network power supply values are monitored with this function e The network power supply values present value maximum value and minimum value can be recorded in the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card e The network power supply voltage monitor value factory setting 11 V can be set e When the voltage drops below the monitor voltage set in the Slave the Network Power Voltage Drop Flag turns ON in the Unit s Status Area Note 1 The communications power supply voltage for DeviceNet is a minimum of 11 V Therefore if the power supply voltage is lower than 11 V the Configurator or explicit messages may not read process values correctly Note 2 The maximum and minimum values for the network power supply voltage are cleared when the network power supply is turned OFF m Setting Methods 1 Click the General Tab in the Edit Device Parameters Window 2 Set the monitor voltage in the Network Power Voltage field Edit Device Parameters General Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time Comment SYSTEM UNIT No 1 Motor Name M12 gt Network Power Voltage 243 W 11 0 250 Unit Conduction Time 5555555 Hours 0 429496729 Hours gt Fan Conduction Time KE Hours 0 429496729 Hours Electrolytic Capacitor Conduction Time 4888888 Hours lt 0 42949672
373. utput 01 Multi function output 1 02 Multi function output 2 Note When the present value for the maintenance counter cumulative ON time or contact operations count exceeds the monitor value an error icon will be displayed to the left of the corresponding No setting No 01 in the above screen example I O Comment Displays the user defined connected device comment for 7 2 11 Connected Device each output terminal Comment Maintenance Displays the present value of the maintenance counter for 7 2 6 Cumulative ON Time Counter each output terminal Monitor Note The cumulative ON time in seconds or the contact 7 2 7 Contact Operations operations count number of times is displayed Monitor 7 65 Configurator Settings 7 5 3 IN Tab Page General OUT IN Chapter 7 Operation Time Warning Torque Current Trace Error History No I O Comment Maintenance Counter In Point 1 0 Seconds In Point 2 0 Seconds In Point 3 23 Seconds In Point 4 23 Seconds In Point 5 In Point 6 In Point 7 2 Times 2 Times 56 Seconds Close Details No Refer to the following table for meanings in the No field Note When the present value for the maintenance counter cumulative ON time or contact operations count exceeds the monitor value an error icon will be displayed to the left of the corresponding No setting No 05 in the above screen example Reference I O Comment Displa
374. ve Inverter control I O related functions They are assigned according to their particular control I O functions such as forward operation reverse oper ation error detection and so on Be careful when setting up a remote I O communications connec tion These functions are shared with similar functions used for remote I O so even if they have been set for message operations they may get rewritten for remote I O Support Service Code Service code number hex Service Get attribute single Set attribute single Reset attribute Can be sent to Class 29 Instance 01 Turns OFF the Forward Operation and Reverse Operation inputs and turns ON the Fault Reset Then turns OFF the Fault Reset when Inverter Ready is output 10 14 Appendices m Object Details Instance Attribute Object Software Revision Content Indicates class 29 soft ware revisions The revi sion value is advanced whenever there is a change Setting range Default Forward Stop 00 Stop 01 Forward operation Reverse Stop 00 Stop 01 Reverse operation Net Control Local remote switch Set note 1 00 Operation set in n003 b1 02 01 Force DeviceNet oper ation not valid with 3G3FV State Inverter status See note 1 00 hex Vendor specific 01 hex Startup 02 hex Not ready 03 hex Inverter ready 04 hex Enabled 05 hex Stopping 06 hex Fault Stop 07 hex Faulted During forward ru
375. verter to PLC Instance ID 70 Decimal 46 Hex During forward run Rotational speed monitor rightmost data Rotational speed monitor leftmost data Note A shaded box indicates that the bit is not used Bit and Data Functions e Output Bit Details Forward stop 0 Stop 1 Forward Fault Reset 0 1 Fault reset 5 9 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 e Output Data Details Word address Bit Signal name Rotational speed reference data Content Communications data Rotational speed reference x 2 a Speed scale value of Class 2A Instance 01 Attribute 16 Initial value 0 Setting range 0 to the rotational speed at maximum frequency The speed scale is assigned with the message function For instructions on how to change it refer to Chapter 6 Message Communications The units for the rotational speed reference are set in n035 01 03 frequency reference setting and display units Setting example providing a reference of 1 800 r min When the speed scale value is 0 and the number of motor poles is set in n035 01 03 so units are r min 1 800 r min 1 800 x2 1 800 0708 hex Note 1 In this manual the parameter location for the 3G3MV is written ahead of the parameter lo cation for the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV so n035 01 03 indicates a parameter location of n035 for the 3G3MV and parameter location of 01 03 for the 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Note 2 Un
376. verters to communicate with OMRON PLCs Installing a DeviceNet Communications Unit Card in the SYSDRIVE Inverter allows a variety of operations to be performed from the Programmable Controller such as monitoring RUN STOP and operating conditions and changing set values Note When a DeviceNet Communications Unit Card is used the RS 422 485 of the Inverter cannot be used for communications Easy Communications The following two functions can be used simultaneously in DeviceNet communications between the CPU Unit of a PLC and the Inverter Remote I O Communications I O is automatically transferred between a Slave SYSDRIVE Inverter and the CPU Unit without any special programming in the CPU Unit Automatically transmits Inverter control inputs such as RUN or STOP from a PLC to the Inverter and returns operation status of the Inverter or output frequency monitor data from the Inverter to the PLC e Message Communications Message communications are performed between a CPU Unit to which a DeviceNet Master Unit is mounted and Slaves SYSDRIVE Inverters by executing specific instructions such as CMND and IO WR depending on the model of PLC used from the program in the CPU Unit Allows some parameter setting and monitoring Inverter output frequency output voltage or output current If the remote I O communications is not performed Inverter control data such as RUN or STOP can be input through this message communications function
377. vice Get attribute single oO m Object Details instance Atribute Name Content Seting range Default Read write Size f emd Ep EE PEER 10 2 3 DeviceNet Objects Class 03 Hex DeviceNet objects are related to DeviceNet communications information and operations Processing is performed automatically after the communications connection is established so the functions and data have no particular use for the user Support Service Code Semice code number hex Service Get attribute single Set attribute single Allocate Master Slave Connec tion Set Release Master Slave Connec tion Set 10 5 Appendices Chapter 10 m Object Details Instance Attribute Content Setting range Default Object Software Indicates class 03 soft Revision ware revisions The revi sion value is advanced whenever there is a change Switch setting 00 to 63 The communications node address is specified by the switches and cannot be overwritten Switch setting 64 to 99 00 to 63 The communications node address is specified by the software settings The default setting is 00 Baud Rate Indicates the baud rate 00 125 Kbps 01 250 Kbps 02 500 Kbps BOI Bus off Counter Allocation Infor Indicates DeviceNet com mation munications connection information Note Cannot be written for explicit mes sages Error is returned
378. wn menu in the Parameter Group field Inverter Parameters Tab Page in the Edit Device Parameters Window Edit Device Parameters General OUT IN Operation Time Parameter Transmission Warning Torque Inverter Parameters All parameters Select the parameter group Parameter Group Parameter Name Value 4 0001 n003 RUN command sel Digital operator 0002 n004 Frequency reference sel Digital Operator 0003 n005 Stoppine method sel Decelerates to stop 0004 n006 Reverse rotation prohibit sel Reverse enabled 0005 n007 STOP Key function sel STOP Key enabled 0006 n008 Frequency reference sel in local The FREQ adjuster 0007 n009 Operator freq setting method With the Enter Key 0008 n010 Sel at Operator interruption No 0009 n011 Max frequency 60 0 Hz x Help Used to select the input method for the RUN p Default Digital operator and STOP commands in remote mode f Default Setup Note The displayed parameter groups are classified as shown in the table under Parameter Groups and Parameters Not Set in Groups on page 45 The parameters that cannot be set depend on the Inverter series Set the parameters that cannot be set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page by using the Indi vidual Parameters Tab Page The main parameters can be set on the Inverter Parameters Tab Page Use a Digital Operator to set the parameters that cannot be set from the Configurator 3 The paramet
379. x DD hex Previously received param eter setting data is enabled as operating data without storing it to EEPROM If there is frequent rewriting of data do not send ENTER commands each time because of the limit to the number of times EEPROM can be written Be sure to send an ENTER command that writes data to EEPROM once before the power sup ply is interrupted 6 19 Message Communications Chapter 6 Parameter Classes Instances and Attributes For details on each Inverter s functions and the registers allocated to each parameter refer to 10 4 3G3MV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 10 5 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 10 6 3G3PV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes and 10 7 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 6 20 Chapter 7 Configurator Settings 7 1 Basic Configurator Operations 7 2 Smart Slave Functions 7 3 Edit Device Parameters Window 7 4 Monitor Device Window 7 5 Maintenance Information Window Configurator Settings Chapter 7 This chapter describes the Smart Slave functions provided with the 3G3MV PDRT2 DeviceNet Com munications Unit and 3G3RV PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Card and the methods for setting and monitoring these functions using the OMRON Configurator Ver 2 34 Note If using a version of the Configurator earlier than Ver 2 34 download the update module for the Configurator from
380. x 0024 Hex 002C Hex oe Frequency reference writing Inverter run command writing X Output frequency monitoring Inverter status reading Transmission completed signal nee N Function code Register number comparison CMP 5 5 3 Parameter Register Numbers for Each Function Refer to the following sections for tables showing each Inverter s functions and the parameter regis ter numbers e 3G3MV 10 4 3G3MV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes e 3G3RV 10 5 3G3RV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes e 3G3FV 10 7 3G3FV Register Numbers Classes Instances and Attributes 5 19 Remote I O Functions Chapter 5 5 6 Control Remote I O Operation The control I O remote I O function is a proprietary OMRON format not a remote I O format specified by DeviceNet This remote I O function s features and arrangement match the control terminal I O signals of the 3G3MV 3G3RV 3G3PV 3G3FV Inverters so it can be used for communications with the Inverters multi function inputs There are also default settings available in which the Unit status 16 bits or multi function input monitor data 8 bits is attached to this remote I O function for allocation in the Master data connection path setting 5 6 1 Control I O Remote I O Operation a I O Format Allocated Words e Outputs PLC to Inverter Instance ID 101 Decimal 65 Hex SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverters Byte number Multi Multi Multi Multi Multi
381. y Tab Page The last four communications errors are displayed as an error log Q Network Power Voltage OFF Q Network Power Voltage OFF Q Network Power Voltage OFF Connection Time Out 87 Hours 87 Hours 87 Hours 93 Hours Item Reference Displays the details of the errors that have occurred Note The most recent error is displayed at the bottom of the list Network Power Voltage Displays the network power supply voltage from when the error occurred Unit Conduction Time Displays the Unit ON time from when the error occurred Clear Button 7 70 Clears the error log 7 2 12 Communications Error Log Monitor W Chapter 8 Communications Errors 8 1 Communications Line Errors 8 2 Message Communications Errors 8 3 Special Remote I O Errors 8 4 Inverter Faults 8 5 Inverter Alarms Communications Errors Chapter 8 8 1 Communications Line Errors Malfunctions in DeviceNet communications that are a result of broken wires short circuits reversed wiring duplicate node address assignments or noise interference are detected as transmission BUS errors When a transmission error is detected the Inverter s Fault Bit will turn ON and the motor will coast to a stop When an error is detected perform error processing according to the indicator display of the DeviceNet Communications Unit Card with the terminal cover and Digital Operator removed Operation Indicators The
382. ys the user defined connected device comment for each input terminal 7 2 11 Connected Device Comment Maintenance Counter Displays the present value of the maintenance counter for 7 2 6 Cumulative ON Time each input terminal Note The cumulative ON time in seconds or the contact operations count number of times is displayed Monitor 7 2 7 Contact Operations Monitor Note The following table shows the meanings of the values set in the No field Details 3G3RV 3G3PV 00 Multi function input 1 Forward stop Forward stop 01 Multi function input 2 Reverse stop Reverse stop 02 Multi function input 3 Multi function input selection 1 Multi function contact input 1 03 Multi function input 4 Multi function input selection 2 Multi function contact input 2 04 Multi function input 5 Multi function input selection 3 Multi function contact input 3 05 Multi function input 6 Multi function input selection 4 Multi function contact input 4 06 Multi function input 7 Multi function input selection 5 Multi function contact input 5 07 Multi function contact input 6 7 66 Configurator Settings Chapter 7 7 5 4 Operation Time Tab Page Maintenance Information x General OUT IN Operation Time Warning Torque Current Trace Error History No Equipment Name Response Time Peak Value un Operation Watch1 15 ms 20 ms Operation Watch2 15 ms 20 ms Operation Watch3 0 ms 0 ms

Chapter 10

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents